fanuc fapt ladder ii operator

7/28/2019 Fanuc Fapt Ladder II Operator

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fanuc-fapt-ladder-ii-operator 1/455

Computer Numerical Control Products

GE Fanuc Automation

FAPT LADDER - II

Operators Manual

B- 66184EN/02 April 1998



Warnings and notices for

this publication

GFLE-003

Warning

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the variousmatters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.

Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in thismanual should be regarded as “impossible”.

NoticeThis document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have

been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or

variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with

installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in

all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to

holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with

respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of

the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall

apply.

The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

CIMPLICITY® Genius®

The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

Alarm Master

CIMSTAR

Field Control

Genet

Helpmate

LogicMaster Modelmaster

PowerMotion

ProLoop

PROMACRO

Series Five

Series 90

Series One

Series Six

Series ThreeVuMaster

Workmaster

© Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd. Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.



[Notice]

1. The FAPT LADDER-I I software is copyrighted by FANUC

Ltd.

2. No part of the software or this manual may be used or

reproduced in any form without the prior consent of FANUC

Ltd.3. The software shall be installed on no more than one computer

at a time. Separate software packages must be purchased for

each additional installation.

4. The information in this manual is subject to change without

notice.

[Trademarks]

1. MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

2. PC/AT and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International

Business Machines Corporation.

3. PR2OlH is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

4. VP1000 is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to

describe all the various matters.

However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not

be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so

many possibilities.

Therefore, matters which are not especially described as

possible in this manual should be regarded as “impossible”.



CONTENTS

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 THE MAJOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.1 The Overview of PMC Function . . . .

1.2.2 PMC Models to be Supported . . .

1.2.3 The Procedure to Make a Sequence Program

1.3 ABOUT PMC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.1 PMC Programming Method . .

1.3.2 About Symbol & Comment Data . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

13

13

13

14

14

14

16

17

17

20

20

22

25

25

26

27

27

27

27

28

28

28

30

32

87

92

94

97

. . .

. .

2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT . . . .

2.1 CONFIG. SYS . .

3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INST ALLATlON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE .................

3.2 INSTALLATION ............................

3.3 DIRECTORY CONFIGURATION AFTER INSTALLATION

3.4 FILE CONFIGURATION .......................

3.4.1 File System .........................

3.4.2 The Constitution of Source Program ........

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . .

.

. . . .

. .

. . . .

4. OPERATION ..........................

4.1 ACTIVATION ... _ ................

4.2 GENERAL OF OPERATIONS . _ _ .......

4.2.1 Menu Configuration . _ _ ........

4.3 COMMON SYSTEM OPERATIONS ......

4.4 INITIAL MENU .................. , ..

4.4.1 Program Selection .............

4.4.2 Off-Line Function .............

4.4.3 On-Line Functron .............

4.4.4 On-Line Function (Selected Program)

4.4.5 Utility ......................

4.4.6 Termination ... ............

4.5 OFF-LINE FUNCTION ................

4.5.1 ..............................

4.5.2 Editing ..........................

4.5.2.1 Title data editing ...............

4.5.2.2 Ladder diagram/step sequence edrting

4.5.2.3 Symbol & comment ediling ........

4.5.2.4 Message edrlrng ...............

4.5.2.5 I10 module editing ......... ....

4.5.2.6 System parameter editing ..... _ ..

. . . .

. . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

, . . . . . . . . . . .



4.6

4.53 Printout ................................................ 101

453.1 Overview ........................................... 101

4.5.3.2 Starting and ending printing .............................. 102

4.5.3.3 Output item setting .................................... 103

4.5.3.4 Print format-l: SETUP menu ............................ 111

4.5.3.5 Changing printer output format-2

(AMOFTRP, DAT/’ .INF/message file) ....................... 112

4.5.3.6 Changing the printer specification .......................... 123

4.5.4 Compilation ............................................. 124

4.5.4.1 Start and terminate .................................... 125

4.5.4.2 Compile options ...................................... 128

4.5.4.3 Password set function .................................. 129

4.5.5 Decompilation ............................................ 131

4.5.5.1 Operation ........................................... 132

455.2 Decompile option ...................................... 133

4.5.5.3 Password ........................................... 136

4.5.5.4 Outputting to split files ................................... 137

4.5.6 Input/Output ............................................. 138

4.5.6.1 I/O port setting ....................................... 138

4.5.6.2 ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer) ........................ 140

4.5.6.3 Transfer to and from PMC ............................... 142

4.5.6.4 Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory card . . 144

4.5.6.5 Handy fi le + 3.5” floppy disk (MS-DOS format) ................. 150

4.5.6.6 Backup of user program ................................. 153

4.5.7 Setting Program Options .................................... 1554.5.7.1 Compiler ............................................ 155

4.5.7.2 Decompiler .......................................... 157

4.5.7.3 Modifying program option initial values (OPTION.CNF) ........... 158

4.5.8 Mnemonic Editing ......................................... 159

4.5.8.1 Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file ............. 159

4.5.8.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program ............. 162

4.5.8.3 Mnemonic file format ................................... 163

4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format) ...................... 166

4.5.8.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format) ......................... 172

4.5.8.6 The note if the step sequence function is selected

when setting a model ................................... 173

4.5.8.7 User batch file execution ................................ 174

4.5.9 Utyilty ................................................. 175

4.5.10 Selecting On-Line Function from Off-Line Function .................. 180

ONLINE ...................................................... 181

4.6.1 The Outline of Online Function ................................ 181

4.6.1.1 Outline ............................................. 181

4.6.1.2 Starting the on-line function .............................. 184

4.6.1.3 Menus ............................................. 191

4.6.2 Preparation .............................................. 192

4.6.2.1 Connecting the cable ................................... 192



4.6.2.2 Parameter screen for on-line monitor ..................

4.6.2.3 Modifying parameters .............................

4.6.2.4 Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function .........

4.6.2.5 Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function

(Only for Power Mate-H) ..........................

4.6.3 Fife ...................... .......................

4.6.3.1 Fitesave ......................................

4.6.3.2 Selecting off-line function from on-line functron ...........

4.6.3.3 Exit .........................................

4.6.4 Diagnose .........................................

4.6.4.1 Ladder monitor .................................

4.6.4.2 PMC Status window ..............................

4.6.4.3 Signal Status window .............................

4.6.4.4 PMC Parameter .................................

4.6.4.5 PMC alarm status ...............................

4.6.4.6 Executing or stopping a ladder program ................

4.6.4.7 Displaying system information .......................

4.6.5 Input/Output .......................................

4.6.5.1 Loading from the PMC ............................

4.6.5.2 Storing to the PMC ..............................

4.6.5.3 Writing to F-ROM ...............................

4.6.6 Communication .....................................

4.6.7 Examples of Operation ...............................

4.6.7.1 Monitoring a ladder program held by the PMC ...........

4.6.7.2 Monitoring a ladder program held by a personal computer ...

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST .....................

5.1 A: INITIAL MENU .......................

5.1.1 Fatal Error ......................

5.1.2 Error .................... .....

5.2 B : TITLE EDITING .

5.2.1 Error ..........................

5.3 C : 1’0 MODULE EDITING ..................

5.3.1 Error .. .......................

5.3.2 Warning ........................

5.4 D : SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITING ..........

5.4-l Error ...... ...................

5.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING .....

5.5.1 Fatal Error ............... ......

5.5.2 Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram) ......

5.5.3 Error (at Editing Step Sequence) ......

5.5.4 Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram) ....

5.6 F : SYMBOL 8, COMMENT EDITING ..........

5.6.1 Error ..........................

5.7 G : MESSAGE EDITING ...................

5.7.1 Error .... ....................

.

.

.

. . .

. 193

. 194

. . 194

. . . . 195

. . . . 196

. . 196

. . 198

. . . 198

. . 200

. 201

. . 215

. . . 216

. . . . 218

. . . . 231

. . . 232

. . . a 233

. . . 234

. . . . 234

. . 235

. . 236

238

. . 240

. . 240

. . 252

. . . . 254

. . . 255

. . . . . 255

. . 255

. . . . 256

. . . 256

257

. 257

257

. . . 258

258

. . . . 259

259

. . . . 259

260

262

. 263

. . 263

. 263

263



I. BASICS(NORMAL OPERATIONS)

.

,,,,,, ,,, ,, ,,, ,,,



1. GENERAL

1. GENERAL

1.1 Overview

Thank you for purchasing FANUC FAPT LADDER-II.

FAPT LADDER-II is a programming system for developing FANUC PMC sequence programs.

This software is designed to operate on IBM PC/AT and compatible computers running MS-DOS,

and supports both the Japanese and English languages. For details of the operating conditions,

see Chapter 2.

Personal computer Name Specification Remarks

IBM PC/AT and FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201 -J503 Japanese and English are

compatible machine both supported

This manual explains procedures required to install, activate, and operate this software about that

are specific to the system designed for use with personal computers.

For PMC operations and how to create PMC sequence programs, refer to the manuals listed below.

T FANUC PMC-MODEL PAl/PAB/RAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RBG/RC/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2

Programming manual (LADDER language) J B-61 863E

Inquiry form

If you have any questions after reading this operator’s manual and the manuals listed above,

use the inquiry form attached at Appendix 9 to consult us the questions.

- l -



1. GENERAL

The following abbreviations are used in this manual.

1)

2)

For PMC models

Abbreviations PMC Models

PMC-R Series

. PMCRA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3

. PMCRB3 FANUC PMC-MODEL FIB3

PMCRB4 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4

PMCRB5 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB5

PMC-RB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB6

PMCRC3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC3

. PMCRC4 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC4

PMC-PA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL PA3

PMC-QC FANUC PMC-MODEL QC

PMC-NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB

PMC-NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2

Others

MS-DOS and PC-DOS are both referred to simply as DOS, unless it is necessary to distinguish

between the two operating systems.

-2-



1. GENERAL

1.2 The Major Functions

1.2.1 The overview of PMC function

. . . . . . . ..) CNC (.......... i

Machine Tool

PMC DVDOS-232-C

LS-232-C ”

.,.,,.. . . . .

INLINE functions through RS-232-C (Note 1)

Monitorring & debugging a sequence program j

Run/Stop a sequence program

Transferring a sequence program

Write to Flash ROM

.

FLOPPY

CASSETTE

/Handy File

ISetting and display PMC parameters

II::::‘.

EPROM/ ROM

MODULE

RS-232-C 1

Input/Edit

sequence

program

Personal computer

IBM PC/ATloppy disk

Hard disk

Fig. 1.2.1 General of PMC Function

Note 1) The specification of the above functions may vary from one PMC model to another.

Also, the above functions may not be usable with some models. For details of each

function, refer to the PMC programming manual for the model being used.

-3-

,, ,,



1. GENERAL

< Functions of FAPT LADDER-II >

Input, Output, Display and Edit sequence program

Monitoring and Debugging of sequence program

(Display of signal status, PMC alarm, PMC status.)(Online monitoring of ladder diagram. Display of cross reference.)

Setting and display PMC parameters

. Run/Stop the sequence program

Transferring of sequence program

. Writting to Flash ROM

. Print of the sequence program

c PMC built-in functions >

. Input, Output, Display and Edtt sequence program

Monitoring and Debugging of sequence program

(Display of signal status, signal waveforms, ladder diagram, PMC alarm, memory)

(and crossreference.)

(Monitorring of ladder diagram, step sequence. Debugging user C language.) .

Setting and display PMC parameters

. Run/Stop the sequence program

1.2.2 PMC models to be supported

PMC models to be supported by FAPT LADDER-II are as below.

PMC-RA3

PMCRB3 (Note 1)

PMCRB4 (Note 1)

PMC-RB5 (Note 1)

PMC-RB6 (Note 1)

PMCRC3 (Note 1)

PMCRC4 (Note 1)

PMC-PA3 (Note 1)

PMC-QC

PMC-NB

PMCNB2

(Note 1) ONLINE function is supported with this PMC

-4-



1. GENERAL

1.2.3 The procedure to make a sequence program

Start of control system development

+

Decrde the control object (machines, CNC)

t

Decide the specifications of control operations

Calculate the number of DVOO points

Estrmate the control scale

Create the ladder diagram (desrgnicreate addoress mapcoading)

J

Input, edit, debua and print the sequence procvam

t

FAPT LADDER-II 7

Ladder diagram editing

Mnemonic editing

Compile/Link

I I

I - Decompile (1

I IN0ONLINE function (for debug) I

t

CNC (PMC)

. Ladder diagram editing

Pnnt the sequence program fi-----c

YES

FAPT LADDER-II supports an off-line function and on-line functions. The off-line function is

used for performing programming using a personal computer that is not connected to the CNC

(PMC).

The off-lrne function IS equrvalent to the FAPT LADDER function. The on-line functions are used

for programming when a connection and communication are established with the CNC (PMC).

There are basically two on-line functions: the on-line function and the on-line (selected program)

function. The former is designed for use wrth CNC (PMC) internal programs. The latter is used

mainly to monitor and edit programs designed to operate on the personal computer.

Addrtionally. a PMC programming system, FAPT LADDER (for personal computers), is available.

Thus version of FAPT LADDER IS not covered by this manual. For informatton about FAPT

LADDER for personal computers, refer to the FAPT LADDER (for personal computers)

operator’s manual (B-661 31).

-5-



1. GENERAL

1.3 About PMC Program

1.3.1 PMC programming method

The ladder method is most of ten used for programming the sequence control governed by a PMC.

This method was derived from relay-panel control circuits. Since it has been in use for years,

many sequence engineers are already fatiiiiar with it.

The greater the number of functions implemented by the PMC, the larger and the more

complicated the sequence program becomes. And it is hard to describe such program for ladder

method.

To overcome this problem, step sequence method programming has been introduced into FAPT

LADDER-II.

(1) What is the step sequence method ?

The step sequence is one of the method for programming a sequence control governed by a

programmable controller, this method features the direct representation of the control flow on

a flow chart. Each block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the ladder

method. Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow of the processes and is

well-suited to the control of entire process.

Step sequence method is available to PMC-RB4&lBG/RC4.

The programming by step sequence method is supported by FAPT LADDER-II, not but by the built-

in editing function on PMC-RB4/RBG/RC4.

Setting a model in FAPT LADDER desides witch method, step sequence or ladder, is used.

For the details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.

(4.5.2.2.(3) STEP SEQUENCE EDITING]

-6-



1. GENERAL

The configuration of a sequence program

A sequence program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit ;

. The 1st level of ladder

The 2nd level of ladderThe 3rd level of ladder

Subprograms of ladder

Subprograms of step sequence

LEVEL 1 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 2 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 3 ( LADDER)

I ub Program Pl (Step Sequence) I

Sub Program P2 (LADDER)

Sub Program P3 (LADDER)

.

.

Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

-7-



1. GENERAL

(3) Data flow

- FAPT LADDER-II I

Source program

Ladder 1st level

Mnemonic

t

Compilation/Decompilation

1

Object code

Mnemonic program

A mnemonic program without

step sequence

IMemory card format file II

t

‘------I!Input/Output Input/Output

I

RS-232-C

I

Handy File

FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER

I

Memory card

CNC

V v

1) [PMCI 1) F’MCI2) II/O1 2) II’013) [HOST] 3) [FDCAS]

V

1) WC12) If/O13) [MCARD]

(Boot process also can

read the memory card)

The operation of soft key when Input/output

-8-



1. GENERAL

1.3.2 About symbol & comment data

On FAPT LADDER-II, you can assign names or add notes to l/O signals, internal relays, and can

add notes to a sequence program.

They are generally called”symbol & comment data”.

(1) The definition of terms

The definition of terms are shown below to distinguish between some symbol & comment data.

Terms

Symbol

Relay comment

Coil comment

Net comment

Definition and uses I Display

Name assigned uniquely to each relay/coil, x0.0 INPUT

to be used in place of PMC address.+I---,++

Text assigned to relays/coils to explain them.

1 COMMENT COMMENT

Text assigned to coils to explain them.HERE IS COIL

COMMENT

Text assigned between ladder nets to explain

them.

{’ COMMENT “)

(2) Symbol & comment specification list

(a) For input signal and internal relay

I Speciftcation

Available

characters

Note 1)

Note 2)

Note 3)

Symbol

ASCII characters

(lower-case alphabetic

characters not allowed)

16 byte

20,000 entries

(Note 2)

Not allowed

Yes, if it is 6 bytes or

shorter

(Note 3)

I Relay comment

1ASCII characters

Japanese kanalkanji

characters

16 byte

20,000

(Note 2)

Allowerd

No

Coil comment

ASCII characters

Japanese kanalkanji

characters

(Note 1)

30 byte

20,000

(Note 2)

Allowerd

Yes, if the symbol

assigned to the same

address is 6 bytes or

shoter (Note 3)

CRT/MD1 can not display Japanese characters, replaced to blank.

Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer may restrict

them.

When the total size of all coil comments exceeds 64 kbytes, no symbols and

comments are displayed on CRTIMDI.

-9-



1. GENERAL

(b) For ladder sequence program

Specification

Available characters

Steps to occupy

Maximum characters/line

Maximum lines

Maximum number

Display on CRT/MD1

Net comment

ASCII characters

Japanese kana/kanji characters

Line feed

2 step/Net comment

64 characters/line

4095 characters/Net comment

100 lines/Net commennt

About 20,000 Net comments

No

(Note 1)

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

Note 1) The limitation which is reached first becomes the limitation for the Net comment.

Note 2) Number of characters in each Net comment effects on maximum number of Net

comments. Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer

may further restrict them.

-lO-



2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT


To use this software, the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied.

Computer

I PU

OS

I--emory

IHard disk

1Graphic adapter

IBM PC/AT and compatible machines

386 or hrgher

(Note 1)

MS-DOS Version 5.OAlior later (to activate Japanese system)

MS-DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)

Conventronal memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 2)

EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended) (Note 3)

About 3 Mbytes or more space (Note 4)

VGA or higher

EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines

be in conformity with MS-KANJI API

(Note 5)

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

(Note 3)

(Note 4)

(Note 5)

This software does not run on PC98 series of NEC.

Even if the machrne has 640 Kbytes memory, the empty memory may not be more

than 520 Kbytes when an installed driver, for example, uses a large memory space.

The size of free space in memory can be checked with the MS-DOS command

CHKDSK.

The quantity of the EMS and XMS memory effects on the performance to handle

Symbol data and Net comment. Please prepare enough EMS and XMS memory

specially for Symbol data or Net comment of large number.

Moreover, at the system with EMS less than 256 Kbytes, the maximum number of

steps which FAPT LADDER can handle may be ristricted. Please prepare 256 Kbytes

or more EMS rf possible.

In addrtion, an area for storing sequence data is required.

[NEC PR201HlandlFANUC PRINTERtare also available by changing system file.

For details, refer 1014.5.3.6 Changing the Printer Specification).

About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used :

EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as an temporary area.Although, FAPT LADDER runs with no EMS & XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory

according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance.

(1) Expansion memory

When reading ladder programs, FAPT LADDER uses EMS if available. If EMS is not

available, FAPT LADDER uses conventional memory. When only conventional memory is

used, up to 21840 program steps can be created. When 256KB EMS memory IS available,

however, up to 32000 program steps can be created. The srze of EMS is 256KB for all PMC

models, regardless of the size of the program to be edited.

-ll-




(2)

(3)

2.1

EMS and XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data

FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory lor Symbol & Comment data if available.

When neither of them are available, FAPT LADDER will make temporary file on the hard

diskdrive, and processing large number of Symbol & Comment data may be slower.About 200 Kbytes of EMS & XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Symbol data.

EMS and XMS memory for Net comment

FAPT LADDER also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, or temporary file as same as Symbol &

Comment data.

About 200 to 300 Kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Net cement.

CONFIG. SYS

Before FAPT LADDER-II can be started, the following lines must be added to the CONFlG.SYS

file:

DEVICE = C:UDOSVANSI.SYS

DEVICE = C:VDOSVEMM~~~.EXE

DEVICE = C:UDOSVMSIME.SYS

DEVICE = C:VDOSVMSIMEK.SYS

(1)

(2)

(3)

ANSI.SYS (required)

The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This setting cannot be omitted.

EMM386.EXE

This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS memory. When using

another EMS driver, refer to the relevant manual for details of the setting required in

CONFIG.SYS.

MSIME.SYS/MSIMEK.SYS

This device driver enables the use of MS-KANJI API for Japanese-language input. When

using another Japanese language input system, refer to the relevant manual for details of the

setting required in CONFIG.SYS.

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

(Note 3)

All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with MS-DOS. This manual

assumes that these device drivers are placed under the vDOS directory on drive C.

The specification of switches and parameters may be required for the above settings.

For details, refer to the MS-DOS on-line help or the relevant manual.

When using a memory card, refer to the manual provided with the memory card for

details of the setting required in CONFIGSYS.

Some device drivers may adversely affect the operation of FAPT LADDER-II. If a

problem is anticipated, specify only ANSI.SYS in CONFIG.SYS. Omit the specification

of the other device drivers. When only ANSI.SYS is specified, FAPT LADDER-II will

support only English, but allows any contention with other device drivers to be identified

quickly. Recognized conflicts are listed in Appendix 7.

-12-



3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION


3.1 The Contents of Pacage

FAPT LADDER-II is stored in 5 floppy disks listed below.

The media size is 3.5 inch 2HD (1.44MB). Please confirm contens.

(1) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 1 ‘A08B-9201 -J503#ZZO7-1

(2) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 2)!A08B-9201 -J503#2207-2

(3) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 3)!A08B-9201 -J503#2207-3

(4) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 4)!A08B-9201 -J503#ZZO7-4

(5) FAPT LADDER-II (Vol. 5)!A08B-9201 -J503#ZZO7-5

3.2 Installation

Install the system using “install .exe” stored in Vol. 1 of system disk.

the example below assumes that a system floppy disk is set in drive A:, and directory Y FLADDER

has been created on the hard disk drive C: to install the system.

[Operation]

Set system floppy disk Vol. 1 in the drive A:.

Execute “install. exe” using the following command.

C: ‘+ > A: Y INSTALL

After that, go on accordint to inquiry of the system which is inquired when necessry.

To select the displaying color. the dialog-box below appears.

Select the color pattern by < 7 >, < 5_7 key and the color of dialog-box itself will be

changed. Select the displaying color for matching your personal computer’ s display.

Select color type.

. COLOR

0 MONO 1

Fig 3.2 (a) Select Displaying Color Dialog Box

-13-



3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND

@ If installation completes, the message below appears.

INSTALLATION

(Note 1) To stop installation, press the <Esc> key.

(Note 2) Note that the files in the directory specified to be installed are all deleted

3.3 Directory Configuration After Installation

The installer automatically creates the following subdirectories under the specified directory

(C: Y FLADDER in the above example):

C: Y FLADDER

l=zz

The messages to be displayed by FAPT LADDER-II (such as menus, displayed instructions, and

error indications) are contained in a file under this subdirectory.

The installer automatically creates the following subdirectory (indicated by ‘) when an on-line

function is used:

C: Y FLADDER JPN

ENG

PMC-RAM (‘)

(Note) Be careful not to accidentally delete the above directory.

3.4 File Configuration

3.4.1 File system

The files constituting FAPT LADDER-II are described below

(1) Customizable files

Some functions can be customized by the user. These functions include setting of the format

for printing created ladder programs, and communication port setting based on the RS232C

standard.

For these functions, the associated data is held in text-format files, which can be directly

edited by the user. These files are listed below.

(a) Printing (For details, see Section 4.5.3.5.)

. AMROFTRP.DAT

CROSSINF.DAT

-14-




. ‘.INF

(b)Communications (For details. see Section 4.5.6.1.)

. FL10 AT.DAT-

(c)Compile/decompile (For details. see Section 4.573.)

OPTION.CNF

(d)Entire system

FLMNE.DAT (For details, see Section 4.5.8.7.)

FLVIEW.DAT (For details, see Section 4.5.9.)

(2) Other files

(a)README.TXTIREADMEJ.TXT

These text files contain important information that became available after the manual was

printed.

Use this information in combination with the manual. Note that READMEJ.TXT contains

Japanese text, while README.TXT contains English text.

(b)*.JPN”.ENG

A file having either of the above extensions contains most of the messages (menus.

displayed instructions. and error indications) to be displayed or printed by the system. The

location of such a file is described in Section 3.3.

(c)FLMNE.ERR

The results (including errors) of mnemonic conversion are written into this text file.

(d)‘.EXE

A file having this extension IS an executable file. Such files are not handled by the user.

(3) Files that are not installed

The files under subdirectory vAPPENDlX on Volume 5 are not installed by the installer.

These files are listed below.

(a)Printing (For details. see Section 4.5.3.6.)

. AMROFTRP.ESC

. AMROFTRP.PR

(b)Standard symbols (For details. see Appendix 4.)

F16&18-M. SYM

F16&18-T. SYM

PM-D.SYM

PM-H.SYM

FSOM-CNV. SYM

FSOT-CNV. SYM

. PM-C_CNV. SYM

-15-




(c)Message conversion tools (For details. see Appendix 5.)

CHGMES.EXE-

3.4.2 The constitution of source program

In FAPT LADDER-II, a sequence program, which is object of editing and printing, is called “source

program” and managed by storing in files below.

H in ase of named "C:Y DATAYSAMPLE" as source rogram

- SAMPLE.ERR execution result file

l SAMPLE.MAP map file

l CONTROL

l SYSPARAM

Source program managing file

System parameter data file

Title data file

* XSYMBOL.xxx Symbol & Comment data file

* MESSAGE Message data file

* IOMODULE I/O module data file

* LEVELl. #LA 1st level ladder data file

- LEVEL2. #LA 2nd level ladder data file

* LEVEL3. #LA 3rd level ladder data file

- Pyyy. #LA Sub-program ladder data file

* Pzzz. #SS Sub-program step sequence data file

* NETCMT.xxx Net comment data file

- * MCARD Memory card format data file

(Note 1) Contain source program compile/decompile results and map information. These files

are not Included in a source program, but are named in accordance with the name of

the source program.

These files are stored under the directory one level above the source program

storage directory.

(Note 2) “xxx” is number of multi file managing.

(Note 3) Only for using LEVEL-3 ladder at PMWRC3IRC4IRC4 (STEP)/NB/NB2/QC.

(Note 4) "YYY", zzz" s number of sub-program.

(Note 1)

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

(Note 3)

(Note 4)

(Note 4)

(Note 2)

- 16-



4. OPERATION

4. OPERATION

4.1 Activation

(1) Activation method

01 Move to the drive and directory where the FAPT LADDER-II system software is installed.

0 Key in “FLADDER -z Enter > ”

(Example) Start FAPT LADDER-II when the software is installed under the \FLADDER

directorv on drive C:

1 ~:=~f%?f!)~ER < Enter > 1

C:\FLADDER > FLADDER c Enter >

6 The FAPT LADDER-II initial screen, shown below, appears (Fig. 4.1 (a)). After this screen

is displayed for 3 seconds, the screen display automatically changes to the initial menu

screen (Fig. 4.1(b)). Pressing any key while the initial screen is displayed immediately

switches the display to the initial menu screen, without the 3second delay.

(Note) When no source program is selected, menu items “OFF-LINE FUNCTION” and “OFF-

LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)* are displayed using dotted lines. These menu items

cannot be selected.

Drw. No.

Ver. -

F A P T LADDER-II 1I I

i I

il7

II II1 II II

A08B-9201 -J503 Version 01 .O

Copyright (C) 1991- 1995 FANUC LTD.

FANUC

1Fig. 4.1 (a) FAPT LADDER-II Top Screen

‘fnitial menu .. ..

Press [TAB] key to move the cursor and

press [ENTER] or [SPACE] key to select.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~. ._.....,.._..I.> *r..,...dY.:.<:>::::::::.::.:::.“:: . . .:+:....A.

Off-tine Eunctjon

OWtine Func tidii

On-tine f selected grogrtim)

Utility

Exit

Fig. 4.1(b) Initial Menu Screen

-17-



4. OPERATION

(2)There are two methods of returning from the FAPT LADDER-II initial menu screen to the DOS

command line.

Press the < Esc > key while the initial menu screen is displayed.

Alternatively,select menu item “END” from the initial menu.

For details of selecting a menu item from the initial menu, see Section 4.4.

(Note)

FAPT LADDER-II can be started more easily by creating a batch file, as described below, under a

directory for which a path IS set.

Example: The following batch file, named “FLDDER”, is created when the FAPT LADDER-II

system software is installed under the \FLADDER directory on drive C:

- 19-



4. OPERATION

4.2 GENERAL OF OPERATIONS

4.2.1 Menu Configuration

The configuration of the menu screens displayed by the system are shown below.

$ - Program Selection

-I -

TOP screen

+

Off-Line Function - (1) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (b))

- On-Line Function - (2) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (c))

- On-Line - (3) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (c))

(selection program)

- Utrlity DOS

- flOadat

- View result

(1)

I I

L- Linker

TITLE

- LADDER DIAGRAM/

PARAMETER STEP SEQUENCE

- SYMBOL - SYMBOL & COMMENT

LADDER DIAGRAM - MESSAGE

STEP SEQUENCE - I/O MODULE

- SYSTEM PARAMETER

- FA WRITER

- CROSS REFERENCE LIST _ PMC WRITER

- BIT ADDRESS MAP - PMC

Handy File

- Memory Card

- PROGRAM OPTION SET-UP - BACKUP

SOURCE PROGRAM+MNEMONIC FILE

MNEMONIC FILE+SOURCE PROGRAM

EXECUTE USER BATCH FILE

- 20 -



4. OPERATION

(3)

1

On-Line Function

(selected program)t

File save

Off-Line Function

Exit

Diagnose Ladder Monitor/ Timer

Online Editor Counter

- PMC Status Keep relay

- Signal Status Data table control

- PMC Parameter Data table

- PMC alarm status

- RUN/STOP the ladder

- System Information

-21-



4. OPERATION

4.3 Common System Operations

The operations described below are common operations for FAPT LADDER-II.

(1) Function keys

When the menu items shown below are displayed in reverse video, the user can select the

desired menu item by pressing the corresponding function key.

I

(2)

IF11 WI

Escape key

The escape key < ESC> has the same effect as selecting [END] with the function key. The

escape key terminates the current screen then returns the display to the previous screen in the

menu hierarchy.

(3) Cursor keys

The cursor keys < t >, < 1 >, < t >, and < * z are used to move the cursor to

select input items.

When two or more cursors can be used on a single screen, the second or subsequent cursor

can be moved by pressing the <SHIFT> key together with the < +- > or < + > key.

(4) Scroll keys

The scroll keys <ROLL UP> and <ROLL DOWN > scroll the screen up (to display

previous one page) and scroll the screen down (to display the next one page), respectivelythe PC9801).

The scroll keys <PAGE DOWN > and < PAGE UP > display the next page and the previous

page, respectively (for the IBM PC/AT).

(5) [INS] key

This key switches between the overwrite mode < 0 > and insert mode < I >.

(6) [TAB] key

IF31 IF41 W W if=71 IF81 W IF101

the

(for

When multipul keys are displayed, press < Tab > key and select one button.

-22-



4. OPERATION

(7) Status line

A status line is displayed at the top of the screen.

Main menu PMC-RB3 <o>[c: \FLADDER 1

t- Item name t Model currently selected t- Current

currently selected directory name

Edit mode (overwrite/insert)

(Note) The indications on the key tops may slightly vary from the descnptions of this

manual, depending on the personal computer used.

(El) Pop-up menuWhen the following pop-up menu appears, the desired process can be selected usrng any of

the three methods described below.

1) Cursor movement

To select an item, press the cursor key < 7 > or < 1 >, such that the item to be selected

is displayed in reverse video. Then, pressing the <RETURN > key selects that item.

2) Function key

A function key is indicated at the left of each item. To select an item, press the

corresponding function key.

3) Command name

An uppercase letter In (usually, the initial of) an item name is the command name. In the

above case, pressing the letter key < U >, <Cl >, or <A> can select the Update, Quit, or

Append command, respectively.

-23 -



4. OPERATION

(9) Pull-down menus

On some screens, the following menu bar is displayed along the top of the screen:

. ..; FiM’; ::: ,.‘:.‘,

2. Diagnose 3. l/O 4. Communication %I&

I I I I I1 I I I )

Function number.

Function name JIcon for PMC status

indication

(See the section

explaining how to start

the on-line functions.)

Pressing the < Alt > key displays the pull-down menu for ?‘i Ff@.~v

The pull-down menu for a function can also be displayed by pressing the < Alt > key and

the corresponding function number simultaneously.

1:We’ 2. Diagnose

file sa\reiI

3. I/O 4. Communication %lll-

I Exit

Using the cursor keys. position the highlight to the desired item on a function’s pull-down

menu. A menu item with an arrow mark (G) at its right edge has its own pull-down

menu, which can be displayed by pressing the < + > key.

The target screen is displayed by pressing the < Enter > key after positioning the

highlight to a desired menu item.

-24-



4. OPERATION

4.4 Initial Menu

The inttial menu screen appears when the FAPT LADDER-II system is started. See also Section

4.1.This screen reappears upon the termmation of a function chosen from this menu. To select a

function from this menu, use the <Tab> key to move the cursor down to the desired function,

then press the <Enter> key or spacebar. The cursor can be moved up by pressing

< Shaft > + < Tab > simultaneously.

4.4.1 Program selection

When “PROGRAM SELECT” is selected from the initial menu, the screen display switches to the

screen used to specify the name of a source program to be used with the FAPT LADDER-II

system.

fi) To spectfy the source program name, enter “drive:vsource-program-name.”

@ After entering the name of the desired source program, press Fl (EXEC] or <Enter>. Press

FlO [END] to return to the initial menu screen without changing the source program name.

Examples:

Specifying “SAMPLE” as a source program under the DATA directory on drive C:

Enter “CvDATAvSAMPLE [EXEC].”

When the source program name is specified, the PMC model name and source program name are

displayed in the upper half of the initial menu screen.

Specifying a new source program name:

The model setting screen, shown below, appears. Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to the

name of the PMC model for a new source program, then press the <Enter > key (Fig. 4.4.1). If

Fl [COPY] is pressed without specifying a PMC model, an existing source program name can be

copied as a new source program.

The FAPT LADDER-II system creates a directory for the specified source program name, and

creates each of the source program files.

-25-



4. OPERATION

PMC E;IBI’MC -NBZ

SPliTI PMC type for new program.

Fig. 4.4.1 Selection of PMC type

4.4.2 Off-line function

When “OFF-LINE FUNCTION” is selected from the initial menu, the off-line menu screen appears

(Fig. 4.4.2). The off-line function includes a function equivalent to the FAPT LADDER system

software, displayed on the off-line menu screen. This function is used mainly for programming

using a personal computer when connection with the CNC (PMC) has not been established. For

details. see Section 4.5.

Fl KEY

F2 KEV

F3 KtV

f 1 KEV

f 5 KEY

Ph KEY

f ? KEY

tB KtV

tY KtV

EDI T

PRI NT

COMPI LE

DECOHPI L~

I / O

PROGRRH OPI I DN SLI PUP

MNEMONI C EDIT

Ul l Ll l V

ON- LI Nt tUNCl l DN

Fig. 4.4.2 Offline menu screen



4. OPERATION

4.4.3 On-line function

When “ON-LINE FUNCTION” is selected from the initial menu, the on-line function is applied to the

programs held by the PMC. Programs are loaded into the personal computer by means ofautomatic communication with the PMC. For details, see Section 4.6.

4.4.4 On-line function (selected program)

When “ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)” is selected from the initial menu, the on-line function is

used for the program selected on the personal computer. A comparison is made between the

program held by the PMC and that selected on the personal computer. If a mismatch is detected,

select a monitoring method. For details, see Section 4.6.

4.4.5 Utility

When “UTILITY” is selected from the initial menu, a function selection menu appears to enable the

user to select a function such as DOS, floadat. View result, and Linker. To start a desired function,

press the corresponding function key. For details of each function, see Section 4.5.

4.4.6 Termination

When “END” is selected from the initial menu, the screen display returns to the DOS command

line.

-27-



4. OPERATION

4.5 Off-line function

4.5.1

F2 KEY PRI NT

F3 KEY COHPI Lt

F1 KEY OFCOHPI LF

F5 KEY I / O

Ff , KEY PROGRRH OPTI ON SET- UP

FI KEY MNEMONI C EDIT

t8 KtV Ul l Ll l V

tY KtV ON- LLNt CUNCI I ON

Fig. 4.5.1 Off-line Menu Screen

4.5.2 Editing

The source file of a sequence program is edited.

(1) Start

[Operation]

il! Select (EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.

m ’ 1

c \ ORI R\ SRHPLI 1Fl KEY EDI T

C2 KtV

C3 KtV

I I KFV

15 KLV

Fh KFV

tI KtV

t8 KtV

tY KtV

PRI NI

CUnPLLt

Df CnHPll~t

l / O

PROGRRH OPl I ON SCI - UP

MNEMONI C EDI T

Ul l Ll l V

UN- Ll Nt tUNCI I l l N

Fig. 4.5.2 (a) Off-line Menu

-28-



4. OPERATION

8 The followlng editing menu screen appears:

Fig. 4.5.2 (b) Editing Menu

0 Select data to be edited with the corresponding function key.

69 The editing screen for the selected data appears. For example, the screen below is

displayed when [TITLE] is selected.

EDT ( TTU ) m< : y:,:. G&@fj@~~~~$$*$@&$$

1 bWllN: TUI. BLUIIH NkW2) FMCllM TWL NW:O tK &NC‘id4) IW I’KuW No

i l%NJCF%CKlELRC&:16M4

5) EIITUN No6) I’Ko(;I(I\M Inbwiw; No7) DATA It I’RUXW4IftG

8) I’Rfilbd D:SCMD UY9) WMkR1TEN BY

IO Rm

I 2 :I 4 5 6 7 _I ‘I p%r: : 9 “f l,).q&“

Fig. 4.5.2 (c) Editing Title

-29-



4. OPERATION

(2) Termination

[Operation]

cis Select [END] or press the e ESC > key on the editing screen.

02 The following message appears:

E-1 Save (update) & quit

F2 Quit

F3 Edit

CC Press the desired function key.

(0

(ii)

(iii)

When UPDATE is selected. the editing operation is terminated after the results of

editing are written to a file.

When QUIT is selected, the editing operation is terminated without writing the results

of editing to a file.

When RESUME is selected, the editing is continued.

0 When UPDATE or QUIT is selected, the display returns to the editing menu screen.

(i) To continue editing, select the appropriate function key.

(ii) To terminate editing, select [END]. The display returns to the main menu.

452.1 Title data editing

Title data represents the titles of sequence programs generated by a machine tool builder.

(1) Start

[Operation]

ci? Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.

- 30 -



4. OPERATION

G9 The following title edrting screen appears:

I) KKIIINI:TW. Bllll)tiR NAk’2) WIIM 11XJI.M3) fm: & NCNM : FINK I’M:HltlEl.K & I:IfMI) PMC RICRAMO

8) I’RWAMW:SIGNRI)Y!I) RtMMIII’KN HY

Fig. 4.5.2.1

(2) Input

[Operation]

(I) Select an input ttem (displayed in reverse video) with the -Z 1 > and < 7 > keys.

Q) Enter data.

The maximum number of characters usable for each title data item IS listed below

MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : 32 characters

MACHINE TOOL NAME : 32 characters

CNC & NC NAME : 32 characters

PMC PROGRAM NO : 4 characters

EDITION NO : 2 characters

PROGRAM DRAWING NO : 32 characters

DATE OF PROGRAMMING : 16 characters

PROGRAM DESIGNED BY : 32 characters

ROM WRITTEN BY : 32 characters

REMARKS : 32 characters

-31-



4. OPERATION

(3) Termination

[Operation )

01 Select [END] on press the -z ESC > key to return lo the editing menu screen.

B, The following message appears.

11

0 Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing menu.

4.5.2.2 Ladder diagram/step sequence editing

(1) A program configuration screen

This screen lists subprograms, and supports the selection and editing of a target subprogram

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:VFLYDATAYSFC~~J

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 LEVEL1 n LEVEL2 [I LEVEL3

D Pt)ooi 13 PO002 [:I O004 u PO005 0 PO006 u PO007

u PO008 11 PO009 t3 PO014 0 PO015 q PO016 0 PO017

0 PO021 1 1 PO022 fd PO024 113O025 u PO026 01POO27. .

.

(7 PO101 cl PO202 m]PO304 [1]PO405 oJPO406 0]PO407

Sub-program : PO001

ADRESS DELETEI

NEW ZOOM

-32 -



4. OPERATION

(a) Screen display (Pxxx represents a subprogram number)

Screen display Meaning Display by [ZOOM] or < Enter >

0 LEVEL1 the 1stadder level ladder diagram

j--J LEVEL2 the 2nd ladder level ladder diagram

0 LEVEL3 the 3rd ladder level (Note 1) ladder diagram

0 Pxxx a subprogram ladder diagram

01 Pxxx a subprogram step sequence diagram

A ] Pxxx (Note 2) a subprogram in editing step sequence diagram

x Pxxx a duplicate subprogram ladder or step seqence diagram

Note 1) The 3rd ladder level can be omitted.

Note 2) If the [ZOOM] key was used to nest a program to a certain depth, and if the

subprogram configuration screen is displayed upon a single press of the [MAIN] key,

the editing of the subprograms for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed is suspended.

Such subprograms are marked with n J.

Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key Other keys

[ ADRESS] : Switching address’symbol display

[ DELETE] : Deleting a subprogram < Page Up > : Displaying previous screen

[ NEW ] : Creating a new subprogram <Page down > : Displaying next screen

[ ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram

Meaning of display

I DIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [C:~FLADDERJ I

Edit : FAPT LADDER editing screen

(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) : The list screen of subprogram

PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ) : Setting a model

[AxFLADDERv : Current directory


PROGRAM : Remarks which is one of the title data

I ~LEVELI I lLEVEL2 i-tLEVEL3

LEVEL1 : The 1st level of ladder

LEVEL2 : The 2nd level of ladder

LEVEL3 : The 3rd level of ladder

I 1 PO001 i1)POOO2 11 PO004 F-1 O005 f-1 O006 11 PO007 I

I I

I- I]

: a subprogram of the ladder

: a subprogram of the step sequence

-33 -



4. OPERATION

(b) Creating a new subprogram

- Press the [NEW] key.

New program name ?D 1

- Enter the number of the subprogram to be created (P200, for example).

(c) Modifying a subprogram

- Key in the number of the subprogram to be modified (P200, for example), then press the

[ZOOM] or <Enter> key. Alternatively, position the cursor to P200 then press the

[ZOOM] or <Enter> key.

- If a subprogram number marked with LI] (P21, for example) is selected, the following

message is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.

Continue to select it ? (Yes/No) [Yl

To continue the editing session using the results obtained from suspended previous editing

session, press the < Enter > key. To cancel the results of the previous editing session and

edit the subprogram from its original state, enter <N >.

-34-



4. OPERATION

(2) Editing a ladder diagram

(4

(1)

W

(iii)

(iv)

Start

Display the program list screen. Position the cursor lo the program indicated by 0, thenpress the [ZOOM] or <Enter> key. The ladder diagram editing screen, shown below,

appears.

ItlD-XQ 8 CCO=lESI DATR NO 1 800Bl‘/kWOl‘

‘SY=S!JNPLE 00001 RCO=RELRY SANPLE 00001?

~mI~~3llmrm~m~n~

II

Fig. 4.5.2.2.2 (a) Ladder Diagram Edrling Screen

When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown. (For the [View] command,

see (j) “Combining a sequence program”

The line shows the name of the file which is being edited, number of the net which is

displayed on the screen, and the number of program steps/maximum number of steps that

can be edited.

The line shows a sub-program number (P address) or label number (L address).

The lines show a symbol and comment added to the data at the address selected by the

cursor.

6, AD = X000.0 : Address on which the cursor IS placed

Q, SY = SAMPLE : Symbol data

0000 1 Total number of symbols

@ RCO = RELAY SAMPLE : Relay comment data

00012 Total character numbers of relay comment

($I CC0 =TEST DATA No. 1 : Coil comment data

0030’00030 Total character numbers of symbol/coil comment

displayed on CRTIMDI.

-35-



4. OPERATION

C-9 unction key indications and selection

The ladder diagram editing functions correspond to the function keys as indicated below.

0)

63 [comand]

(cornand] 8J

(3) Under condition 0, holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.

(a Under condition 8. holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.

1 2 :3 ,“:‘? 4 5 ,&$& 6 ‘..! , j. :i; : y * g .I, , 11) $&i’- :

@ [Delnet]

I WNC 2 CihCet 3 search 4 <*down 5 <*&I#$ 6 7 MICI+ZI 8 9 ' 10 "I

I inrnet 2 InstIn 3 his&n 4 5 ‘6 7 ‘. .8 . ' 9 1 10. : . I

!‘i? [Search]

I .9 2 bottom 3 rrch 4 W-W& 5 t+trth 6 g-srth 7 C-dOWi 8 i-Up 9 10 I

03 [Copy] I [Move]

1 until 2 cancut 3 search 4 odown 5 ' &up 6 7 8 9 10

t *

1 to 2 cancel 3 Search 4 c+down 5 c*up 6 to-fil 7 ftS+orfi 8 9 10 I

* (to-erg] is displayed in the [File] command mode only.

[File]

Opens a window in which the name of an input program can be specified. Select desired

(9

do,

processing from a POP-UP menu.

[syEdit]

1 bX8C 2 cancel 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

-36-



4. OPERATION

6)

(Note) Whrle the functron keys of ti) are displayed in ladder diagram editing, a command

of 0 can be executed. For example, entering <A> and (COMAND] on the 0)

screen has the same effect as selecting F4 [Adress] on the @I screen. To select a

command of 0 in this way, enter the upper-case letter (not necessarily initial letter)in the correspondrng command name shown on the 8 screen.

Ladder program input

For ladder program input. select [LADDER] from the editing menu. The function key

programmer menu IS displayed. When no sequence program has been entered, the screen

displays only the rrght and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.

At this stage, program input can be started.

Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location In the ladder diagram.

Examples of basic rnstruction program input and function instructron program input are shown

below.

(i) Example of basic instruction program input

x0.1 D30.2 F14.2 Y52.7

X2.4

[Operation]

Move the cursor to the start position. then press [ -i i- 1.

The [ -I t_ ] symbol appears on the screen. The message “HORIZONTAL LINE

ILLEGAL” appears at the lower-right corner of the screen. This message warns the

user that horizontal ladder diagram line creatron is not completed. Enter an address

and bit data.

Enter X0.1 on the keyboard and press

contact, and the cursor moves right.

the <Enter > key. The address is set at the

As in 01 and 8. enter contact A of D30.2.

Enter contact B of F14.2.

Press [e ] and enter address F14.2, then press the <Enter> key. The

address is set on contact B and the cursor moves right.

Without moving the cursor, press [ 4 1.

A horizontal line segment extending to the right is drawn automatically and a relay coil

symbol appears near the right vertical rail.

-37-



4. OPERATION

Enter address Y52.7, then press the < Enter > key.

The cursor automatically moves to the input start position on the next line.

Next, enter an OR conditron.

Press [ -#+- J and enter address X2.4, then press the -Z Enter > key.

The address is set at contact B and the cursor moves right.

Press [ - ] to enter a horizontal line.

To enter a horizontal line, enter a number and press the horizontal line key

I - 1. The line segment will be entered as many times as the number entered.

Note, however, that such a line never exceeds the right vertical rail.

A vertical line extending upward is required for OR. Press [ --! ) to enter a

vertical line extending upward.

(ii) Example of function instruction program input

For function instruction input. press the function key (functn]. Next, enter a SUB number,

then press the c Enter Z- key.

A function instruction can also be entered by entenng the function instruction name or SUB

number and pressing the [functn] key.

If the user does not remember a certain instruction name or SUB number, a function

instruction table that lists function instructions and corresponding SUB numbers can be

displayed on the screen.

The table can be displayed just by pressing the (funcln] key without entering any data.

Then the function instruction table is automatically displayed.

Press the [functn] key to return to the ladder diagram screen from the function instruction

table.

MOVE (1) (2) (3) (4)(.)!.)(.)i) (.j(!!~K, 0000 0000

(SUB 8)

Control conditionOutput address

-Input data address

- Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

-High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

I

When entering a function instruction with this function. enter the

parameters of the function instruction vertically as shown below.

-38-



4. OPERATION

[Operation 1

0

Q

Co

Enter a control condition.

Press [ ---I l--- 1. Next. enter an address and bit data, then press the < Enter> key.

The cursor moves right..

Enter a function instruction.

Press the (functnj key. Next, enter SUB number 8. then press the <Enter> key. The

function Instructton diagram shown above appears.

Enter the parameters of the function instruction.

First. enter the high-order 4-bit logical multiplication data of the first parameter. then

press the <Enter> key. The cursor automatically moves downwards. Enter the

remaining three parameters one by one.

(iii) Restrictions and notes on ladder editing

[Restrictions]

Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to the portlon between the RD

and WRT instructions)

a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted as steps in the

corresponding mnemonic program), the following message appears:

“A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.”

If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.

Restrictions related to a ladder diagram display per screen

If an attempt is made to display more than 70 ladder net lines per screen, the error

described below occurs.

a) Symptom

(a-1 1 When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following message appears.

“The NET being created is too large.”

If 70 lines are exceeded, the following message appears, and no net is

displayed.

“A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.”

(a-2)When there are more than 70 fines totaled over two or more nets, the following

message appears.

“The NET being created IS too large.”

If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or more nets, the following

message appears for a net that is the current net when 70 lines are exceeded,

and the display of the current net IS dtscontinued.

“The NET IS larger than the edltlng buffer.”

In this case, specify the net to be displayed, using the ladder diagram search

function (such as net number search).

How to obtain the number of lines per screen

Even if part of a net IS dlsplayed on a screen, all lines of the net are included in the

- 39 -



4. OPERATION

total for that screen. In addition, a space line between nets is counted as a valid line.

The number of lines tn each net to be displayed is determined as follows:

(b-l ) Basic instructions

One line is comprised of one basic instruction.

+_I- 1 line

1-r *lines

(b-2) Function instructions

The number of lines in a function instruction is: The number of control conditions

or parameters. whichever is greater, plus 1

Examples of calculation follow.

- When the number of control conditions < number of parameters

1004O_ Number of control conditions = 2

Fro00Number of parameters = 4

ROlONumber of lines = number of

R020parameters + 1 = 5 lines

.

- When the number of control conditions > number of parameters

00Number of control conditions = 3

Number of parameters = 1

Number of lines = number of control

conditions + 1 = 4 lines

-4o-



4. OPERATION

(b-3) Data table section of function instructions

The data table section of the COD, CODB,

follows:

- When the data table is one or two bytes

ACT

--i+

000003

or DISP instruction is calculated as

Number of lines = number of data tables/6 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

SUB 49

DISP

00000000

006 0000

009 0000

0011

0003

0300

00000000

0000

0000

00000000

0000

Number of lines in the data tablesection = 1 /6

= 1 with remainder 5

= 2 lines

- When the data table is four bytes

Number of lines = number of data tables14 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

000 00000000 00000000

002 00000000 00000000

004 00000000

0005

0007

D300

0320

Number of lines in the data table

section = 514

= 1 with remainder 1-

= 2 lines

-4l-



4. OPERATION

(b-4) Example of calculating the number of lines per screen

For the ladder shown below, the number of lines in the screen display section is

obtained as follows:

- The valid nets on the display screen are nets A and 6.

- Number of lines in net A

Function instruction section + data table section = 6 lines 0 lines

(3+1) (11’6)

- The number of lines in net 8 is 2.

Net A

Screen displa!

,

Net B

:

Net C

ACT

+I-

section. . . . .

I

1

SUB 49

DISP

000 0000

003 0000

006 0000

009 0000

0011

0003

0300

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

....... :

c) Examples of symptoms

Example of symptom (a-l)

- The ladder diagram can be edited only when the “total number of message data steps”

parameter of the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than 396. This is because when

the total number of steps is 396, the net consists of 70 lines.

If a net that consists of a total of 396 steps or more is created during mnemonic

editing, the following message appears, and the display of the net is discontinued.

“The data table is too large.”

-42-



4. OPERATION

Example of symptom (a-2)

- If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function instruction on the same screen as

that of a basic instruction, the following message is displayed, and the attempt is

rejected.“The NET being created is too large.”

For example, if the basic instruction net has 68 lines, the MOVE instruction (SUB 8)

cannot be entered, (because the total number of lines exceeds 70). The results of

calculation are described below.

Dtsplay screen

:.

< Measure >

RST L+

+“I SUB 8

18-line net

:-INumber of MOVE

instruction lines =

number of parameters

(4) + 1 = 5 .

: 68 + 5 = 73 lines

If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the MOVE instruction can be entered.

- A baste tnstructton net cannot be entered together with another basic-instruction net, if

the total number of lines is greater than 70.

For example, if a 68-line basic-Instruction net is followed by another basic-Instruction net,

the element of the third line of the latter net cannot be entered.

Display screenrr ] 68-line net

---I+No more lines can

be entered.I

< Measure >

If the display of the 68-line net IS not scrolled, the latter basic instruction can be entered

When the CODB instructron (SUB 27) and DISP instruction (SUB 49) are edited on the

same screen, if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the total number of message data

steps for the DISP Instructton (SUB 49). the following message appears. and the

-43-



4. OPERATION

attempt is rejected.

“The NET being created is too large.”

This symptom also occurs In a combination of two DISP instructions and a combination ofCODB and COD instructions.

For example, if the number of tables for the CODB instruction is 200, the total number of

steps for the DISP instruction can be only 66 at maximum. The calculation results are

shown below.

Display screen.._...... ._.. ._

196 00000000 00000000

198 00000000 00000000

4 bytes

200 data tables

Number of CODB

. instruction lines = 55 -

I

. .

Function instruction

section = 4 parameters

+1 ’

Data table section

= 20014 = 50

Calculation of DISP_ instruction data items -

that can be entered

Function instruction

sections = 3 parameters

+ 1

Number of remaining

lines = 70 - 55 - 4

= 11 lines

Data tables

= 11’6=66

< Measure >

Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display screen makes it possible to set the

total number of steps to 396.

0 Restriction on the maximum number of steps

The maximum number of ladder steps that can be edited is as follows:

Without EMS : 21840 steps

With EMS : 24000 steps

Note, however, that the maxrmum allowable number of steps can decrease, depending

on how memory is used.

If a ladder being edited exceeds the maximum allowable number of steps, editing is

disabled and the following message is displayed:

MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER

-44-



4. OPERATION

(4 Replacing sections of a sequence program

Lines in an already created sequence program can be replaced rn the same way as described

in Item (c) above.

Move the cursor to a program section to be changed, then enter new data.

@I Sequence program addition

[Notes]

0) An attempt IO scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key or other keys fails if the

ladder program is incomplete (for example, without addresses) or invalid.

A correct ladder program must be created before the screen can be scrolled.

8 Up to eight contacts and one coil can be entered in one line on the screen.

However. this restriction does not apply to a sequence program created in mnemonic

format. When a sequence program created in mnemonic format exceeds this limit, it is

displayed over several lanes with a continuation symbol.

This continuation symbol cannot be deleted with ( -- --- 1. Use (Delnet] (net

deletion) to delete this symbol. (See Item (6) in this section.)

Press the [comand] soft key of the function key programmer menu and use the function keys

indicated below.

To terminate the programmer menu, press the < ESC 7 key.

I iflrmt oekl@Jt Insert Adren Search COPY MOW File rygdtt I

I Insert 1

As described below, there are four types of sequence program addition in a ladder diagram.

(i) Example: when a relay contact is added on a line

l Addilion on a line

HH-

tTo be added

Move the cursor to the position to add item(s), then enter item(s) in the way described in

Item (c) above.

-45-



4. OPERATION

l When a vertical line affects addition

[Operation]

Move the cursor to the position shown above.

Press [ 4_ ] to delete the vertical line to the left extending upward. This

disappears.

Press [ J ] to create a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor,

then press [ - 1. A horizontal line and vertical line are created.

Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact is to be added.

Press [ -_I + ] to add a contact.

(ii) When a line is added vertically

.’

iii+-N- To be added

To add a line vertically, an area is required for the addition. To create such an area, the

lower part of the ladder diagram must be shifted down by one line. To do this, move the

cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed lines, then press the [insnet]key.

Each time the [insnetj key is pressed, the lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted one

line down to create an area for addition. Make an addition in this area.

After line addition, any remaining area (as In the case where two lines are added in an area

large enough for three lines) can be left as it is.

[Operation]

Move the cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed Ilnes.

Press [insnet].

The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line.

-46-



4. OPERATION

(iii)

When the [insnet) key IS pressed without entering a numeric value, one line is Inserted.

When the [rnsnet] key IS pressed after entering a numeric value, the number of lines

specified is inserted.

Move the cursor to the desired position and press [ -_1 f--j. Then set address data

and press the <Enter > key. The the cursor moves right.

Press the [ L ] soft key to create an OR circuit

Line insertion in a single-net sequence program

Blank lines are inserted one by one.

(Operation]

0 Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the (inslin] key. The enterednumber of lines is inserted.

(When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a number, just one line is added.)

-v- -1

4ursor

If the (insltn] key IS pressed when the cursor is posttioned as shown In the left-hand

figure. a blank line is inserted as shown in the right-hand figure.

(iv) Element insertion in a single-net sequence program

Elements are added one by one.

[Operation]

0 Enter the number of elements to be inserted, then press the [inselmj key. The entered

number of elements is Inserted.

If the character c A> is prefixed to the number of elements to be Inserted and the

[inselm] key IS pressed. elements are inserted after the cursor.

(If the [Inselm] key IS pressed without entering the number of elements to be inserted,just one element is inserted.)

II e II.1, . ( ,. I

-47-



II the (inselm] key is pressed when the

figure, an element is inserted as shown in

before the cursor.

4. OPERATION

cursor is placed as shown in the left-hand

the following figure. The element is inserted

If the character <A > is entered and the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is

placed as shown in the left-hand figure, an element is inserted as shown in the right-

hand figure. The element is inserted after the cursor.

(1) Deletion in a sequence program

(i) A program can be partially deleted by positioning the cursor at the location to be deleted

and pressing one of the below three soft keys

[ _____ ] : Deletes a horizontal line, relay contact, relay coil, etc.

I 4 ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the left of the cursor.

I 2 ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor.

(ii) Use the [Delnet] key to delete a program net (section from an RD instruction to a WRT

instruction).

(iii) Multiple nets can be deleted one by one.

in&net Reklai lfisert &dress Serrrh &.&. MWQ ..ki;e., SjrBiiR

[ elnet] 1

[Operation]

0 Deletion

Move the cursor to the net to be deleted, then press the (Delnet] key. The net to be

deleted is displayed in red.

G? Deletino multiple nets

Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down key, [c-down] key, or [search]

key, then display the nets to be deleted in red. If the [c-down] key is pressed after a

numeric value is entered. the cursor moves as many times as the entered numeric

value.

-48-



4. OPERATION

0 Execution : Press the [exec] key.

Cancellation : Press the [canc el] key.

Deletion except : Press the [exclud] key. Exclude nets except specified nets in 8.

specified nets

r4, When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, move the cursor to the first net to

delete, enter the number of nets to delete, then press the [Delnet] key. With this

operatron. steps ci) and 8 can be omitted.

(g) Searching in a sequence program

A sequence program can be searched using the following soft keys:

[Search] J

U) ItopWhen this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program is drsplayed on the screen

and the cursor is moved to the start of the program.

(ii) [bottom]

When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence program is displayed on the screen and

the cursor is moved to the end of the program.

(iii) [srch]

Search operatton using this key searches the program for aspec ified address from the

current loca tion for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When an address

IS found, it is displayed on the screen. An address to search for can be specified in one of

two ways.

CiJ Address specrfication usrnq the cursor

Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press the [srch]

key. Thus operatron searches the program for the specified address from the current

loca tion of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

If the specified address is found, the sectron of the program containg the address is

displayed on the screen. The cursor IS automatically positioned at the found address.

If the search operation fails to find the specified address, the cursor does not move.

To terminate searching, press the < ESC > key.

-49-



4. OPERATION

x2.0 F54.1 Y52.3 G11.6

-;+@ri@#%?.I”

Cl

035.3 .(I,II

G17.2 X4.2 Y49.1

x14.0 032.0

+I

F54.1 b G43.1

x0.5 D21.2

- When the same address as this address

is to be searched for, move the cursor to

this position, then press the [srch] key.

- When the same address is found,

the cursor moves to this location.

G3 Address soecification by address inout

Enter the address to find with the keyboard, then press the [srch] key. .

This operation searches the program for the specified address from the current location

of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

When the specified address is found, the section of the program containing the address

is displayed on the screen. The cursor is automatically positioned at the found

address.

If the search operation fails to find the specified address, an error indication appears.

(iv) [w-srch] (WRT coil search)

This key is used to search the program for a relay coil with a specified address from the

current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When a relay coil

is found, it is displayed on the screen. If multiple relay coils are found, the coil which is the

closest to the cursor is displayed

The address of a relay coil to search for can be specilied in one of two ways.

Ci> Address soecification usino the cursor

Move the cursor to the relay coil with the address to search for, then press the [w-

srch] key.

This operation searches the program for relay coils with the specified address from the

current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the section of the program

containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.

If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error

indication appears.

Q Address spectfication bv address input

Enter the address of relay coils to search for with the keyboard, then press the [w-

srchj key.

This operation searches the program for relay coils wrth the specified address from the

current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

- 50 -



4. OPERATION

When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the section of the program

containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.

If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error

Indication appears.

(v) [n-srch] (net-number search)

This key displays those ladders that have a specified net number, starting from the top of

the screen. If the [n-srch] key is pressed without entering a number, the display is

advanced by one net.

(vi) [s-srch ] (function-instruction search)

This key searches for function instructions. Searching is performed by entering a function

instruction name or number, then pressing the [s-srch] key. If the [s-srch] key IS pressed

while the cursor is on a function instruction, function instructions with the same number as

that function instruction are searched for.

(vii)Search operation using the cursor keys (< c *, < -+ >)

l Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. The address is searched for.

l Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. The NET No. is searched for.

l Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed by a function instruction number,

then press a cursor key. The function instruction is searched for.

Example: Enter Sl, then press a cursor key. The function instruction END1 is

searched for,

(viii) Searching in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)When the source program type is “FORMAT-B/C”, global searching in all main/sub-

programs is enabled.

l The range of search

All programs, whrch rnclude a currently dtsplayed subprogram, are searched for.

The subprogram is searched for in the ascending order of P address.

a) From the current cursor posttion to bottom of currently opening subprogram.

b) From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one.

c) From LEVEL1 to subprogram of which P address is small next to a).

d) From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).

-51-



4. OPERATION

G-SRCH mode continues unless pushing the c ESC > key or the [cancel] key.

1st net of LEVEL1

-1

- Final net of the maximum numbered subprogram

(Searching in the order of 0 -@)

Whole

program

.

l Searching result

When the object of search is found, the cursor will move to the position.

In case of finding in another program, the program which is currently displayed will be

closed.

Then, the program which contains the object, will be opened to display the object

position with the cursor.

At this time, whether to save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are

modifications in the program to be closed.

When two or more objects exist, the result of search are displayed in order of 1) one

by one.

- 52 -



4. OPERATION

l Operation

The global search is operated with the following functton key.

,,;‘~+.$-s+~ 4-4 5 -t&&t* 6-..-L-,~‘L~_“a t@r .+_ s +r. j ,o&~er)

(cornand]J

8 [comand]

i insnet 2 D&net 3 in5Qtt 4 AdrQSj, 5 %arctI 6 Copy 7 &lrruc 8 Fk 9 iyhdlt lo

d) Select the (G-srch] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following will be displayed) in state of 03

1 2 3

1 2

(Shortcut command is ” -z G > + [COMMAND]“)

PI

4 Starting of “G-SRCH” mode

It switches to the mode of “G-SRCH” by the operation of 0) +O.

After that, all programs are searched unless quitting “G-SRCH” mode.

b) Execution of search

c)

Refer to “(c) [search]“‘“(d) [w-srch]“/“(e) [s-srch]” in “(7)Searching in a sequence

program”, for how to specify the target of global search.

End of “G-SRCH” mode

“G-SRCH” mode is ended by pushing <ESC > or [cancel] key. The end method is

different individually.

- <ESC>

- [cancel] =

= Only “G-SRCH” mode is ended. The program on the opening now

is the state as it is.

It returns to the program which was opened at beginning the “G-

SRCH” mode. The program on the opening now closes.

Whether will save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are

modifications in the program which is currently displayed.

Copying sections of a sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be copied net by net. Specify the net to be copied. The

net can be copied tn the same file that is being edited or into another file. The selected net

remains as it was.

- 53 -



4. OPERATION

File which is being edited

(COPY1

Range to be copied

[until]

Fig. 4.5.2.2 (b)

Specified file

I to cancel sear& c-down Pup &fil tu-arg

[Operation]

Copying a net

Place the cursor on the net to be copied and press the [Copy] key. The selected net is

displayed in yellow.

Copying two or more nets

To select the nets to be copied, first move the cursor to the first net of the range to be

copied, then move the cursor to the net at the other end of the range to be copied by

pressing the cursor up, cursor down, [c-up], [c-down], or [search] key. The selected nets

are displayed in yellow.

Alternatively, enter a numeric value and press the [c-up] or [c-down] key. The cursor

moves according to the specified value.

Setting the net or nels to be copied

Press the [until] key.

Specllying the copy destination using the [to] key (Copying the net or nets in the same

file)

Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and press the [to] key. Theselected net or nets are copied immediately above the copy destination specified bv the

- 54-



4. OPERATION

(0

cursor. To copy the selected net or nets two or more times, enter the number of times

they are to be copied before pressing the [to] key.

Specifying the copy destination using the (to-fill key (Copying the net or nets into anotherfile)

1) Press the (to-fill key. The following message is displayed.

If no program is specified. LATMP is created.

” ,.

(LATMP file: Temporary work file used in editing)

2) Enter the name of the file into which the net(s) is to be copied and press the < Enter >

key.

3) Select desired processing from the following POP-UP menu:

4) If the selected destination file is present, the following POP-UP menu is dispfayed.

Select desired processing from the menu.

---t Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces the

previous data of the file.

- Cancels output to the selected file.

- Appends the copy to the selected file.

If the nets to be copied are known beforehand, place the cursor on the first net to be

copied, enter the number of nets to be copied, then press the [Copy] key. Steps 0, a,

and 0 can be skipped.

(Note) Incorrect nets cannot be copied.

Moving sections of a sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be moved net by net. Specify the net or nets to be

copied. The selected net or nets can be moved to another place in the same file that is being

edited or output to another file. The selected net or nets are deleted.

The only difference between copying and moving IS that the selected net or nets are deleted rn

moving.

fnznet Oelfiet Wart Adrew karch COPV Mawe Pile it&B

[Move]

uirtll cancel search c-down C-U&l

c

- 55-



4. OPERATION

(i) Function keys

[Comand]

Iitwhet Delnet Insert A&en Mitch COPY Mbw?

; ‘Flli .’ ::...i@llt

r

SIIWPLE YO 0-+ t------- __-_ - ---_c+-

I rRD= cco-1SY= wao1 RCO=

~334~5ulumm3rn331~’

d

I

I -___ _

Fig. 4.5.2.2.2 (d) Screen Displayed when a File is Opened by the [File] Command

- 57 -



4. OPERATION

(ii) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program

Start ladder diagram

editing (original screen)

1

Specify an Insertion point (The

data is inserted Immediately

above the cursor.)

1

Press the [File] key

r_lrC1T7pecify a view file

<POP-UP menu

1 (View)

‘< (To)hows the ladder

diagram of the file to be

combined (View screen)

Combines the file with

the Ladder program on

the original screen

1. Check the displayed

data of the file to be

combined

2. Edit the data of thefile to be combined

and combine it

1

1. The file is

immediately

combined. The

data of the file isnot displayed.

L

_I

on the view screen

Press the -z ESC z= key to terminate editing

-z POP-UP menu

t (Save) (Quit) *I (Temp) (Edit)

Saves the Ladder Cancels the Saves the data Returns to the ladder

program shown on the edited data in a provisional diagram screen (The

view screen - work file view screen isL continued.)

*l : The name of the temporary work file is LATMP.

Fig. 4.5.2.2 (e) Operation Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program

-58-



4. OPERATION

(iii) Examples

Example 1. Combrning a sequence program file

[Operation]

Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the -z Enter > key.

From the following menu, select Fl (To).

/I

The file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step QI>. (Original

screen)

Example 2. Combining a modified sequence program

(Operation]

t’il Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

G3 Select (File].

‘3 Enter the name of the file to be combining and press the < Enter > key.

6.9 From the following menu, select F2 (View).

jiil

@ Edit the Ladder program on the view screen. To terminate editing, press the

<ESC> key. (Ladder editing can be performed and terminated in the

conventional way.)

- 59 -



4. OPERATION

From the following menu, select Fl (Save).

Fl Save (update)

F2 Quit

F3 Rename & Save

F4 Edit

F5 Create Latemp file

Return to the screen of step @ and check the name of the file output in step ‘$3.

Then, select Fl (To).

The file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original

screen)

Example 3. Combining a specified section of a sequence program

[Operation]

Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the < Enter > key.

From the pop-up menu, select F2 (View).

Select [Copy] or [Move] on the view screen and specify a desired range with

[until].

From the following function menu, select (to-org]. (Specify insertion into the

original screen.)

[until]

to cancel search c-down c-up to-fil to-org

From the following menu, select Fl (Exec)

The data is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original

screen)

-6O-



4. OPERATION

(k) Editing a symbol and comment from the ladder diagram editing screen

On the ladder diagram editing screen, a symbol and comment added at the specified address

can be edited.

[syEdit]

[Operation]

Specifying an address

To edit a symbol and comment in a ladder diagram, place the cursor on the corresponding

address and press the [syEdit] key.

Editing the symbol and comment

The cursor moves to the symbol editing section in the bottom right part of the screen. Edit

the symbol and press the <Enter > key. The cursor moves to the comment field.

Terminating editing

[exec] key : Terminates editrng after modifying the data.

[cancel] key : Terminates editing without modifying the data.

(1) Abbreviated input with the [comand] key

Each function key can be directly selected with the [cornand] key. Enter one of the character

strings below. then press the [cornand] function key. Those portions that are enclosed in

brackets can be omitted.

I (nsert) D (elnet) (SY) E W

S (earth) C (OPY)

M (ove) F (ile)

The function keys in the menu above can be used for program creation and search operations.

(Note) The keys 1 c or 4.) and [A or-4 ] are used to create or delete a vertical line

extending upward to the left or right of the cursor in a ladder diagram. The solid vertical

line is for creation and the dashed vertical line is for deletion. The menu item applying

to a function key depends on the ladder diagram and cursor position.

-61 -



4. OPERATION

(m) ZOOM

Subprograms called by the currently selected program’s issuing of a CALLCALLU instruction

can easily be referenced and edited.

(i) Start up of zoom

0 Moved the cursor to the parameter of the CALLCALLU instruction and push the

<Enter > key.

@ The program now on opening hides from the editing screen. Then the subprogram

which is specified by the parameter in mentioning above appears on the screen.

(ii) Start up under editing

When ZOOM is attempted while editing the program, the preservation of modificatibns will

be inquired. Select either

(ii,) End

ROOl .O ACTIL - SUB65 PO01

CALL

When the end operation with the < ESC > key is attempted in the program editing screen

by ZOOM, it will return to the state when ZOOM is started. Moreover, it is possible to

return to the program configuration screen all at once.

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

~1 Save(update) & quit

F2 Quit

F3 Rename,save & quit

F4 Edrt

F5 Main

Fl :Save(update) & quit

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content of current

program screen is preserved.

F2:Quit

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content of current

program screen IS cancelled.

-62 -



4. OPERATION

@ Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the area for comment enclosed by

‘(*’ and “)’ is inserted.

Then the cursor changes into character-size cursor, and type comment sentence onto

the area.The area for Net comment expands and shrinks by two lines (four lines at four lines

display mode) automatically according to the comment sentences. Every Net comment

can expands up to a hundred lines.

RlOOl .o R1000.2

X-+’

R120.3character cursor

(* Net comment is written in here. 1 ‘)

(* All characters you can enter are available. ‘)

R1OO1.O R1000.2----IMI

Y2000.4A

Y23.4A

(ii) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment

@I To determtne the editing Net comment, press [ end ] or <ESC>. Then the editing

comment is fixed, and the Net comment editing mode is finished.

@ To cancel the editing Net comment, press [cancel]. The new Net comment will be

cancelled and erased.

Note) The number of characters in a Net comment is limited to 4095 bytes: counting one

ASCII character as one byte, one Japanese kana as one byte, one kanji character

as two bytes.

‘Line feed’ is also available on Net comment. Line feed is helpful to save memory

for Net comment.

(iir) To modify Net comment

0 Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to modify and press

” < Shift z= + [netcmt 1” or < Enter > The Net comment ediling mode becomes active,

and the Net comment will be ready to modify its contents.

@ At Net comment editing mode, to Insert a blank line tnto Net comment, press [inslin].

(’ Net comment is written in here. 7

(’ All characters you can enter are available. 7

- 64 -



4. OPERATION

[inslin] will shrfl irnes at the cursor and after down by one line, and make a blank line

at the cursor position.

(’ Net comment is written in here. ‘)

(’ ‘)

(’ All characters you can enter are available. l(’ *)

(3 At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press [dellin].

(* Net comment is written in here. l(’ Net comment will expand or shrink automatically. ‘)

(’ All characters you can enter are available. ‘)

(‘ ‘)

[dellin] will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift lines after the cursor up by one

line.

(’ Net comment is written in here. l(’ All characters you can enter are available. l

@I To exit from Net comment editing mode, press ( end 1or < ESC >.

@ To cancel the modifications you have just made, press [cancel]. [cancel] will abandon

the modifications and the Net comment will be restored as it was before the

modifications.

(iv)To delete Net comment

There are two ways to delete Net comment

0 Use [Delnet] as same as deleting normal ladder nets.

“[command] + [Delnet] + specify area to delete -x [exec]”

0 Entering Net comment editing mode by ” <Shift > + [netcmt]” or <Enter > with the

cursor on the Net comment which you want to delete. and then press [delete].

(v) Lost Net comment

A Net comment consists of the information of posttion in sequence program which is called“Net comment pointer”, and “Net comment string data” which is comment sentences

themselves. These two elements are usually combined one to one to make a Net

comment, but the partner might be lost by illegal file operations or something, such as

copying the ladder file “‘.#LA” or modifying the Net comment data file “NETCMT.000” by

user. When a Net comment pointer loses its Net comment string data, the Net comment is

called “Lost Net comment”.

Lost Net comment is displayed as blank Net comment enclosed by “(“’ and “‘)” which is

displayed in purple or dimly on monochrome display. Lost Net comment can be

normalized by editing operation. Lost Net comment can be edited as a normal Net

comment, such as deletion, copying and so on.

-65-



(p) To edit New page

It is able to specify

the

0)

the position to feed page at printing ladder diagram. This specification of

position is called “New page”, and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.

To enter New page

(ii)

4. OPERATION

0 Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page. And then press ” <Shift > +

1 page 1”.

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y2000.4

zJ+”

A”

R120.3

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y23.4

+Htnv

@ Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the mark of New page is inserted.

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y2000.4 .

=LI’

A

R120.3

<New page>

R1OO1.O R 1000.2 Y23.4

----1Hl n

Other operation to edit New page

New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder nets. The operations such as

copying [ Copy 1, moving ( Move 1, and deleting [Delnet] ladder nets are also effective on

New page.

(q) Terminating editing of a sequence program

[Operation]

0 Press the < ESC > key on the following editing screen.

- 66 -



4. OPERATION

The following editing end menu(pop-up menu) appears.

a) Fl :Save(update) & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved, the editing screen will be ended.

b) F2:Quit

Alter current content of the editing is cancelled. the editing screen will be ended.

c) FB:Rename,save & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved into specified subprogram name, the

editing screen will be ended.

d) F4:Edit

The < ESC > key operation is canceled and it returns to the editing screen of former.

e) F5:Main

With the operation “a)“.“b)” or “c)“. it returns to the program screen where ZOOM

was started But with this operation, it returns to a program configuration screen at all

once from the nested state.

Either the above-mentioned is selected and it returns to the program configuration screen,

the main menu or the program screen where ZOOM was started.

When error net exists

When the error net exists, ” ERROR NET NO.” is displayed and the end menu is not

displayed. Cope thts case by the following.

a) After the error net is corrected or deleted and the state of the error is released. the end

operation will be done.

b) When pressed < ESC> key in the state of 0 after “CAN” is typed (meaning of

CANCEL), the menu of 8 will be displayed.

- When Save is ordered, it will be preserved after removing the error net.

- When Quit is ordered, it will be able to return to the state before editing by

cancelling the content of the editing.

-67-



4. OPERATION

(3) Step sequence diagram

Position the cursor to a program marked with 01, then press the [ZOOM] or < Enter >

The step sequence editing screen is displayed as shown below:

key.

ZDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~]


Cl s3 0 Sll cl s13 Cl s21 0 s31

P3

0 s4

n s15 0 S24r======================I=I

l-l

_ 1 (Note 1)

Note 1) The current position of the cursor on the screen is indicated.

The entire screen consists of 32 elements across the screen

and 64 elements from top to bottom. The cursor is positioned toany element on the screen.

On the step sequence screen, different soft keys are displayed, depending on the position of the

cursor.

When the cursor is on the step line, following softkey menu is displayed.

I I I + L4

n1 s2 III SlQ Cl s20 L- 1 s30

r1 1111 1 II I + JMP + LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

[ Cl ] : Step subprogram ( +-LBL ] : Label for jump

( [Ll] ] : initial step subprogram I -I- I: The end of block step

[ rl] ] : Block step subprogram [ FUNC ] : Various functions

I I ] : Line for link [ CHK ] : Grammatical checking

[ -+JMP ] : Jump to label [ ZOOM ] : Zooming into a subprogram

-68-



4. OPERATION

When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is displayed.

tP30

1== 1 f-.- (f-1 FUNC CHK ZOOM

I tI l-1 l= =

I I

I t-

1 T= =

I[ FUNC

[ CHK

[ ZOOM

1 :

I :

1 :

I :

1 :

1 :1 :

I :

1 :

I :

Transition

Divergence of selective sequence

Divergence of simultaneous sequence

Line for link

Convergence of selective sequence

Convergence of simultaneous sequence

Various functions

Grammatical checking

Zooming into a subprogram

(i) Entering a step

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [Cl] key.

Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.

Pressing the [rl) key causes a step to be created, as shown belowA free step number is automatically assigned.

Iq Sl

t

STEP : Sl

ACTION :

l-l

u 101 I:1 I + JMP +- LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

The specified subprogram number (Pi0 in thus example) is displayed below Sl.

-69-



4. OPERATION

(ii) Entering a transition

STEP : 61

ACTION : PlO

l-l

To change the step number, press the <Enter > key to position the character cursor ” ” on

STEP and use the [BS] key to change the number.

STEP : Sl(f

ACTION : PlO

l-l

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [ + ] key

Enter a subprogram number

Press the [ + 1 key.

IInI Sl

+

PLO0

ACTION :

l-2

[ f I+_Il==l I It-_l FUNC CHK ZOOM

Enter a subprogram number.

I[l3lsl

+PlOO

ACTION : PlOO

l-2

-7o-



4. OPERATION

(vii) Specifying a label for jump destination

Position the cursor to the desired input

Then, enter a label name.

Press the I+- LBL] key.

position (step line), then press the [c LBL] key.

Ii-WI Sk

PI0

I-lOOLABEL : Llo

l-l

I I [l.ll I II I + JMP + LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

Enter a label name.

STEP : $1

ACTION : PlO

l-1

-73-



4. OPERATION

(viii) Specifying a label jump

Position the cursor to the dewed input position (step line), then press the [- JMPJ key.

Then, enter a label name.

Press the [- JMP] key.

t LlO

[OISl

I

tolls2

f PlOO .-

LEBEL :

2-3

0 [Ul 01 I --* MP +-LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

Enter a label name.

+ LlO

[UlSl

I--T-

PlOO PlOO

cl]S2 --, tY.cl

t PlOO

1

LEBEL : Llo

2-3

-74-



4. OPERATION

Deleting an element

Position the cursor to the element to be deleted. then press the < Delete > key.

selected Specify the element to be deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse

video. To position the cursor displayed in reverse video, press the <Delete > key. To

restore the state shown above. press the (ESC] key.

-- PlOO

In the example shown above. two figures (elements) of a selective branch and transition are

If the <Enter > key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective branch is deleted and

the following screen is displayed:

IO] Sl

clOtt

-75-



4. OPERATION

To specify another figure, press the < Delete > key again.

I

IO1 Sl

i

PlQO

Inserting an element

Position the cursor to the desired insertion position, then press the c Insert > key. To create

an empty row, press the <Insert > key.To create an empty column, press the [Shift] and <Insert > keys

IIO1 Sl

c;,==dlS2 I1 SlO Cl s20

IP1l t

P2 PlO P20

n s3 n Sll n s21

I I I

STEP : S2

ACTION : P200

1-3

-76-



4. OPERATION

Press the < nsert > key.

cI

1-3

Press the (Shift] and < Insert > key.

IrllS2

t

P2

I101 Sl

cl

============

I In SlO i-l s20

t t

PlO P20

Ll s3 r3 Sll Ll s21

I I ISTEP : s2

ACTION : P102l-3

- 77 -



4. OPERATION

(xi) Search

Pl

~,=y== i ==== ; =

ols2 El SlO

;. 1

cl s20

Pl Pll

t

P21

ciilS2

u SlO 0 s20

I I

If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the stale shown above, a pop-up menu is displayed as

shown below:

Fl Search

F2 COPYl-73 Move

F4 mAin

F5 ListI I

Ells3 El Sll 0 s21

Press the (Fl] (Search) key. A pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below:

t Pl===========

uls3 F6 Toe

I jP7180ttoln

-78-



4. OPERATION

(xii)

Then, press the [Fl] (Step) key. Another pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below:

t Pl

.xb

La search string:%AiI

SI

Position

ToeBottom

Enter the step number to be searched for (S20, for example), then press the <Enter> key.

The system starts searching through the part subsequent to the cursor.

Fl Se

F2 Co F1

;: ",; :

F5 Li %:

Copying or moving an element

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

Pl===========

f I I

IYISZ L_) SlO

I t

1-J s20

Pl Pll

t

P21

-79-



4. OPERATION

When the [FBI (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is displayed as shown below:

:

tPl

PI=========

Fl Search

F2 Copy

F3 Move

F4 mAin

F5 List

Press the (F2) (Copy) key. The system prompts the operator to enter a start point.

t

Pl=========PI

I IL71s2 cl SlO Ll s20

i......+ 1

Pl Pll P21

ACTION :

Specify Start position l-2

Posltion the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the example shown below), then

press the <Enter > key. The system prompts the operator to enter the end point.

l-t Pl===========

I13JS2 cl s10

i +

I17 s20

Pl Pll

t

P21

ACTION :

Specify End position 2-3

-8O-



4. OPERATION

Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the example shown below), then

press the < Enter > key. The system prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.

t Pl===PIIP===I

ACTION :

SpeciEy End position 3-4

Position the cursor to the desired copy destination (position 4-3 in the example shown below),

then press the < Enter > key. The specified part is copied.

t==I=====

ACTION : PlOO

4-3

When a part is copied,

- The S address is not copied. Assign a free number.

- The P address is copied. If required, change the address.

-81 -



4. OPERATION

(xiir) Returning from the ZOOM destination to the program configuration screen (MAIN).

To return to the program configuration screen, displayed when editing was started, follow the

procedure below. The system assumes that the editing of the step sequence subprogram,

from which the [ZOOM] key was pressed, is suspended.The edited subprogram is not saved in the source program file.

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

(t Plt==========

I

i t

IUlS2 17 SlO u s20

Pl Pll

t

P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

I+ Pl===========

After pressing the [F4] (MAIN) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~]


LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

a PO(fOl 0 PO002 n PO004 u PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007u PO008 fl PO009 n PO014 0 PO015 fl PO016 0 PO017

n]POO21 cl PO022 n PO024 0 PO025 fl PO026 q POO27. . .

. .

t~j O101 c-1 O202 01PO304 tT]]PO405 a]PO406 u]PO407

-82-



4. OPERATION

When the [ZOOM] key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides the type of subprogram

which is to be edited.

(xvii) End of modifying

Press the [ESC] key.

Figure Meaning of the figure Subprogram to be edited

cl Step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

01 Initial step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

n1 block step sequence subprogram step sequence subprogram

t Transition Ladder subprogram

t Pl==I========

Fl Save(update) h quit

F2 Quit

F3 Edit

F4 Rename, save b quit

F5 Optimize

I I I

Menus

Menu Editing Result of editing Display

Save End Updated Optimized

Quit End Discarded -

Edit Continue

Rename End

Continued

Updated

Not optimized

Optimized

optimize I Continue I Optimized and continued I Optimized

-86-



4. OPERATION

4.5.2.3 Symbol & comment editing

l Moving the cursor

< t >, < + >, CT >. < 1 > Moves the cursor to another field to be edited.

<Shift> + <t>,<-+> Moves the cursor to another position within the field to

be edited.

l Entering a comment in Japanese

When a front-end processor for Japanese word input is used, a comment can be entered in

Japanese. When a comment containing kana characters or m-type alphanumeric characters is

compiled (an object file is created), all the kana characters and m-type alphanumeric characters

are replaced with spaces.

(1) Start

[Operation]

0 Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing menu.

8 The following symbol and comment editing screen appears:

COIL_ COMWENTB88BBBBB/ 8BBOBBl LRDDRESS SYMBOL RELRV CONMENI COIL COHNENT

~ Xlwm3.8 SYMBOL- A' RELQV COl i NENl - f l OIL C6NNENTki

Fig. 4.5.2.3

- 87 -



4. OPERATION

(2) Entering a new symbol and comment

A new symbol and comment can be added at an address to which no symbol or comment is

assigned.

[Operation]

m Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

8 An input window opens on the screen.

t

Address field

0 Enter an address

t t

Symbol field Relay COmmenl

in the address entry field.

t

Coil comment field

‘$9 The cursor is positioned to the symbol entry field

0 Enter symbol data.

45) The cursor is positioned to the relay comment entry field.

G9 Enter relay comment data.

@I The cursor is positioned to the coil comment entry field.

(9 Enter coil comment data.

@I The entered data is stored, clearing the previous address, symbol data, and comment data

from the window.

When no symbols and comments are entered, the system is automatically set to receive new

data.

(3) Editing a symbol and comment

A symbol and comment assigned to an address can be edited

[Operation]

(1) If the system is set to receive new data, select (QUIT] to exit from that state.

8 Move the cursor by pressing the < + >, < + >, < ? >, or < 1 ) key and edit the data

To move the cursor withln a field, while pressing the < Shift > key press the -z t) or < + >

key.

- 88 -



4. OPERATION

6% The system searches for the symbol or address and the data number in that order. The

cursor is moved to the searched data.

(7) Deleting a symbol and/or comment

(a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment

[Operation]

0 Place the cursor on the NO field.

8 Select [DELETE]. Both the symbol and the comment are deleted

(b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment

[Operation ]

@ Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field

8 Select [DELETE]. Only the selected symbol or comment is deleted.

(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments simultaneously

[Operation]

0 Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted.

8 Select IAREA]. The entrre line is displayed in reverse video, and the following

message appears on the screen.

Selectrng the area

0 Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.

@ Select [DELETE]. All the data displayed in reverse video is deleted.

(8) Terminating the symbol and comment editing

[Operation]

0) On the edit screen, select [END] or press the < ESC> key

8 The following message appears on the screen:

Fl Save (update) 8 quit

F2 Quit

F3 Edit

0 Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu

-9o-



4. OPERATION

(9) Editing screen

+Symbol entry number --) Coil comment size (byte)

CRT/MD1 can display / Total CRT/MD1 can display / Total

I

EDIT ( SYMBOL b COMMENT ) PMC-RB4 <O>[A:vFLYDATAYRB4 I

+YYMBOL 000001/000003 COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090

NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL

I00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

00003*X00000.2 CCCCC

1I*' means a symbol data which

RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT F (Motel)

I I I I IAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB

cccccccccccccccc ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc

can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

,; ..j 2 s;e#tfl 3 .::.#@A : 4 ADD 5 :;;:,:i$,...I&TE.. , ,; ;.,.:I,: a &$&i I,.::;..&&&" c, &$' '....,. .

Note 1) It is the indicator. Symbol/comment are displayed with turning at this point in ladder

diagram editing screen.

(10) Searching by a part of strings

Search function is active for specified field, LINE NO./ADDRESS/SYMBOURELAY or COIL

COMMENT.

Especially you can find relay/coil comment, which is too long, by specifing a part of data

strings.

1) Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings for search.

Furthermore, the display of function-key changes as the undermentioned.

I NO. 2 AORS 3 SYMbQL 4 RELAY 5 .&tl,. 6 ‘. , ,. : : .: 8 ,I 1’.:I. 9 1.. .: . ,o ‘:. ,,I

2) Input strings and specify the data kind for searching by function-key.

A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].

3) If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.

-9l -



4. OPERATION

4.5.2.4 Message editing

An arbitrary message can be displayed on the CRT/MD1 screen of the CNC, using the DISPB

instruction (SUB 41), which is one of the function instructions. Such a message is created asdescribed below.

(1) Types and quantity of characters that can be used

The types of characters usable in message data vary lrom one CNCPMC model to another, as

listed below.

Characters that can be entered

CNCPMC JIS levels 1 Full-size Half -size Alphanumeric

and 2 hiragana katakana characters

F16PMC-Rf33RB4/RB5/RB6/

nRC3IRC4

0 0 0

F18 PMC-RA3 n 0 0 0

F15B PMCNBINB2 X X 0 0

PowerPMC-PA3 X X 0 0

Mate

- . -. . . . ._ -.--. _----.(A : Some characters cannot be drsplayed. I hey cannot be checked by t-API LAUUtH.)

The half-srze kana and alphanumenc characters can be entered using the kana and alphanumeric

keys on the keyboard. Similarly to symbols and comments, Japanese-language text can be edited

usrng the Japanese-language input FEP (front-end processor). The number of characters is limited

as follows:

1)

2)

3)

(2)

(a)

When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used : 62 characters

When only half-size kana characters are used : 127 characters

When only alphanumeric characters are used : 256 characters

Edit procedure

The edit method that can be used varies between the CNCiPMC model in which Japanese

language (excluding half-size characters) can be used and other models. This section

describes the procedure common to all models (only alphanumeric characters are entered),

using the PMC-RC4 as an example.

Startup

[Operation ]

(1) Select [MESSAG] from the edit menu.

-92-



4. OPERATION

8 The following message data edit screen appears.

EDI T W&AGE) _~I O ADDRESS NSSAGE

___-

001 AOO. 0 1234567890ABCOEFCHI J UMOPWSTl l WYZ1234567890Al KDEFGHI J Kl M~STUVWXYZ1234567890AKDEFGHI J KUR(DFQRSTUYWXYZ

002 AOO I

003 A00.2

004 A00.3

Fig. 452.4 (a) Message Data Edit Screen

(b) Input

[Operation]

0 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered

Q Key in the desired message data

(c) Modification

[Operation]

(11 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

8 The character cursor moves on to the message and blinks there.

0 Place the cursor at the location where modification is required, using the cursor keys.

@iI Key in the desired characters to modify the message data.

0 Press the <Enter > key.

(d) Search [TOP] [BOTTOM]

[Operation]

0) On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].

8 The cursor moves to the start or end message address.

-93-



4. OPERATION

(e) END

[Operation)

0 On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC >.

8 The following message appears.

0 Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.

452.5 I/O module editing

The address of each module in the I/O unit IS set and deleted as described below.

ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME ADDRESS CROUP BASE SLOT NME

(1) Startup

[Operation]

0 Select [MODULE] (l/O module) from the edit menu.

Q The following I/O module edit screen appears.

x0000x0001

x0002x0003x0004x0005X0006XODDx0008x0009XOOO

x0011x0012x0013x0014x0015

ID6CD16C

YOODOYDOO

YODOZYDDO3YDWYOOOSvooD6vooo7YOOOBYOOO9YOOO

YODlYDD12YDD13YOO4YOO15

Fig. 4.5.2.5 (a) I’0 Module Edit Screen

-94-



4. OPERATION

(2) Channel switching

(I) To switch to the

[Operation]

0 Select [NXT.CH].

(ii) To switch to the previous channel:

[Operation)

0 Select [PRV.CH].

(3) Setting

EDT II/O MDDULE \B&ICHANNEL 11

1ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAUE ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAUE I

xoooo 0 Do PXxoool i 00 uxx0002 0 i uxx0003 0 0 ii x(1x0004x0005 0 0 01 XX0006x0007XGQOExOw9x0010XOOIx0012x0013x0014x0015

YOolOYOollYOoO2YGlO3YooO4Yooo5YOOo6YOoO7YOOo6YOO09YOOOYOOlYOO12Yoo13YOo4YOOS

Fig. 4.5.2.5 (b) I/O Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one cl annel can be set)

(only for models in which more than one channel can be set) .

next channel:

(Operation]

0 Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.

8 Key in the module address in the following format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

(Note 1) The module name that can be specified may vary depending on the model of the PMC

or l/O unit. Selecting [HELP] can display the module names that can be displayed in

the NAME field.

(Note 2) The I/O unit MODEL-B is allocated as follows:

“GROUP” : Specify a group number in the configuration.

“BASE” : Must be fixed at ‘0’.

“SLOT” : Specify the unit number of the I,‘0 Unit-B. Alternatively, set to ‘0’ if

power ON/OFF information ‘##’ is to be allocated.



4. OPERATION

[Input item]

COUNTER DATA TYPE

This parameter specifies whether the format of a counter value used with the CTR

function instruction is to be binary or BCD.

lnitral value 0 : BINARY Setting 0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)

This parameter specifies an incremental processing time for the first and second ladder

levels. This setting reduces ladder scan time, thus achieving high-speed ladder

execution.

Initial value 100 Setting range 1 to 150I

The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an execution penod of 8

ms.

First and second level processing time

Note however, that increased ladder execution time on the first and second levels

reduces the following processing times:

l PMC screen display time

l Language program processing time

l Ladder processing time on the third level

LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO

As the language program and PMC screen display have the same priority, this

parameter specifies the percentage of the following processing times:

l PMC screen display time

l Language program processing time

l Processing time of third-level Ladder program

While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can be executed cyclically.

Initial value 50 Setting range 0 to 99I

-99-



4. OPERATION

LANGUAGE ORIGIN

This parameter specifies the start address of the link control statement data of a

language program.

Initial value 000000

I

Setting range Address in the language program storage

area I

When there is no language program, specify OOOOOOH.

OPERATOR PANEL (connectinq an FO machine operator’s panel)

This parameter specifies whether a machine operator’s panel is used with the FSO.

When YES is specified in this parameter, specify the DVDO addresses where the

operator’s panel is actually connected, an address for key images transferred from the

operator’s panel, and an addresses for LED images transferred to the operator’s panel.

itial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO 1 1 : YESI

0 KEY DI ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DI where the operator’s

panel is actually connected.

ii)

Settrng range X0 to X127, Xl000 to X1019

KEY DO ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO where the operator’s

panel is actually connected.

iii)

Setting range YO to Y127, YlOOO to Y1014

KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of key images referenced by user

programs.

Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of LED images referenced by user

programs.

Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

- loo-



4. OPERATION

4.5.3 Printout

4.5.3.1 Overview

A sequence program can be printed out.

(1) Compatible printers

This software is usable with the printers listed below.

EPSON VP1 000 (default setting)

NEC PR201H

FANUC PRINTER

(Note) To use a NEC PR201H and FANUC PRINTER, a program modilication is required. For

derails. see Section 4.5.3.6.

(2) General flow of operation for printout.

IOffline

[PRINT]

<F2>

I

(Specifyoutput

t [SETUP]

Fig. 4.5.3.1 Operation Flow of Printout

- 101-



4. OPERATION

453.2 Starting and ending printing

Printing is performed according to the following procedure.

SYSI EMPRRAWETERSYMBOL 8 COMWFNI

LROOER OI RGRRH

STEP SEOUENCE OI RGRRH

I / O HOOULtHESSRGE

CROSS REFERENCF LI ST

BI I ROORESS MRP

[OPTI ON1I NOm1I OPTI ONI

' "PTIONI

8%

' m 1rurlION1

Fig. 4.5.3.2 Drawing Output Menu

(Operation]

ci’, Set the desired print format by pressing F2 [SETUP]. (See Section 4.5.3.4.)

b, Set the desired output items. (See Section 4.5.3.3.)

CZ Start printing by pressrng Fl (PRINT].

m Press F9 [BREAK] to suspend printing.

C! Press FlO [END] or the < Esc > key to terminate the print menu display.

Note 1) Perform steps iI> and 8 only when the settings must be changed.

Note 2) Some print formats that cannot be set in step 0) may be set by editing the setting

file before starting FAPT LADDER-II. For details, see Section 4.535.

- 102-



4. OPERATION

453.3 Output item setting

Items to be output to a drawing are specified as described below. More than one item can be

specified at a time. Some set items may not be displayed, depending on the model of the PMC.

(1) Specifying output of each data item

Specify whether a data item is to be output, by pressing the < 7 > key or < 1 > key after

positioning the cursor with the < c > key or c + > key on the drawing output menu screen.

(2) Option specification

When specifying a data item for which options are available, position the cursor to the desired

option, then press the < Enter :, key. The option specification screen will appear. To set the

option, enter the desired value, then press the < Enter > key.

(3) Detail of each data time

a) Title printing

The data of the title is printed.

b) Parameter printing

The data of the system parameters is printed.

c) Symbol printing

The symbol comment data is printed.

:\DRTF!\SflWPLE1

I SYMBOL PRINT 1

STRRT LINE NUMBER ,rnEND LINE NUMBER 8APPOINT COWHENT r~coIL/RLLl

FlB ( ESC 1 END

Fig. 453.3 (a) Symbol Print Option Menu

- 103 -



4. OPERATION

i) Option (symbol printing)

. When printing symbol/comment data, specify an output range. When 0 is

specified as the print end line number, all data up to the last line is printed.

. Comment specification[RELAY] : Prints relay comment data.

[COIL] : Prints coil comment data.

[ALL] : Prints both relay comment data and coil comment data.

d) Ladder diagram printing

A ladder diagram is printed.

r- -

ENDJ-

Fig. 4.533 (b) Ladder Print Option Menu

i) Optton (ladder diagram printing)

The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference of a ladder

diagram to be printed are specified.

If a diagram is output as a list file, the unit of printout must be specified as a

module.

If “0” is set as the output end net when a range of nets is specified, printing

continues up to the last net.

If a page break is specified, a page break is made in the ladder diagram atevery new file or subprogram.

If a cross-reference is specified, the ladder diagram is accompanied with a

cross-reference. (Fig. 4.5.3.3 (h))

Relay information

[SYMBOL] : Prints symbol data.

[RELAY COMMENT] : Prints relay comment data.

- 104-



4. OPERATION

e) Printing of step sequence figure

Step sequence figure is printed

i) Option (Step sequence figure printing)

f)

9)

:\DtllA\SRWPLEI

I STEP SEDUENCE PAINT 1

PRINT UNIT oRLLn5m5l

MODULE NM

SUE-PRDGRRM NUMBER r~/vEsl

FlB t tsc I END

,-a3333momm -__-

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (c) Step Sequence Print Option Menu

. PRINT UNIT

Specify whether a step sequence figure will be printed for a single subprogram

or all subprograms. When printing a figure for a single subprogram, specify the

subprogram name for MODULE NAME.

. SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER

Specify whether subprogram number Pxxx will be printed for each step.

I10 module printing

The I/O module data is printed.

Message printing

The message data is printed.

\DRTR\SRMPLE - --I

I MESSRGE PRINT I

RDDRESS RRNGE

STRRT ADDRESS

tND ADDRESS ‘rn

18 I FSC I END

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (d) Message Print Option Menu

- 105 -



4. OPERATION

i) Option (message printing)

The range of messages to be printed is specified.

h) Cross-reference list printingA cross-reference list is printed

r

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (e) Cross Reference List Print Option Menu

i) Option

CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE

Check multiple writing to a coil and multiple use of same number functional

instruction (ex. timer, counter).

APPOINT ADDRESS

Specify the range of printing address. It can be specified as below.

Table 453.3 Cross-Reference List Address Specification

Address specification mode

ALL

Initial letter of an address

Bit address

Byte address

Address range

Example of

keying in IAddress to be output

ALL I All addresses

Y

Ill addresses having a specified initial letter

Rl .OI Specified bit addresses only

x10 Specified byte addresses

(including bit addresses)

FlO.O-F12.7

X2.3-END

(Note 1)

All addresses in a specified range

All addresses after a specified address

(Note 1) When an address specification is made, addresses are output in the sequence: X, Y,

F, G. R, A, C, K, D, T, variable address, P. In this example, therefore, Y and all

subsequent addresses are output.

-106-



4. OPERATION

APPOINT COMMENT

Specify the kind of comment data

‘RELAY’ Print Relay comment.

‘COIL’ Print Coil comment.

ii) Bit address map

The bit address map is printed.

.\DAlA\SRMPLE

I BIT ADDRESS MAP PRINT I

OUTPUT RDDRESS

RPPDINT RDDRESS

FIB I FSC FND

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (f) Bit Address Map Print Option Menu

iii) Option (Bit address map)

Output address

‘ALL’ All available addresses are printed.

(Including ‘Not used’ addresses.)

‘USED’ The addresses which are used in a sequence program are printed.

. Address specifications

Specify the range of outputting addresses. For details, refer Fig. 4.5.3.3 (f) in

‘h) Cross Reference’.

-107-



4. OPERATION

(1) Printout example by “F2[SETUP]” (print menu)

<graphical mode printout > <ASCII mode printout >

4 Initial step

Pl

+ (

PlOO 4 Transition

c-L1 Label

0 s210

f- Divergence of selective

P160 sequence

c- Divergence of

I simultaneous

0 S211 0 S215 0 S217 sequence

-Convergence of

simultaneous

sequence

Step

I’ Sl f Initial step

: Pl

+ PlOO 4 Transition

c-L1 Label

* s210

: PlOl

+ P150 +

l

s211 ;: P151 :

+ P152 +

e Divergence of selective

P160 sequence

t-- Divergence of

S215 ’

simultaneous

S217 sequenceP161 : P165

f-Convergence of

P162 simultaneous

sequence

* s212 ;

: P153 :

+ P154 +

S216 4 Step

P163

- Convergence of selective

sequence

Block step

164

4- Convergence of selective

sequence

El* SlOOO 4

: P2000

Block step

+ P102

Jump ->Ll 4 Jump

(2) Printout example by “SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER [NO/YES]”

-z Not print sub program number >

l-

IAlSlPlOO

c-L1

0 5210

i-f P160

< Print sub program number >

1l - Sub program number

PlOO

+=-Ll

l--J s210

/j+i P160

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (l/2)

- 109-



4. OPERATION

(3) Printout example of more than one page.

Iq-l-lCl Cl cl

tttll

El cl cl cl cl

tttt

Cl cl cl cl

dtcl

0t

I(l/3)

qG-l

cl cl cl

t t p=>:

cl Cl 0

ttt

vl v2 v3

VI v2 v3(2’3)

0 Cl 0

tt

J

= >4

cl cl

0

t

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (I) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (2/2)

<-L>

Size of one page

22 element

(28 element)

14 element ’

Note) The maximun element count for printing

without sub-program number is given in

parentheses.

Link number

r-=>-,

Cl cl

tCl

4= > J

L

(3’3) < - Number of a sub program

- l l O-



4. OPERATION

4.5.3.4 Print format-l: SETUP menu

Specify printer forms and a print format as described below.

PtlPER SIZE / LADDER PRINT

15 INCH RSCII15 INCH GRRPHIC

Fig. 4.5.3.4 SETUP Menu Screen

[Operation ]

0 Select F2 [SETUP] from the output item selection screen.

@I The SETUP menu screen appears.

@I Position the cursor to a desired item (e.g., forms size/ladder diagram print format) with the

< t > or < 1 > key.

@I Select the item by pressing the < Enter > key.

6) Position the cursor to the desired item (e.g., 10 INCHIASCII) with the < 7 >, < 1 >,

< c >, or -z -+ 7 key, then make the selection by pressing the < Enter 7 key.

@ If FlO [END] is selected after forms selection, the screen display returns to the output item

selection screen.

(1) Forms size/ladder diagram print format

Specify a forms size. In addition, specify whether to print the ladder diagram in character

format (ASCII) or graphic format (GRAPHIC).

The currently specified output format is indicated by “*“.

- l l l -



4. OPERATION

4.5.3.5 Print format-2

(AMOFTRP, DAT/* .INF/message file)

Each parameter file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially available text editor --”

that the output format shown in each of the following frames can be changed.

[Diagram output ]b

-AMROFTRP. DAT

+1. Change the paper

selection name

2. Set the top margin

3. Set the net interval

4. Set the printer model and

paper

--f

-CROSSINF. DAT

(Setting the cross-reference

list output format)

8. Set the output format

guidance information

9. Set the output information

10. Specify the output format

11. Set the read/write coil

guidance information

12. Specify the linefeed

13. Specify the page break

-(Message file)

--) 7. Set the title 01 printout

-PR201-10 . INF

PR201-15 . INF

PR201-A4 INF

PRlO-A INF

PRl5A INF

PRA4-A : INF

ESC-P-10 INF

ESC-P-15 . INF

ESCPl O-A. INF

ESCPIS-A. INF

-FANUC-10. INF

5. Set the line spacing

6. Set the left margin

For these parameter files, do not change any item not described here.

-112-



4. OPERATION

(1) Changing the paper selection name

This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format

selection.

Name of file to be

editedPoint of change

AMROFTRP.DAT #l O-A = 1O-inch/ASCII

#l O-G = 1O-inch/graphic

#15-A = 15inch/ASCII

#15-G = 15_inch/graphic

#A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII

#A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic

Settings

Arbitrary character string consisting of

up to 30 half-size (or 15 full-size)

characters

(Note) #A4L-A= and #A4L-G =are unavailable in the output to VPlOOO.

(2) Settlng the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.

Name of file to be

edited

t

AMROFTRP.DAT

Point of change

TOPMGL = 0

TOPMG = 0

(for each form)

(3) Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying this item, the spacing between

can be changed in the manner shown below.

the LADDER nets used during diagram printout

NO0003

C

NO0004

0

NO0005

E

00001 l 0006

HHF

YO.7 YO 1

00001

HHbl)L,,YO.1 YO.7 YO.2

00001 +00008

Settings

Decimal number

NO0003

C

NO0004

D

NO0005

E

II IIYO.7 YO.0

00001 *00006

YO.0 YO.7 YO.1

+00006 00001

-lHHIL-ilFYO.0 YO.1 YO.7 YO.2

+00006 00001 *00008

When LCNTL = 5hen LCNTL = 4

-113-



4. OPERATION

File edited

AMROFTRP.DAT

Modifications

LCNTL = 4(Set for each sheet)

Settings

Specify either 4 or 5

,

(4) Setting the printer model and print paper

This item can change the printer model and print paper that are specified during paper

selection.

Name of file Point of *.INF that can be Printer name

to be edited change setPrint paper type/print mode

AMROFTRP. #l O-A PRlO_A INF PR201 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

DAT : PR201_10 . INF PR201 1 O-inch continuous form/graphic

ESCPlO A.INF VP1000

C.-FILE = ESC_P_iO. INF VP1000

1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

1 O-inch continuous form/graphic

FANUC_10. INF FANUC printer 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

#10-G PRlO_A .INF PR201 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

PR201_10 .INF PR201 1 O-inch continuous form/graphic

C.-FILE =

ESCPlO A. INF VP1000 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

ESC_P_iO. INF VP1 000 1 O-inch continuous form/graphic

FANUC_10. INF FANUC printer 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

#15-A PRlS_A .INF PR201 15inch continuous form/ASCII

PR201_15 .INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/graphic

C;FILE =

ESCP15 A.INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII

ESC_Pj5. INF VP1 000 15inch continuous form/graphic

#15-G PRlS_A .INF PR201 15inch continuous form/ASCII

PR201_15 .INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/graphic

ESCP15_A.INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII

C-FILE = ESC_P-15. INF VP1 000 15-inch continuous form/graphic

#A4L-A PRA4_A .INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

: (Note) PR201_A4 INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

C.-FILE =

#A4L-G PRA4_A INF PR201

: (Note) PR201_A4 .INF PR201

C.-FILE =

A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

(Note) #A4L-A = and (#A4L-G = are unavailable in the output to VPIOOO.

- 114-



4. OPERATION

(5) Setting the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is

the one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

Name of file to be

editedPoint of change Settings

‘.INF LPI (H) (1B) (C) (T20) ; (H) (18) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ;

LDRLPf (H) (18) (C) (T15) ; (H) (1B) (C) (Tcdecimal number >) ;

(6) Setting the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the

one specified according to the descriptions in (4).

Name of file to be


‘.INF LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (LOOO) ; (H) (1B) (C) (Lcdecimal number>) ;

-115-



4. OPERATION

(7) Setting the title of printout

This item can change the title of a diagram when it is output.

Vame of file to be


.PRTOUT. JPN. @ SYSTITLE (C) ( <any character string consisting

.PRTOUT. ENG. (- SYSTEM 8 PARAMETER -) ; of up to 60 half-size (or 30 full-size)

@ CMT.TITLEcharacters > ) ;

(- SYMBOL & COMMENT -) ;

@ LAD-TITLE

(- LADDER DIAGRAM -) :

@ STEP-TITLE

(- STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM -) ;

@ IO-TITLE

(- I’0 MODULE DATA -) ;

@ MSG.TITLE

(- MESSAGE DATA -) ;

@ TIT.TITLE

(- TITLE DATA -) ;

@ CRSTITLE

(- CROSS-REFERENCE -) ;

@ BKTITLE

(- BIT ADDRESS MAP -) :

(Note 1) These point of changes are in the file, ILPRTOUT. ENG.

(Note 2) Half-size katakana characters cannot be used.

(8) Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance lnformatlon

This item can specify characters to be output as guidance informatron to be output during

cross-reference listing. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning

are valid as guidance information.

Name of file to be


CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE = Any character string consisting of up

to 19 bytes

- 116-



4. OPERATION

(9) Setting the cross-reference list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as cross-reference information. If

both step and net numbers are specified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. In

the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as cross-referenceinformation.

Jame of file to be


:ROSSINF.DAT NET-INF = When only the net number is output:

STEP-INF = NET-INT = 1

STEP-INF = 0

When only the step number is output:

NET-INT = 0

STEP-INF = 1

When the net and step numbers are

output in the stated sequence: *

NET-INT = 1

STEP-INF = 2

When the step and net numbers are

output in the stated sequence:

NET-INT = 2

STEP-INF = 1

(10) Specifying the cross-reference list output format

This item enables a character string to be printed at the beginning of the step and net

numbers. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be


CROSSINF.DAT FORM = Character string + ‘%s’

(Note) Only letters in lowercase are valid as ‘%s’.

-117-



4. OPERATION

(11) Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance informatlon

This item can set a comment about coil attributes. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no

semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be


CROSSINF.DAT READ = Character string consisting of up to

WRITE = 13 bytes.

READ = -1 I- -1 ! I- :

WRITE = -( )- -( / )- :

(12) Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no

semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be


CROSSINF.DAT NL= Decimal number

(Note) In this case, space lines as many as the specified value plus 1 are inserted between

addresses. (If 0 is specified as the linefeed count, no space line is inserted between

addresses.)

(13) Specifying the cross-reference list page break

This item can specify a page break between address types. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines

with no semicolon al the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be


CROSSINF.DAT FF= ‘0’ = the page is not advanced

’ 1’ = the page is advanced

-118-



4. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 1 (settings in file AMROFTRP.DAT)

When ‘1’ is

selected as

the printout

paper

When ‘2’ is

selected as .

the printout

paper

When ‘3’ is

selected as

the printout

paper

#PAPER = 10-GI #IO-A = 10 inch/ASCII

LENGTHL = 11LENGTH = 11WIDTHL = 10

WIDTH = 10PITCHL = 15/l 20PITCH = 20/l 20

LINESL = 83LINES = 55RATIOL = 213RATIO = 213GRAMODL = 14GRAMOD = 16

ANKMODL = 0ANKMOD = 1LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0L TOPMGL = 0

. TOPMG = 0

. LCNTL = 4

L C-FILE =PRlO_A.INF4Fl;E = PRTDAT.DMP

e I1 O-G = 10 Inch/graphic

LENGTHL = 11LENGTH = 11

WIDTHL = IOWIDTH = 10PITCHL = 15/l 20PITCH = 20/l 20

LINESL = 83LINES = 55

RATIOL = 213RATIO = 213GRAMODL = 14

GRAMOD = 16ANKMODL = 0

ANKMOD = 1LEFTMGL = 0LEFTWG = 0

. TOPMGL = 0

* TOPMG = 0* LCNTL = 4. C-FILE = PR201_10.INF

$Fl;E = PRTDAT.DMP

+#15-A=151nch/ASCIlLENGTHL = 11LENGTH = 11

WIDTHL = 15

WIDTH = 15PITCHL = 15/l 20

PITCH = 20/120LINESL = 83LINES = 55RATIOL = 2/3RATIO = 213GRAMODL = 16

GRAMOD = 16ANKMODL = 1ANKMOD = 1LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0. TOPMGL = 0* TOPMG = 0

+ LCNTL = 4+ C FILE = PR15 A.INF

O-FILE = PRT6AT.DMP

&ND+ #15-G = 15 Inch

.

Changing the types of

printout paperThe name is changed from

*

1:lO inch’ to ‘l:NEC 10’.

see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.)

Changing the upper margin

(The upper margin is set to *

5 characters.)

Changing the types of

printout paper

(The name is changed from *

‘2:15 inch’ to ‘2:EPSON 10’.

See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.)

Changing the type of printer

(The printer is changed to *

EPSON VP1000 and the paper

is changed to lo-inch forms.)

Changing the spacing between

the LADDER nets _

[The net spacing for the*

LADDER diagram is widened.)

(Note) An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modrfied.

#PAPER = 10-G#lo-A=NEC 10

LENGTHL = 11LENGTH = 11WIDTHL = 10

WIDTH = 10PITCHL = 15/l 20

PITCH = 20/l 20

LINESL = 83LINES = 55RATIOL = 2/3

RATIO = 2/3GRAMODL = 14

GRAMOD = 16ANKMODL = 0ANKMOD = 1LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0TOPMGL = 5TOPMG = 0

LCNTC = 4C_FILE=PRlO_A.INFRF&E = PRTDAT.DMP

#lo-G=EPSON 10


WIDTHL = 10WIDTH = 10

PITCHL = 151120PITCH = 20/l 20LINESL = 83

LINES = 55RATIOL = 2/3RATIO = 213GRAMODL = 14

GRAMOD = 16ANKMODL = 0

ANKMOD = 1

LEFTMGL = 0LEFTWG = 0TOPMGL = 0

TOPMG = 0LCNTL = 4

C-FILE = ESCPlO_A.INFOF&E = PRTDAT.DMP

#15-A = 15 inch/ASCII


WIDTHL = 15WIDTH = 15PITCHL = 15/l 20PITCH = 20/l 20

LINESL = 83LINES = 55RATIOL = 2/3RATIO = 213GRAMODL = 16GRAMOD = 16

ANKMODL = 1ANKMOD = 1LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0TOPMGL = 0TOPMG = 0

LCNTL = 5C-FILE = PR 15_A.INFyE&l;E = PRTDAT.DMP

II #15-G = 15 Inch

-119-

“..



4. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 2 (settings in file PR201_10.INF)

.

PRZOl H3 CNTI NF (

CRLF

FORMF

CPI

CANCEL

LDRCPI* LPI (H) (WC)(T20);* LDRLPI (H) (WC)(T15);* LMARGI N (H)(WC)(LOOO) ;

RMARGI N (H)(WC)( / O7WLDRCHAR (H)(WC) (50014);J PNSET (H) (WC)(K) ;J PNRESET (H) (WC)(H) ;

I

..

.

Setting the spacing

I 1

Setting the left margin

between lines (Left margin is set to 5

(Line spacing is set to 25.) characters.)

I

PRZOl H3 CNTI NF (

CRLF

FORMFI ~~I ~~j "A):

.

CANCEL U-W$CPI (H) (1B) (C) (H) ;LDRCPI (H)(WC) (Q;LPI (H) (WC)(T25);

LDRLPI (H) (WC)(T15);LMARGI N (H)(WC)(LOO5)RMARGI N (H)(WC)( / O7B)LDRCHAR (H) (1B) (C) (JO014

J PNSET (H) (W C)(QJ PNRESET (H) (WC)(H) ;

3

.,.

i;

(Note) An astensk (*) indtcates data which can be modified.

- 120-



4. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1 of the CROSSINF.DAT file)

l Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

:

GUIDE=STEP No./NET No.

NET-INF=2

STEP-INF=l

FROM=S%s/N%s

READ=-1 I- -I/I- :

WRITE=-()- -(/I- :

NL=l

FF=O

;

0 Sample cross reference output

[A:\FLADDER\SAMPLE]

l l l Cross reference * * * PAGE 1STEP NO./NET No.

Address Symbol Comment

x0.0

-II----#- : S00045/N00009 S00049/N00012 S00053/N00013 S00082/N00017

S00088/N00020 SOOO94/NOOO2

x0.1

--it-# : S00050/N00010 S00054/N00012 S00059/N00015 S00065/N00017

S00077/N00029

YO.0 Double writing

--O--CD-: S00045/N00009 S00128/N00062 S00256/N00098

RO.0--It--+- : S00009/N00003 S00012/N00008 S00014/N00009 S00015/N00010

S00022/N00010 S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017

S00047/N00019 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035

--@- + : SOOOO2/N00001

- 121-



4. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2 of the CROSSINF.DAT file)

l Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

:

GUIDE=Step number

NET-INF=O

STEP-INF=l

FROM=S%s

READ=read

WRITEwrite

NL=O

FF=O

;

0 Sample cross reference output

(A:\FLADDER\SAMPLE]

*** Cross reference *** PAGE 1Step number

Address Symbol Comment

x0.0

Read : 500045 SO0049 SO0053 SO0082 SO0088 SO0094

x0.1

Read : SO0050 SO0054 SO0059 SO0065 SO0077

YO.0 Double writing

Write : SO0045 SO0128 SO0256

RO.0

Read : SO0009 SO0012 SO0014 SO0015 SO0022 SO0024 SO0033 SO0045

so0047 so0074 so0079

Write : soooo2

- 122-



4. OPERATION

4.5.3.6 Changing the printer specification

Upon the completion of installation, the default printer is set to EPSON VPlOOO.

(1) Changing the printer specification lo NEC PR201

To enable output to an NEC PR201 printer, change the setting file by means of the procedure

described below. (In the following example, the floppy disk drive is drive A, FAPT LADDER is

installed under the C: \ FLADDER directory, and the file is changed from the DOS prompt.)

[Operation]

OCopy the AMROFTRP.PR file from the APPENDIX directory of Volume 5 of the FAPT

LADDER-II system floppy disks to the FAPT LADDER-II install directory.

Example: C: \ CD FLADDER < Enter >

C: \ FLADDER > COPY A: \ APPENDIX \ AMROFTRP.PR C: < Enter >

@I Delete the AMROPTRP.DAT file from the FAPT LADDER-II install directory.

Example: C: \ FLADDER > DEL AMROPTRP.DAT c Enter >

0 Change the name of the AMROFTRP.PR file to AMROPTRP.DAT.

Example: C: \ FLADDER > RENAME AMROFTRP.PR AMROPTRP.DAT < Enter >

Note) To reenable output to the EPSON VP1000 printer, perform steps @ through 0, replacingAMROFTRP.PR with AMROFTRP.ESC.

(2) Changing the printer specification to a FANUC printer

For details, see Section 453.5 (4).

Note) FANUC PRINTER is connected to a serial port with RS-232-C cable.

Please set the communication mode from DOS prompt before starting FAPT LADDER-II by

the following command.

(Example) When connected to a serial port COMl.

C:/ > MODE COM1:4800,N,8.2 < Enter >

-123-



4. OPERATION

4.5.4 Compilation

During compilatron, an edited source program is translated into an object fi le executable by the

PMC. Uncompiled programs cannot be transferred to the ROM writers (PMC writer or FA writer) orRAM for the PMC. Compilation can be performed in one of two modes: normal mode and

condensed mode. (except PMC-PAB.)

6

Source

program

l Condensed mode

I---) Transferred to the ROM writers

and PMC

A source program can be compiled in condensed mode. When a ladder with the same number

of steps is compiled in condensed mode, the size of the created object file is smaller than that

created rn normal mode. As a result, condensed mode has the advantages listed below:

0 A larger C language area can be allocated.

Normal mode Condensed mode

Object file

Ladder Ladder

Clanguage

tC

language

8 Time required for compilation is reduced.

Q Time required for transfer from the personal computer to the PMC is reduced.

@ A ROM module with a smaller capacity may be used.

- 124-



4. OPERATION

On

<iI

b,

the other hand, condensed mode has the restrictions described below.

Memory map changes (area expansion) are likely to occur when instructions, symbols,

comments, and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated by compilation incondensed mode is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built-in editing function. In

this case, the user needs to pay attention to possible overlap between the ladder area and

C language area.

ROM format file Ladder

&’ . ..’

.,. .:. ,......

C

language

Overlap (A C language program

map change is required.)

A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode cannot be compared with

a ROM format file generated by compilation in normal mode.

l Changing the order of subprograms

When a program is compiled, the source program, subdivided into subprograms, is converted

to a single ROM file. Within the ROM file, subprograms are arranged in ascending order of

subprogram numbers. The order in which subprograms are displayed on the edit screen of the

built-in programmer function of the PMCRB4 or PMC-RC4 may be changed after the source

program has been uploaded to FAPT LADDER, decompiled, compiled, and downloaded.

4.5.4.1 Start and terminate

(1) Start

[Operation] 0 Select [compil] (compile) from the offline menu.

@ The compile screen appears.

Compile PMC-RB4 [C:~CFLADDERY 1

Source program name

Output to ROM format file

SYMBOL 6 COMMENT [F6] YES

NET COMMENT (F7] POINTERS ONLY

EXEC 2 3 5 DOS OEND

Fig. 4.5.4.1 (a) Compile Menu Screen

-125-



4. OPERATION

l General Flow of Operation for compiling

I Offline menu I

I Offline menu I

(2)

(3)

Compile

Fig. 4.5.4.1 (b) Compiling General Operation and Screens

(a) Normal mode

With PMCPA3, compile processing is always performed in condense mode.

[Operation] 6

0(b) Condense mode

[Operation] 0 Select F8 [CONDNS].

0

Select Fl [EXEC].

Compile processing is performed in normal mode.

Compile processing is performed in condense mode.

Displaying the results of compile processing

Pressing F2 [MAP] after the completion of compile processing displays a memory map for the

object file.

The results of compile processing are displayed by pressing F3 [ERROR] on the compile

screen, regardless of whether an error or warning has been output. Moreover, the results of

compile processing are output lo a text-format file, as described below.

C:YDATAYSAMPLE

tttC# PASS1 ##tiltMESSAGE

SYMBOL

LEVELl.NLA

1

t Output the compile result in two passes.

Ladder program exists beyond END1 instruction. (00111net)tNet No.

LEVELZ.#LA

Pl.#LAPZ.#LAThere is no SP instruction at the top of the subprogram.

#Wt## PASS2 #tl#t

Compile completed Error count =00002 Warning count =OOOOO

in each

subprogram.

Fig. 4.5.4.1. (c) Compile result

PASSl: Convert to object

PASS2: Syntax check

- 126-



4. OPERATION

If many errors have occurred, those errors can be easily identified by viewing the relevant file

wtth the text editor or by printing out the file.

The results of execution can also be displayed using a utility function. (See Section 4.5.9.)

Example: When the program shown below is compiled, the following files are output lo the

C:VDATA directory:

Execution result file SAMPLE.ERR

Map file SAMPLE.MAP

Compile PMC-RB4 [C:yFLADDERSr' ]

Source program name :C:\DATA\SAMPLE

. '.:j:...". .',::.':,,.:,:.:... Compile Rormal End ,.;.::_':'::'.:$,:.:il':.",:'.':::I::',;:.:<::y::jjij!::,:;j::.(.,,:,:,..,..

Compile completed error count=000000 warning count=000000

EXEC 2HAP 3ERROR 5 OEND

(4)

(5)

Fig. 4.5.4.1 (d) Complile Completed Screen

DOS command

You can call MS-DOS shell from FAPT LADDER by pushing F9 (DOS) key.If you want to terminate this, key in the command as bellow at MS-DOS command line.

vA:\>EXITl

Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END] or press the < Esc > key.

@I The screen drsplay returns to the main menu screen.

- 127-



4. OPERATION

4. 5. 4. 2 Compile options

These options’ initial value can be changed at the Program option set-up.

(Refer to 4.5.7 Program option set-up.)

(1) F6 [SYMBOL]

Select whether output or not output the symbol & comment data to ROM format file.

However.the symbols which can not be displayed on CRT/MD1 (7bytes or more symbols) and

the coil comments assigned to them never output to ROM format file.

l “YES”: (Default setting)

The symbols which can be displayed on CRT/MDl(Gbytes or less symbols) and the coil

comments assigned to them are output to object file.

They can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

0 "NO" :

No symbol/coil comment is converted to object file.

Any symbol and coil comment is not displayed on CRT/MDI.

(2) F7 [NETCMT]

If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether ‘Net comment pointer’

(Note2) is output to object file or not.

0 “POINTERS ONLY” : (Default setting)

To edit the ladder program by CNC built-in editor and decompile the data by FAPT

LADDER, select this setting.

However, ladder size gets larger because ‘Net comment pointer’ is output to object file.

0 "NO" :

Any ‘Net comment pointer” is not output to object file. In this case, ladder size in the ROM

format file is saved.

However, decompile the object file makes its net comment data information lost.

Note 1) Net comment has its own character information only in a source program on the

personal computer.

Compiled ROM format file does not include any net comment characters.

Only ‘Net comment pointer’( = information of net comment position.) can be

output to ROM format file as an functional instruction “NOP”.

This ‘Net comment pointer” helps to restore net comment date at decompiling the

ROM format file that is edited on CNC built- in editor and uploaded to FAPT

LADDER.

- 128-



4. OPERATION

4.5.4.3 Password set function

This function is supported only in the FS15B16/18/21 -B.

It enables a password to be added during compilation.

The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited on the

CRT/MDI. This function requires to be set the program option. (Refer to 4.5.7 Setting program

options.)

(1) Password types

There are two password types.

Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

We Use

Password (R) Password to allow display on the CNC

Password (RAN) Password to allow display and editing on the CNCI .

(2) Password setting (compile)

0 When no password + Goto@.

When password RW & R, RW or R

After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify

whether to use a password.

Do you enter password? (Y/N)J

To set a password, press l-lY + If password RW & R or R go to 0.I

If password RW go to 8.-

If it is unnecessary to set a password, pressl-l

N +Goto@.

- 129-



4. OPERATION

An entered password is not displayed on the screen.

If the -z Enter > key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a

password is not specified. + Goto@.

. When c Esc > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is rejected.-+ Go to 0.

@ The password confirmation screen appears.

Verification (R/W)

(9 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your

password was entered correctly.

When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is

accepted.When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed.

You are allowed to retry entering twice.

. When c Esc > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is rejected.

+ Go to 0.

@l Compilation begins.

4.5.5 Decompilation

During decomprlation, a ROM format lile is translated into a source program that can be edited or

printed out.

Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is object file data. Data in the object file

cannot be edited or printed out. Such data must be decompiled before it can be edited or printed

out.

(Note) To decompile a password-protected object fi le, it is necessary to enter a password

(See Section 4.5.4.)

- 131-



4. OPERATION

4.5.5.1 Operation

(1) Start

[Operation]

0 Select [DECOMP] (decompile) from the main menu.

@ The decompile screen appears.

Decompile PMC-RB4 [C:\FLADDER\ 1


Output to Source ProgramSYMBOL h COMMENT

Merge [F4] YES

Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)

EXEC 2 3 MERGE 5SYMBOL6 OEND

Fig. 4.551 (a) Decompile Menu Screen

(2) Decompiling

[Operation]

0 Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.

Q Decompilation is performed and the result is displayed.

-132-



4. OPERATION

(3) Decompiling

Upon the completion of decompiling, pressing the F2 [MAP] key can display the memory map of

the object file.The result of decompiling can be displayed by pressing the F3 [ERROR] key on the decompile

screen, regardless of whether an error or warning has occurred.

If many errors have occurred, the error file can be viewed or printed using a text editor.

The result of decompiling can also be displayed using the utility function (see Section 4.5.9).

(Example) When the program shown below is decompiled :

Result file SAMPLE.ERR and map file SAMPLE.MAP are output to directory C: \ DATA.

Decompile PMC-RB4


.’ Decompile normal en8

Decompile completed error count=000000 warning count=000000

EXEC MAP 3ERROR MERGE SSYMBOLP

OEND

Fig. 4.5.5.1 (b) Decompile end Screen

(4) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

4.5.5.2 Decompile option

(1) Merge

In case the existent file is specified for output source program when decompiling, the existent

source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents of object file.

In this case it is possible to merge the Ladder in object file with the SymboVCommnet in source

program by specifying the undermentioned function-key.

-133-



4. OPERATION

Decompile PMC-RB4 [C:\FLADDER\ ]

Source program name : c: \DATA\SAMPLE

Output to source program

SYMBOL h COMMENT

Merge [F4] YES

Duplicated symbol definition (FS] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)

3 MERGE 5SYMBOL6P

OEND

Fig. 4.5.5.2 Decompile Menu Screen

(a) F4 [MERGE]

This specification decides whether to merge the symbolicomment by “NO” or “YES”

1) "NO" :

The existent source program is deleted and new source program is created with the

contents of object file.

There is no display of “F5(SYNBOL]” in this condition.

2)“YES” : (Default setting)

The symbolkommnet in source program is merged with that in object file. As for the other

data except symbolicomment, object file is effective.

Just after this specification, FS(SYMBOL] will be displayed to specify which symbol

definition is effective, either in source program or in object file, when they are in conflict.

(b) F5 [SYMBOL]

F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed when “YES” is specified for F4(MERGE].

This specification decides which symbol definition in either source program or object file is

effective when they are in conflict.

1) “SOURCE DATA”

The symbol definrtton rn source program is effective.

2) “MEMORY CARD DATA” : (Default setting)

The symbol definition in object file is effective.

- 134-



4. OPERATION

(c) The combination of F4[MERGE] and F5[DUPADR], and its result.

*c-

t

- Object file

- Symbol/Comment data

ADDRESS SYHBOL(Cbyte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

x0.0 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxR1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

- Source program

- Symbol/Comment data

ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

-+(i) The result of "MERGE = NO"

Source program

x0.0 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

*(ii) The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition = MEMORY CARD

DATA".

Source program

x0.0 xxxxxx

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB

Y4.7 YYYYYY

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

+(iii) The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition=SOURCE DATA"..

Source program

x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

- 135-



4. OPERATION

4.553 Password

To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a password.

Set password type Password type to be entered

Both password (R) and (RAN) Password (R/W)

I assword (R/w) I assword (R/W)

Password (R)

@ After discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password entry screen appears.

Enter password (R) Note)If an R/W password has been set

up, “password (R/W)” is

displayed.

0 When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.

If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is displayed, and processing

discontinues.

(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)

When -z Esc > is pressed, the request to start discompilation is rejected.

-136-



4. OPERATION

455.4 Outputting to split files

When the results of decompilation are output to a source program, they are split into units of

subprograms and output to different files. For details, see Section 3.4.2.

Object file

PO0 1 #LA

Subprogram Pl

(Ladder)

POO2.#SS

Subprogram P2

(Step Sequence)

P003.#LA

Subprogram P3

(Ladder)

The END instruction is not included in

the source program.

The instruction is automatically addedwhen the program is compiled.

- 137-



4. OPERATION

4.5.6 Input/Output

There are three types of inputioulput operations, as described below.

1)

2)

3)

ROM read/write operation by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer).

Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface.

Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette

Adapter or Handy File, respectively.

[Operation]

0 Switch off the personal computer and input/output unit, and connect them via an RS-232-C

cable. (See Appendix 8.)

@I Start FAPT LADDER.

0 Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

@I The input/output menu appears.

Table 4.56 Baud Rate Setting

Input/output destination

ROM writers

(PMC WRITER, FA WRITER)

Baud rate setting (bps)

4800

FANUC Series 16’18/20 (PMC-R series)

FANUC Series 15B (PMC-NB)

FANUC F-D Mate mini (PMC-OC)FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D (PMC-PAlIPA3)

48OOl9600

4.5.6.1 I/O port setting

FAPT LADDER sets up ports according to the values in the following data files.

1) IBM PC/AT version : FLIO AT.DAT-

These files are in text format. So, a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.

-138-



4. OPERATION

2) Contents of the FLIO_AT.DAT

(effective data section only)

DATA-BLOCK = IO-PORT-SET

PMC-WRITER

FA-WRITER

PMC-L

PMC-M

PMC-M (TT)

PMC-M (AXIS)

PMC-MMC

PMC-MMC (AXIS)

PMC-N

PMC-P

PMC-OA

PMC-M (I/O)

PMC-M (l/O. TT)

PMC-M (I/O. AXIS)

PMC-N (I/O)

PMC-RB

PMC-RC

PMC-RAl

PMC-RA2

PMC-RBP

PMC-RA3

PMC-RB3

PMC-RC3

PMC-PA1

PMC-PA3

PMC-QC

PMC-NB

PMC-R04

PMC-RC4

=COMl ‘48. N. 8.2

=COMl :48.N,8.2

=COM l .48, N. 8.2

=COMl r48.N.8.2

=COMl : 48. N. 8. 2

=COMl : 48, N. 8, 2

=COMl ~48.N.8.2

=COMl r48.N.8.2

=COMl y96.N.8.2

=COMl 48. N. 8. 2

=COMl : 96, N. 8. 2

=COMl : 48. N. 8. 2

=COMi .48, N. 8.2

=COMl .48. N. 8. 2

=COMl : 96. N. 8, 2

=COMl : 96, N. 8. 2

=COMi 96. N. 8. 2

=COMl 96. N. 8. 2

=COMl 96, N. 8. 2

=COMl 96. N. 8. 2

=COMl : 96, N. 8. 2

=COMl : 96. N, 8. 2

=COMl : 96, N. 0. 2

=COMl : 96, N. 8. 2

=COMl : 96, N. 8, 2

=COMl : 96. N. 8. 2

=COMl : 96, N. 8. 2

=COMl : 96, N. 8. 2

=COMl : 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-RB4 (STEP~SEO) =COMl : 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEC)) =COMl : 96. N. 8. 2

Entity on the left-hand side of each equal sign ( =) : Device

Entity on the right-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in the format of each MODE

command. Only the first parameter (port number) and second parameter (baud rate) can be

changed.

- 139-



4. OPERATION

4.5.6.2 ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

ROM format data is written to ROM installed in the PMC. ROMs which can be used depend on the

PMC model, as indicated in Table 4.5.6.2. When using the FA writer, place it in remote mode.

(1) Read

Table 4.5.6.2 ROMs Usable with Each PMC Model

PMC model Usable ROM

PMC-RA3 lM-bit ROM

PMC-RB3 lM-bit ROM/ROM module B (note 1)

PMC-RC3 ROM module A, B, C, and D

[Operation]

Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the l/O menu screen.

Select Fl : (READ].

Enter the name of a source program name containing read data.

Read operation is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

When read operation terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(2) Write

[Operation 1

Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the l/O menu screen.

Select F2 : (WRITE].

Enter the name of a source program name to be written.

Writing is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

When writing terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

- 140-



4. OPERATION

(3) Verification

[Operation]

0 Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the I/O menu screen.

@ Select F3 : [VERIFY]

0 Enter the name of a source program name to be verified.

@ Verification is executed. During operatron, the Indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

0 When verification terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(4) Blank check

[Operation]

0 Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select F4 : [BLANK] (blank check).

6 Blank checking is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@I When blank checking terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation]

@ Select FlO : [END].

Q The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note 1) When writing 1Mbit ROM for PMC-RB3 with FA writer, “ID ERROR” will be

displayed on FA writer. But writing terminates normally.

(Note 2) PMC except PMCRA3, RB3, RC3 not transfer data to and from EPROM.

- 141-



4. OPERATION

4.5.6.3 Transfer to and from PMC

(1) Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PA3/NB/NB2KJC

Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C.

FAPT LADDER 7

FS16/18/15B

-Power Mate-D/F/H, -

1 F-D Mate mini9600 bps14800 bps

Upload9600 bps14800 bps

Comparison9600 bps14800 bps

Baud rate settinq for FS16/18/158, Power Mate-D/F/H, and F-D Mate mini

(1) Download

[Operation]

(i> Select F3 :

Q, Select Fl :

name.

[PMC] on the VO menu screen.

[DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen to display the source program

*c3) Press the < SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

t(4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], II/O), [HOST], and [EXEC) in this order.

Press the < Enter > key.

Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

When downloadlng terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(2) Upload

If the PMC-RC3’RC4’QCNB’NB2 used, language data (C language) other than Ladder

programs can be used. When uploading or comparison is executed from one of these PMCs,

one of two data types (LADDER or ALL) can be specified. LADDER and ALL have the

following meantngs:

LADDER

ALL

Sequence program only

Sequence program and language data (C language)

- 142-



4. OPERATION

Specify either data type in step 6I of the operation described below:

[Operation]

0 Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

@ Select F2 : [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen to display the source program name.

*@ Press the <SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

*G?JPress the CNC soft keys [PMC]. [l/O]. [HOST], and (EXEC] in this order.

0 Press the <Enter> key.

8 Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.

(?I Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@I When uploading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output. ,

(3) Comparison

[Operation]

0 Select F3 :[PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

0 Select F3 :[COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen to display the source

program name.

*O Press the c SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

$0 Press the CNC soft keys (PMC], [l/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order

@ Press the <Enter > key

6) Comparison is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECtJTlNG” blinks.

0 When comparison terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(4) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END]

@ The screen dtsplay returns to the main menu screen

(Note) In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an operation

on the CNC.

-143-



4. OPERATION

(5) CRT/MD1 and DPUMDI of the Power Mate-D

The NC of the Power Mate-D/H have the CRTiMDl screen and the DPL/MDI screen. The NC

of the Power Mate-F has only the DPLIMDI screen. When the CRT/MD1 screen is used, the

procedures for data input/output are the same as those with the PMC-R Series ((1) to (4)above). When the DPLIMDI screen is used, the procedures for data input/output are different

from those with the PMC-R Series.

When the DPLIMDI screen is used, perform downloading, uploading, and comparison as

described below:

(a) Press the < DGNOS > key on the DPL/MDI screen and select the diagnostic data screen

(b) Press the <READ > or <WRITE > key on the DPLIMDI screen.

(c) Follow procedures (1) to (4) described above on the personal computer.

4.5.6.4 Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory

card

A object file compiled in a personal computer can be converted to a memory card format file, and

output to a memory card via a memory card interface installed in the personal computer. The PMC

program on the memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory card in

the memory card interface in the CNC. By reversing the procedure, programs can be transferred

from the CNC RAM to the memory card.

- 144-



4. OPERATION

(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]

Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

F3 : Select [COMPILE] and compile a source program.

Return to the main menu, and select [l/O] (input/output) from it.

Select F5 : [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu.

Fl KEY FR WRI TER

F2 KEY PWC WRI TER

F3 KEY PHC

F- 5 KEY Handy Cl l e

FS KEY Henorv Card

F6 KEY BFI CKUP

F18 KEY END

Fig. 4.5.6.4 (a) InputIOutout Menu

Select [WRITE] (write (programmer - > memory card)).

l/O MQBRY CARD)

Fl KEY WRI TE( PROCRAMER J Mem y Car d )

F:! KEY READ ( PROCWR ( Memory Card )

FI O KEY : END

Fig. 4.5.6.4 (b) Memory Card Input/Output Screen

- 145-



4. OPERATION

Convert the file from source program to memory card format.

Specify the following items for execution.

l Name of the source program

Display the source program name.l Name of the memory card file

Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the

CNC) to be created by conversion, and the drive where the memory card is inserted.

WHITE ( Programx ) Merry Card 1

Source program name : C : YDATAWMF’LE

Memory Card FILE NAME : D: YSAMPLE. #BF

(Specify the MEMORYCARD drive)

Fig. 4.5.6.4 (c) Input/Output (to MC) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

-146-



4. OPERATION

The following two methods can be used to insert the memory card output in step @ into

the memory card interface in the CNC and read programs on the memory card.

l Using the I/O function of the PMC

Specify M-CARD, READ, and the desired filename or file number at DEVICE,FUNCTION, and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft key

[EXEC] . Sequence programs are read from the memory card file created in step 0.

PMC l/O screen

-~~

PMC l / O PROGRAM

CHANNEL = 1

DEVI CE = M CARD

: : FtJ NC: T~I . OtiREAD

DATA KI ND = LADDER

FI LE NO. =

( #NAME )

MONI T STOP

[ EXEC I [CANCELI [WRI TE I [ READ I [COMPARI

l Using the BOOT SYSTEM at power-on time

Each CNC can read the sequence program from the memory card by using the BOOT

SYSTEM at power-on time.

Refer to manual of each CNC for the operation.

-147-



4. OPERATION

(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

PMC programs are written to a memory card, using a memory card interface in the CNC.

When the memory card is inserted in a memory card interface in the personal computer, the

PMC programs on the memory card can be accessed as ordinary DOS files.

[Operation J

0 Specify M-CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired filename (omissible) at DEVICE,

FUNCTION, LADDER, and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen, respectively, then press soft

key (EXEC]. Sequence programs are output to the memory.

PMC l/O screen

‘PMC I/O PROGRAM MONT STOP

CHANNEL = 1DEVICE = M-CARD

FHNG:TIiON = WRITE

DATA KIND = LADDER

FILE NO. =

( #NAME 1

/ [ EXEC I[CANCEL[WRTE I[ READ I[COMPAR

The following operations are performed on the personal computer side.

@ Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

0 Select [I’O] (input!output) from the main menu.

@ Select F5 : [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu, (See Fig. 4.5.6.4 (a).)

61 Select [READ] (read (programmer <- memory card)). (See Fig. 4.5.6.4 (b).)

@ Convert the PMC programs output to a memory card in step 0 from memory card format

to source program format by specifying the following items and running the utility.

l Name of the memory card file

Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file written to the memory

card, and the memory card drive in which the memory card is inserted.


Display the source program name.

- 148-



4. OPERATION

4.5.6.5 Handy file + 3.5” floppy disk (MS-DOS format)

If a object file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy File format and output to a

3.5” floppy disk (DOS format), the PMC program can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a

Handy File interface connected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.

(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]

Compile a source program.

Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu. (See Fig. 4.5.6.5 (a).)

Select [WRITE] (write (programmer -> Handy File)).

FI KE\ WRITE ( Programer ) Handy File)

F? KEY READ ( Programner Handy F i I e)

Fig. 4.5.6.5 (a) FDCAS Input/Output Screen



4. OPERATION

Convert the PMC program on a 3.5” floppy disk (Handy File format) generated in step 0 to

source program by specifying the following items and running the utility.

l Name of the Handy Frle format file

Specify the program name output in step 0, and the 3.5” floppy disk drive where thefloppy disk is inserted.


Display the source program.

READ I Prograr I~ Handy File 1

Handy File File naw : C : YSAMPLE. #SF(Specify the floppy disk drive)

Source program naiw: C :YDATAYSAMPLE

Fig. 4.5.6.5 (c) InputlOutput (from FDCAS) Screen

Decompile the source program file after conversion, and the resultant file will become able

to be edited on the personal computer.

-152-



4. OPERATION

@ When backup terminates normaly, the “NORMAL END” message is displayed.

(2) Restoring

[Operation]

@I Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.

(3 Select F2 : [RESTOR] from the backup menu.

0 Enter a backup program name, and press (EXEC].

RLSI ORC (SOURCE PROGRRH (- BRCKUP PROGRRH)

BRCKUP YROGRRH NRWF

Fig. 4.5.6.6 (c) Restoring Screen

@I When restoring terminates normaly, the “NORMAL END” message is displayed.

-154-



4. OPERATION

4.5.7 Setting program options

This function enables the setting of options for each function.

Specified data is stored for each source program.

[Operation j

0 Using the < J > or c T > key, position the cursor to the function for which options are to

be set.

@ On the setting screen for each function, select an item by positioning the cursor with the

< l > or < T > key, then change the setting with the et> or < -_$> key.

.\DRTA\SFlnPLE

Fig. 4.57

457.1 Compile

The user can set the compile function options as described below. These options, when set, are

used as the initial values of the compile options for the off-line function, or are used for compile

processing performed with the on-line functions.

For details of each option, see Section 4.5.4.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Condense

This option specifies whether condense mode is to be used for compile processing.

Symbol

This option specifies whether to output symbol or comment data to an object file.

Net comment

This option specifies whether to output net comment data to an object file.

-155-



4. OPERATION

(4) Password

This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compile time.

[RW&R]

Fw

[RI

VW Does not display the dialog box. (Password setting is disabled.)

: Displays the password (RN) setting dialog box as well as the

password (R) setting dialog box.

Displays only the password (RAN) setting dialog box.

Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

Fig. 4.5.7.1

-156-



4. OPERATION

4.5.7.2 Decompile

The user can set the decompile function options as described below. These options, when set, are

used as the initial values of the off-line function decompile options, or are used for the decompileprocessing performed with the on-line functions.

For details of each option, see Section 4.5.5.

(1) Symbol merge

This option specifies whether to merge

data at decompile time.

PJOI

[SOURCE]

. Does not merge

T Gives prionty to

source program data and object file symbol/comment

symbol and comment data.

the source data when duplicate addresses exist in the

source program and the symbol data of the object file.

[MEMORY CARD] : Gives priority to the object file data when duplicate addresses exist in

the source program and the symbol data of the object file. ,

I DecomDi l el

~~I NO/ SOURCE~I

Fig. 4.5.7.2

-157-



4. OPERATION

4.5.7.3 Modifying program option initial values (OPTION.CNF)

When a new program is to be created, the initial value of each option can be modified by means of

the procedure described below.

[Operation]

Using the text editor, open the OPTION.CNF file under the

II is installed.

Find the section corresponding to a model subject to initial

starting with #).

Example: #32;(RA3) for PMC-RA3

#4l;(Rl34_STEP) for PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)

Note) A section having a line beginning with a semicolon

attempt to modify such a section is ignored.

0 Find the subsection corresponding to a function subject to initial value modification (that is,

directory where FAPT LADDER-

value modification (that is. a line

(:) contains legend data. Any

a line starting with ‘).

0 Specify a new value for the option whose initial value is to be modified.

Table 4.5.7.3

Subsection Option

‘COMPILE condense

Setting and function

0: Performs compile processing in normal

mode.

1: Performs compile processing in condense

mode.

symbol

(Symbol/comment)

0: Does not output symbol/comment data to

the object file.

1: Outputs symbol/comment data to the object

file.

netcmt

(Net comment)

password

0: Does not output net comment data to the

object file.

1: Outputs net comment data to the object file.

0: Does not set a password.

1: Sets a password (R/W) and password (R).

2: Sets a password (RMT).

3: Sets a password (R).

DECOMPILE symbol-merge 0: Does not perform merge processing.

1: Performs merge processing with priority

given to source program data.

2: Performs merge processing with priority

given to object file data.

Note) Never attempt to modify the values of options that are not listed in the above table.

Otherwise, the system may malfunction.

-158-



4. OPERATION

4.5.8 Mnemonic editing

4.5.8.1 Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file

A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with any standard text editor.

[Operation]

0 Select [MNEEDTJ (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

Q The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 4.5.8.1 (a)).

FI KEY : SOURCE PROGRAM ) WEUI NI C FI LE

F2 KEY : MNEWNIC FI LE ) SOURCE PROGRAM

F3 KEY : EXECUTEUSER BATCH FI LE

FI O KEY : END

Fig. 4.5.8.1(a) Mnemonic Menu Screen

0 Select [MNECNV] (conversion to mnemonic).

-159-



4. OPERATION

@I The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 4.5.8.1(b)).

I ) SOURCEPROGRAMNM E

2) WEMUNI C FI LE NAME

31 CUNVfRTADI )TAI ND SELECTIUN(0 : 4 : LADDER{ ; : yqgl PARAMETER , 5 : I / U MODULE

. 6 MESSECE(3 SwBULLCMMENr

4) MODE : FUR P-C

Fig. 4.5.8.1 (b) Mnemonic Conversion Screen

0 Specify the following items:

l Source program name

Display the name of the source program to be converted.

l Mnemonic file name

Specify the name of Ihe mnemonic file to which a source program is converted. Up to

40 characters can be specified.

l Data conversion selection

Specify data files subject to conversion. All data files can be specified or specific data

files can be selected.

l Mode (setting item selection)

Specify setting items. Select items from the table below, using the -z t > and

< + > keys.

- 160-



4. OPERATION

:OR P-G- P-G output format data is converted.

Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to code format (Note 2).

lapanese Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is converted.

anguage Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language

:omment (Note) format (Note 3).

IJLL OPTIONS Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is converted.-

Data including address symbols and comments, and function instruction

names treated as comments is converted.

Data including all instruction sections, operand sections, and comment

sections is converted.

Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language

format (Note 3).

.ABEL/ Data is converted and the jump destination (label) of a function instruction

SUB-PROGRAM (JMPB, JMPC, CALL, SP, or another instruction) used in a sub-program is

highlighted. The step number of the converted mnemonic data does not

agree with other setting. (The function instruction section used in the sub-

program does not agree with the other setting.)

Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language

format (Note 3).

(Note 1) The item specifying Japanese language comment conversion cannot be selected

on an English mode system.

(Note 2, 3) Format displayed on the code or Japanese-language input mode screen during

message editing.

@ Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

0 Source program is converted to a mnemonic file.

@ An error message is displayed if <Enter> is pressed after conversion. The mnemonic

conversion screen appears when < SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

-161-



4. OPERATION

4.5.8.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program

A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor is converted to a source

program that can be edited with the personal computer version of FAPT LADDER.

(Operation]

Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears.

Select [SRCCNV] (conversion to a source program).

The source program conversion screen appears (Fig. 458.2).

I) WEMONC FLE NAMT

2) SOURCE PROCRAM NAME

Specify the followlng items:

l Mnemonic file name

Specify the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Up to 40 characters can be

specified.

0 Source program name

Display the name of the source program to which a mnemonic file is to be converted.

Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

Mnemonic file is converted to a source program

An error message is displayed if c Enter> is pressed after conversion. The source

program conversion screen appears when -z SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

-162-



4. OPERATION

4.5.8.3 Mnemonic file format

If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is to be converted to a source

program, the mnemonic file must be in the following format.

(1) Identification code

The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification codes that each begin with %.

ID code Description

%@A Beginning of ALL-format data

%@E End of ALL-format data

%@O to 5 Beginning of unit-format data

% only End of unit-format data

The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below.

‘I

Unit-format data

Parameter

Title

Symbol & comment

Ladder

Message

l/O module

PMC model

R series/PAS/QC/NB/NB2

%@O

%@l

%@2 or %@2-C (Note 1)

%@3

%@4

% @5

Note 1) “%@2”, and “%@2-C” correspond to source format types as follows:

% @2 : FORMAT-A/B

%@2-c : FORMAT-C

FAPT LADDER-II uses FORMAT-C only. This means that, as part of conversion to

a mnemonic file, conversion to “%@2-C” type code is performed. For conversion

to a source program, however, both type codes (“%@2” and “%@2-C”) can be

used.

-163-



4. OPERATION

(2) Linefeed code

Control character LF (OAH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control character CR (ODH) is

ignored.

(3) Reserved symbols

0 cd This special character is reserved for use in ladder data.

l A semicolon is used in the ladder data section to separate ladder data from a

comment. Characters that follow a semicolon are treated as a comment.

When a mnemonic file is converted back to a source program, a semicolon and

a comment that follows it are not generated.

@ r:j This special character is reserved for use in ladder and l/O module data.

l A colon is used in the ladder data section to separate a net number from ladder

data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a net number.

l A colon is also used in the l/O module data section to separate a channel

number from I/O module data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a

channel number.

(4) Control character

The dollar character “$” is used as control character in the mnemonic file. Every dollar

character in the sentence must be described as “$$‘I in the mnemonic file.

(a) Symbol and comment data

(f) Description of address and symbol

Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line.

Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings describe after address data

with blank character or horizontal tabulation character as delimitter.

L R0200.0 UNIT - 3 - POWER

-164-



4. OPERATION

4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

(a) Parameter

0 PMC-PA3:RA3!Rf34!RB4 (STEP)IRBSIRBG

%@ 0 1

2 BINARY1

3 NOJ.

4 PMC-RB41

81

[EOBI

12. Counter dala type (Binary or BCD)

3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

4. PMC model (PMC-RA3/PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4

(STEP SEQ) PMC-PAYPMC-

RB5/PMC-RB6)

(Note) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used), specifythe KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image address as

follows:

(3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl 1

@ PMC-RB3

%@ 0 1

2 BINARYJ.

3 NOi

4 PMC-RB317 1001

%l

IEOBI

Counter data type (Binary or BCD)

Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

PMC model (PMC-RB3)Ladder execution time (100% (fixed))

(Note) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used),

specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image

address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

-166-



4. OPERATION

(b) Title (common to all models)

%@ 11

'01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME 1

02 MACHINE TOOL NAME1

03 CNC 7 PMC NAME1

IO4 PMC PROGRAM NO.1

~05 EDITION NO.1

'06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO.1

'07 DATE OF PROGRAMING1

'08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BYi

109 ROM WRITTEN BY1

~10 REMARKS1

I% 1~[EOB]

(c) Symbols and comments (common to all models)

%@2-c rp Symbol

R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER

$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'

I Coil Comment

Relay comment

R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT

$1 *$'PowER$$' 'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$' ON'

R0300.0 -Control code

$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP INIT- POWER ON'

PO008 OPEN-FRONT

$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER'

LO100 INITIALIZE

$1 " 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'

1 no Relay comment

%

IEOBI

-168-



4. OPERATION

Q) FULL OPTIONS-

%@3 1

NOOOOl: SUB

N00002: RD

SUB

N00003: RD

SUB

N00004: SUB

N00005: SUB

N00006: SUB

N00007: RD

DEC

WRT

N00008: SUB

N00009: SUB

81

71

Pl

x0.0

68

LlOO

x0.1

73

LlOO

69

LlOO

72

71

P2

RO.0

DO

21

DO.0

72

64

r-Symbol

; SP r Relay comment

;(SUBPRl ) "SUB PROG. NO.O1" 1

: [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.Ol] 1

Coil comment

;(XADRSl ) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl" 4-_1

; JMPBJ no Comment

;(LABELl )1

[LABEL ~ooooi] I1no Relay comment

;

;(XADRSI ) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl" 1

; JMPCJ

;(LABELl ) 1; [LABEL ~ooool] 1

; LBL 1

;(LABELl )l

; [LABEL ~ooooi] 1

i

;

;

;

:

1

:

:

- SPE 1

spl

(SPlOOO

(RADRSOO

(DADRSOI

SPE 1

END 1

) "SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.l"l

) 1

1 1

-170-



4. OPERATION

@ LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

(4 Message

%@ 4 1A0 0. 0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE1

AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVA

L SIGNAL NOT ON1

A00.2 2100020 EDTOK KEY SWITCH ONJ.

%l

IEOBI

0) I/O module

8@3 3

SUBPRl SP

RD

JMPB

RD

JMPC

LABEL1 LBL

SPE 1SPlOOO SP

RD

DEC

WRT

SPE 1

END 1

01

I Address I Relay comment

SUBPRl ;<Pl > “SUB PROG. N0.01"

; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1

r Symbol - Coil comment

XADRSl ;<XO.O > "JIJMPB LABEL LOOl"J.

LABEL1 ;<LlOO >

; [LABEL ~ooool] 1

XADRSZ ;<XO.l > "JUMPB LABEL LOol"1

LABEL1 ;<LlOO > [LABEL Looooi] 1

;<LlOOO >l

: [LABEL LOOOOl] 1

;<P2 > "SUB PROGRAM NO.l"l

RADROO ;<RO.O ' 1DADR04 ;<DO ' 1

21

DO.0 1

J

%@ 5 1

x000 1 0 1 ID64AJ.

YOO8 1 0 4 OD64Bl

sl

[EOBI

- 171-



4. OPERATION

458.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

(a) PMC-FIB4

%@A 1%@O 12 BINARY4

3 NO&

4 PMC-RB4 1

%1

%@l 101 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1

-10 REMARKS 1

%1

%@2-c 1

R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1

R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1

$1 'S'POWERSS' 'KEEP UNIT-~ SSPOWERS' ON'1

R0300.0 1

$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'J.

PO008 OPEN-FRONT1

$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1

LO100 INITIALIZE1

$1 " 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'1

% 1%@3 1RD RlOOl.01

OR R120.3 1AND R1000.2 1

WRT Y2000.4 1

(*Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters

which are input with personal computer can be used.A Net comment

1)

RD R1OO1.O 1

AND R1000.2 1

WRT Y23.4 1

1* SP l form feed position (in Ladder diagram printing)

RD R1O1.O 1

OR R123.4 1

AND R100.21WRT Y200.4 1

% 1%@4 1AOO.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ

AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON 1

% 1%@5 1

x000 1 0 1 ID16CI

YOO8 1 0 4 OD32A1

% 1%@E 1

- 172-



4. OPERATION

4.5.8.6 The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a

model

When using the step sequence method, mnemonic instructions cannot be coded.The mnemonic conversion functions need following notes:

1)

2)

3)

Programming by Mnemonic Instructions

A step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonic instructions. It is impossible to

create a step sequence program with a text editor, or to read the program into FAPT LADDER

by means of mnemonic-to-source conversion.

Source-to-Mnemonic and Mnemonic-to-Source Conversions

If source-to-mnemonic conversion is executed for a step sequence source program, only ladder

subprograms are converted to mnemonics, step sequence subprograms being ignored. If a

step sequence source program is subjected to source-to-mnemonic conversion, then to

mnemonic-to-source conversion, the original source program will not be replicated.

Source Program Conversion using Mnemonics

A program can be converted by using mnemonics, as shown below:

* PMCRC3

1

J 1

e PMCRC4

PMCRC4 (STEP SEQ)

A program for the PMC-RE34 (STEP SEC)) cannot be converted for use with the PMCRC4

(STEP SEC) are not able to use mnemonics for step sequence. The program can be

converted if a ROM file is used, however. (For details of this conversion, see the APPENDIX

3.)

- 173-



4. OPERATION

4.5.8.7 User batch file execution

The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution of FAPT LADDER.

A user’s own batch file generated by editing the contents of the FLMNE.BAT file with a standard

text editor can also be executed.

l Example 1

The execution of FAPT LADDER is suspended and text editor VZ is activated. (in this case,

VZ must be defined in the environment variable PATH beforehand.)

[Operation]

Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNE.BAT as follows:

vz

Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears.

Select ([BATCH] (user batch file execution).

The following message appears:

Execute ‘FLMNE.BAT’.

Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

Specify A (Add), and specify *.HEX as the parameter. VZ is activated and a list of files

with the extension .HEX is displayed.

To restart FAPT LADDER, terminate VZ.

Press any key. The screen display returns to the mnemonic menu screen.

l Example 2

The execution of FAPT LADDER is suspended.

COMMAND.COM is activated and MS-DOS commands

follows:

COMMANDI

Then, the command processor

are enabled. Create FLMNE.BAT as

-174-



4. OPERATION

(2) Link

During linking, load modules created in the C language

language can be used only with PMCRC3RC4RC4required when the C language is not used.

are linked with a ROM format file. The C

(STEP SEQ)IQCINBINB2. Linking is not

ROM

Uormat file

Transferred to the ROM writers

Load modules

U

1 II - gig - andPMC

fn C language

(Note 1) This function enables linking to be performed on a personal computer. In addition, with

this function, an object and C language load modules can be separately transferred to

and linked on the PMC (dotted line in the figure below).

l C proqram development environment for PMC-RC (IRC3IRC4IQCINB)

- Personal computer

Link control statement

creation tool

- FAPT LADDER

C language source Link control source

iC286 (compiler) FANUC distribution

I ,- library

tt

BND386 (binder)

t

BLD386 (binder)

$_

OJ386 (converter ‘)c

Intel hexadecimal _ HEX2SREC (Note l)-

load module

Ibject file

MCARD file)

Convert

(Note 2)W ROM format

file

Convert

(Note 2)

Link _ROM format file -Object file -

with C language (MCARD file)

l-

I-I- .I

- 176-



4. OPERATION

(Note l)FAPT LADDER-II does not allow Intel hexadecimal load modules to be linked. Before

link operation, convert the file format by referring to the HEX2SREC User’s Manual.

(Note 2)With FAPT LADDER-II, ROM format files are no longer used. This means that a ROMformat file cannot be created by compile processing alone, conversion between an

object file and ROM format file being required. A detailed description is given below.

(4 Uselng method of HEX2SREC

Clanguage load modules created in the development languages indicated above cannot be

directly linked. Perform the below operation before linking.

[Operation]

@I Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the DOS prompt. Specify as follows:

IA:\FLADDER\APPENDIX> HEx2sREc input-file-name output-file-name I

8 Conversion is performed.

@I Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR command.

@ Specify an output file name (for example, SAMPLE.SR) as the load module file name for

linking.

(Note) When the extension of an input file name is omitted, the extension “.HEX” is

assumed. Output is directed to a file with the same name but the extension is

changed to “.SR.” The specification of the following files has the same effect in

input/output:

HEXZSREC SAMPLE .HEX SAMPLE .SR

HEXZSREC SAMPLE SAMPLE.SR

HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX

HEXZSREC SAMPLE

(b) Converting between an object file and ROM format file

With FAPT LADDER-II, a ROM format file cannot be created by compiling a source program.

Instead, in the case of link processing, the following extra work is required.

Before link processing: Conversion from an object file (MCARD file) to a ROM format file

After link processing: Conversion from a ROM format file to an object file (MCARD file)

-177-



4. OPERATION

[Operation]

@ Compile the source program (to create an object file).

G3 Select (I/O) from the off-line menu.

0 Press the < F9 > key on the I/O screen. Then, the l/O (ROM FILE) screen is displayed.

(Note) The 110 screen does not display information relating to the c F9 > key, but the < F9 >

key can be selected.

Before link processing, select Fl [WRITE] to convert the object file (MCARD file) to a ROM

format file. After link processing, select F2 [READ] to convert the ROM format file to an

object file (MCARD file).

Fl KEV WRITE ( Memory Car d - > ROM FORMAT FI LE 1

F2 KEY AEFl O ( Memory Card <- ROM FORMAT FI LE 1

F10 KEY END

Fig. 4.5.9 (b)

-178-



4. OPERATION

(c) Starting link processing

[Operation]

@ Press < F4 > on the utility screen.

GZJ Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. Pressing the <Enter> key displays the

link screen.

Specify the model to be used for link processing, by changing the model file name.

The table below indicates the correspondence between the PMC models and model file

names.

PMC model

PMC-RC3

PMC-RC4

PMCRC4 (STEP SEQ)

PMC-QC

PMC-NB

PMC-NB2

Model file name

f103400. tbl (Initial value)

1104000. lbl

fl04200. tbf

1103700. tbl

1103800. tbl

fl04300. tbl

0 The link screen (Fig. 4.5.9 (c)) appears.

Li nker

Load wdue f i Ie name

ROM forut file name

Series Edllan

AYDATAYCWDULE SR

: AYDATAYSAWLEUEX

bchne too name

NC d WC na.e Progru no

Fig. 4.5.9 (c) Link Screen

- 179-



4. OPERATION

(Note) If an invalid model file is spectfted, the status line of the link screen does not display a

model name. In such a case, check the following:

When the newly entered file name is invalid

+ Enter a valid file name.. When the specified model fi le is not installed

--* Install the model file.

(d) Linking

[Operation]

m Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link. The load module file

name must conform to DOS specifications. Here the load module file name should be

specified with its extension (--------. l * *). (Specity an output program name for

HEX2SREC.)

@ Select [EXEC].

(3) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].

Q The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

4.5.10 Selecting On-Line Function from Off- Line Function

Selecttng “ON-LINE FUNCTION” from the off-line menu enables the use of the “On- Line (selected

program)” functions. For details, see Section “4.6 On-Line Function”.

(Correct a part of the “(4) Coversion of a ROM format file ” in the “3.2 Conversion from FAPT

LADDER” in the “APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM”)

[Present]

(1‘) Select ]Off-Line Function] from the initial menu, then select F6 [l/O]. The [l/O] screen

appears.

[Correctron]

(5) Select [Off-Line Function] from the initial menu, then select [l/O]. The [l/O] screen

appears.

- 180-



4. OPERATION

4.6 Online function

4.6.1 The outline of Online function

4.6.1.1 Outline

The on-line function enables the onscreen monitoring and modification of ladder programs and

signal statuses using a personal computer connected to the CNC through an RS232C cable.

The main features of the on-line function are:

l Onscreen monitoring of ladder programs

l Online editing of ladder programs

l Display and modification of PMC parameters

l Onscreen monitoring and modification of signal statuses

l Input and output of a program to and from the PMC (loading from the PMC and storing to

the PM0

l Writing to F-ROM

[Note] The on-line monitoring function of a step sequence program is not supported.

The on-line function can be selected from the initial menu by selecting either of the following two

options:

0 ON-LINE FUNCTION

@ ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)

The two options are outlined below:

- 181 -



4. OPERATION

(1) On-line function outline

(a) ON-LINE FUNCTION

Select this option to load a ladder program from the PMC to a personal computer andsubsequently monilor and modify the ladder program and signal statuses.

- FAPT LADDER-II , ,---- CNCiPMC

Select “ON-LINE FUNCTION”.

Ladder monitor Sequence program (RAM)

On-line function

Diagnosis *IB, J @

. lnputioutput (Loading from o r

storing to the PMC, writing to F-

ROM)

Communication (Communication

A sequence program is loaded from

the PMC (automatic).

with the PMC)File storage

1 Sequence program (RAM) 1I I

01 7 Power ON

1 Sequence program (F-ROM) 1I

I

- 182-



4. OPERATION

(b) ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)

Select this optron to store a program selected using [PROGRAM SELECT] on the initial

menu of the PMC and to monitor and modify the ladder program and signal statuses.

This function enables a ladder program, held by the PMC, to be loaded into a personalcomputer.

This function enables the ladder monitor/online edit function to be applied to a relay

comment or net comment of the program selected by [PROGRAM SELECT].

- FAPT LADDER-II 1,

L

Select “ON-LINE (SELECTED

PROGRAM)“.0

A sequence program held on the

PMC is compared with the

sequence program specified on thepersonal computer (automatic).

< If the programs do not match >

Select one of the following

monitoring methods:

. Loading of the program from the

PMC

. Storing of the program to the

PMC

. Respecifying the program on the

personal computer

Continuing or stopping the

processing

r

t

Ladder monitor Sequence program (RAM)

On-line function

. Diagnosis 2@

. Input/output (Loading from or

storing to the PMC. writing to F-

ROM)

. Communication (Communication

with the PMC)

BFile

. Relay comment

. Net comment

CNUPMC

Sequence program (RAM)

@1 1 Power ON

1 Sequence program (F-ROM) 1

- 183-



4. OPERATION

4.6.1.2 Starting the on-line function

(1) Specifying the on-line function

To use the on-line function, select “ON-LINE FUNCTION” or “ON-LINE (SELECTEDPROGRAM)” on the initial menu screen.

The operation of the function partly depends on whether “ON-LINE FUNCTION” or “ON-LINE

(SELECTED PROGRAM)” is selected. For details of the subsequent operation, see the

description of the function to be used.

RBO(STEP SEQ) [ C:YDATRYSAWLE I

ROBE-9201-3503 Versi on 01.0

Press [TABI key t o move the cursor and

press [ENTERI or [SPRCEI key to sel ect.

bff - Li ne Functi on I

r On-Li ne Functi on I

On-Li ne ( selected orogram

I Exi t I

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (a)

(Note) Before attempting to use the on-line function, connect all cables and set up the PMC.

Before selecting the on-line function, see Section 4.6.2, “Preparation.”

- 184-



4. OPERATION

(2) Selecting “ON-LINE FUNCTION”

If “ON-LINE FUNCTION” is selected, performing the following steps causes the ladder monitor

screen to appear. With lhe ladder monitor screen displayed, select a desired function either

from a pull-down menu or by pressing the corresponding function key.

[Displaying the ladder monitor screen]

Related section

Select “ON-LINE FUNCTION”.

J

8 Communication with the PMC is executed. . .

(automatic)

&

. . . . . See Section 4.6.6,

“Communication.”

0 A program is loaded from the PMC (automatic).

(This step is executed onlv when required.)

J

. . See Section 4.6.5.1,

“Loading from the PMC.”

The ladder monitor . . . . . . . . . .

subproaram screen appears (automatic).

J

Select a subproqram. . _ . . . . . .

J

The ladder monitor screen appears. .

. . . .

1ee Section 4.6.4.1,

. “Ladder monitor.”

The screens are outlined below. For details, see the corresponding sections.

-185-



4. OPERATION

(a) Communication with the PMC

Selecting “ON-LINE FUNCTION” causes the online monitor screen (“SET

COMMUNICATION” dialog box) to appear as shown below. Communication with the PMC

starts automatrcally.

Try to connect with PllC 0000 0000

F7 FB F9 Fl@

Splist Search Symbol Seting

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (b)

(Note) If communicatron falls. click the (“PARAMETER”] button in the “SET

COMMUNICATION” dialog box. The communication parameter settings appear.

Check the settings. (See Section 4.6.6, “Communication.“)

- 186-



4. OPERATION

(b) Loading from the PMC

After communication with the PMC starts normally, the “SET COMMUNICATION” dialog

box closes automatically and the “LOAD FROM PMC” dialog box is opened in its place. A

program is automatically loaded from the PMC.

Lid ftom PNC ..,

-Transfer data type

. LADDER 0 ALL

0

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (c)

(Note) When the most recently monitored program is to be used, loading from the PMC can

(c)

be skipped.

Displaying the “SUBPROGRAM” dialog box (Ladder monitor function)

Once a program is loaded from the PMC, the “SUBPROGRAM” dialog box for the ladder

monitor function appears. Specify the subprogram to be monitored in the dialog box as

described below:

[Operation]

il, Posrtion the cursor to the desired subprogram by pressing the < t > or < 1 7 key.

8 Press the <Enter> key.

@ The ladder diagram for the selected subprogram appears.

.LEVECl ‘, ,. . :. : . j .:.,.,; :,.,: ,:.,

LEVEL2

PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWIIT-Rl

PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWIIT-Ll

P00010 ( RIP WORK PIECE ) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND

PO0011 ( UT WORK PIECE ) PUT DOWN A WORK

PO0021 ( LOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2

PO0022 ( LOSE LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

1 Ok 11 Cancel]

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (d)

- 187-



4. OPERATION

(b) Decompiling a selected program

If “ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)” is selected after a program is obtained using the

input/output function of the on-line function, but before the program is decompiled, the

following message appears:

IMemory card format file has been updated. Decompile it ? (Y/N) 1

6) Selecting a monitoring method

When communication with the PMC starts normally after “ON-LINE (SELECTED

PROGRAM)” is selected, the selected program is compared with that held on the PMC. If

the programs do not match, the dialog box shown below appears.

Select a desrred function.

To use the on-line function for the program obtained using the input/output function, type Y.

For details, see Appendix 1.

[LOAD] :

[STORE] :

[SELECT] :

[CONTINUE] :

[END] :

A program is loaded from PMC memory and the selected program

is overwritten.

The selected program is stored to the PMC. The selected program

replaces the program already on the PMC.

The selected program is modified.

The selected program appears on the ladder monitor screen, but

the program already on the PMC is not replaced. Note that ladder

monitor display is not performed correctly.

The on-line function terminates.

N:E-3160 Selected program is not same.

1 Load 1 Load from PM C program memory.

IStore) Store to PMC program memory.

Select program.

IDisregard] Disregard difference.

1 Quit 1 Quit On-Line function.

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (e)

(Note) If the selected program does not match the program on the PMC the dialog box shown

above appears. This occurs, for example, when a single program is modified by means

of off-line editing or by using an internal edit functron.

When the on-line monitor function is started for a program that is loaded or stored, the

dialog box does not appear. Instead. the subprogram selection screen appears

immediately.

- 189-



4. OPERATION

4.6.1.3 Menus

The following figure shows the menu configuration of the on-line function. For details of each

function, see the corresponding sections.

On-line function - - 1

- _;

I. File

-E

File save

Off-Line Function

Exit

!. Diagnose Ladder Monitor (on-line Editor)

PMC Status

Signal Status

PMC Parameter-I-

Timer

I:ounter

Keep relay

Data table control

Data table

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

Load from PMC

Store to PMC

- F-ROM write

4. Communication - Communication

Fig. 4.6.1.3 Menu Configuration



4. OPERATION

4.6.2 Preparation

Before attempting to use the on-line function, make the following preparations:

0 Connect the PMC to the personal computer via an RS232C cable. (4.6.2.1)

($1 Check and set the parameters for the PMC. (4.6.2.2 to 4.624)

4.6.2.1 Connecting the cable

Connect one end of the RS-232C cable to the COMl or COM2 port of the personal computer.

Specify the selected port in the “PARAMETER” dialog box, called from the “SET

COMMUNICATION” dialog box of the on-line function.

Connect the other end of the cable to the RS232-1 or RS232-2 port on the main board of the

CNC. Specify the selected port in the CHANNEL parameter of the PARAMETERS FOR

ONLINE MONITOR screen of the PMC. When the cable is connected to RS232-1, specify 1

for CHANNEL. When the cable is connected to RS232-2, specify 2 for CHANNEL. .

- 192-



4. OPERATION

4.6.2.2 Parameter screen for on-line monitor

The parameters for the orvline monitor are set using the PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE

MONITOR screen. Pressing the [MONIT) then [ONLINE] soft keys on the PMC menu screencauses the on-line monitor parameter screen to appear.

PARAMETER FOR ONLINE MONITOR MONIT RUN

CPU ID,. .,.

=

RS-232C = ‘&Q/NOT USE

CHANNEL = 1

BAUD RATE = 300/600/1200/2400/4800~ih%tti/19200

PARITY = *ONE/ODD/EVEN

STOP BIT = 1 BIT/%.'&S

TIMER 1 = 0

TIMER 2 = 5000

TIMER 3 = 15000

MAX PACKET SIZE = 1024

RS-232C=INACTIVE : 0

EMG ST INIT

Fig. 4.6.2.2 (a)

[Note] 1. When using the g-inch CRT screen, the PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR

screen is displayed using two pages. To switch from the current page to another

page, use the <Page Up> or <Page Down > key.

[Note] 2. The CRT’MDI is necessary when the parameter is set on the “PARAMETERS FOR

ONLINE MONITOR” screen.

- 193-



4. OPERATION

4.6.2.3 Modifying parameters

Some of the parameters can be modified by the cursor on screen moved by the cursor keys, and

some of them can modified by entering number or characters with the cursor on them.

[INIT]

Soft key [INIT] initializes all these parameters to the default value. In most case, you don’t

have to modify any initial parameters, however, you should confirm the ‘CHANNEL” and

“BAUD RATE” parameters at least.

[Note] 1. The parameters “CHANNEL”, “BAUD RATE”, “PARITY” and “STOP BIT” must

correspond with the parameters used by On-Line Function of FAPT LADDER, which

can be set at “Parameter” dialog box of “Communication” dialog hoc. And these

parameters are independent of the parameters used in [L’OJ screen which can be

changed on [SPEED] screen.

2. A modified parameter becomes valid when the on-line monitor driver next starts

operating. After modifying a parameter, specify NOT USE for the RS-232C

parameter to stop the on-line monitor driver. Then, restore the setting to USE. This

operation validates the modified parameter.

4.6.2.4 Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function

When using the on-line function to connect a personal computer to the PMC, first start the on-line

monitor driver that provides the communication function of the PMC. The setting of the RS232C

parameter on the parameter screen of the on-line monitor controls the operation of the on-line

monitor driver. Setting USE for the parameter starts the on-line monitor driver. The driver

occupies the line specified in the CHANNEL parameter and enters the wait state. In this state, the

PMC and personal computer can be connected.

When the on-line monitor driver starts, the status indication at the bottom of the screen changes

from INACTIVE TO STAND-BY.

RS232C = INACTIVE : 0

1

RS-232C = STAND-BY : 21

Conversely, setting the RS232C parameter to NOT USE stops the on-line monitor driver. In this

state, the PMC cannot be connected to the personal computer. Another input/output function can

use the RS232C line connected to that channel only after termination of the on-line monitor driver.

Once the on-line monitor driver stops, the status indication changes to INACTIVE. If the parameter

is set to NOT USE while the PMC is connected to the personal computer, the on-line monitor

driver stops as soon as the personal computer is disconnected. While disconnection is pending,

STOPPING is displayed as the status.

The following statuses can be displayed:

- 194-



4. OPERATION

Status indication

INACTIVE

STOPPIMG

STARTING

STAND-BY

CONNECTED

NO OPTION

TIMEOUT ERROR

DISCONNECTED

NO CONNECTION

Status of the on-line monitor driver

The on-line monitor driver is not operating.

The on-line monitor driver is waiting for the personal

computer to be disconnected.

Start processing for the on-line monitor driver is in progress.

The on-line monitor driver is operating.

The on-line monitor driver is connected to the personal

computer.

The reader/punch interface function is not supported.

The connection was lost because of a time-out error.

The connection terminated normally. (Same status as

STAND-BY)

The cable is not connected.

[EMG ST]

Pressing the ]EMG ST] soft key immediately stops the on-line monitor driver irrespective of

whether the connection is currently established. Use this key if the connection cannot be

terminated normally because of abnormal communication condrtions.

[Note] 1. If USE is specified as the control parameter of the on-line monitor driver, the on-line

monitor driver starts automatically when the CNC is subsequently turned on. The

on-line monitor driver occupies the line while it is operating. In this state, otherinputioutput functions cannot use the line.

2. While the on-line monitor driver is operating, the following functions cannot be used:

[PMCLAD], [I’O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM].

4.6.2.5 Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function (Only for Power

Mate-H)

When using the on-line monitor function to connect a personal computer to the PMC, first start the

driver that provides the communication function of the PMC. When starting or stopping the driver,

It is necessary to set either of the following parameters.

l Parameter screen for on-line monitor (“PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR”)

Parameter “RS-232-C” = “USE” : On-line monitor driver is used.

“NOT USE” : On-line monitor driver is not used.

[Note] The CRT/MD1 is necessary when the parameter is set on the “PARAMETERS FOR

ONLINE MONITOR” screen.

l Bit 6 of parameter No. 0101 in the Power Mate-H



4. OPERATION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #f #6

#6 = 0 : On-line monitor driver is not used.

1 : On-line monitor driver is used.

When either of the following conditions consists, the driver is started.

0 Parameter “RS-232-C” is “USE”.

l Bit 6 of parameter No. 0101 in the Power Mate-H is “1”

[Note] 1. The on-line monitor driver occupies the line while it is operating.

In this state, other input/output functions cannot use the line.

If other input/output functions use the line, it is necessary to display the above-

mentioned parameter and stop the on-line monitor driver.

2. While the on-line monitor driver is operating, the following functions cannot be used.

l [PMCLADJ, [l/O), [EDIT], and [SYSPRM] functions on CRT/MDI.

l [EDIT], [SYSTEM PARAM], and (I/O] functions on DPLIMDI.

4.6.3 File

4.6.3.1 File save

A program modified

“File save” function.

(1) Menu position

with online editor or transferred from PMC will be lost unless executing this

To activate ‘Save program” dialog box, pull down [ 1, File] menu, and select [File save] on the

menu.

Il. File 1

Fiie ,s&. .

Off-Line Function

Exit

Fig. 4.6.3.1 (a)

- 196-



4. OPERATION

(2) diaglog box view

Program name

C: Y DATA% SAMPLE

I

c Source program name to be

saved, is displayed.

Save program Close diaglog box

Fig. 4.6.3.1 (b)

(3) Operation

(a) Pressing the [OK] button

@ When specifying a new program name

The program is saved and the dialog box closes.

@I When specifying an existing program name

A dialog box, shown below, prompting the operator to specify whether the program is to

be overwritten appears, as follows:[OK] : The program is overwritten.

[CANCEL] : The program is not overwritten. The dialog box appears again.

Overwrite this program ?

Fig. 4.6.3.1 (c)

- 197-



4. OPERATION

0 When the contents of an edited program have not been

[UPDATE] on the on-line edit function (See Section 4.6.4.1,

The “File save” operation becomes invalid. A dialog box

Press the < Enter > or -z Esc > key to close the dialog box.

preserved by selecting F7

“Ladder monitor.“)

appears, as shown below.

I ‘-.E 3158 Ladder diagram has been modified. I

Fig. 4.6.3.1 (d)

(b) Pressing the [CANCEL] buttonThe specified file is not saved, and the dialog box closes.

4.6.3.2 Selecting Off-Line Function from On-Line Function

The Off-Line function can be selected from the On-Line function. For details, see “4.5 Off-Line

Function”.

(1) Menu positlon

To use “Off-Line Function”, pull down

menu.

[I. File] menu, and select [Off-Line Function] on the

4.6.3.3 Exit

(1) Menu position

This function is used to finish On-Line Function.

Pull down [ 1. File] menu, and select [Exit] on the menu.

1. File

File save

Off-Line Function

Exit

Fig. 4.6.3.3 (a)

- 198-



4. OPERATION

(2) Dialog box view

(3) Operation

(a) Push [OK] button.

Are you sure you want to exit ?

Fig. 4.6.3.3 (b)

Online function ends lnitfal Menu appears.For details, see Section (4.6.4.1 “Ladder Monitor”)

When modifications made with online editor have not yet saved by executing “File

save” operation, the following dialog box appears.

fl Source program name to be

saved, is displayed.’ I

?

pq

Save changes

Fig. 4.6.3.3 (c)

[Yes] : “File save” is executed and On-Line Function ends.

[No] : The modifications by on-line editor is canceled and

ends.

[Cancel] :Cancel to [Exit]

On-Line Function

- 199-



4. OPERATION

1. File

[Level

DO

Signal Status NET 00001-00006PMC Parameter +

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

IL

DOROOOO.O

-IL

SUB 1END1

SUB 2

END2

'SUB 64

END

F7 FB F9 FlO

SpLisl Search Symbol Setinc

<Shift > +

s + F8

S-Se1

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (a)

- 202 -



4. OPERATION

(b) Ladder monitor function

The table below lists the operations performed by the ladder monitor function.

Moving the cursor to the

selecting a subprogram

Symbol Displaying the symbol or

comment defined at a

specified address

F9 : [Symbol] (e)

SettingSwitching between ladder FlO : [Setting]

(f)monitor and on-line editing,

switching between symbol

display and comment display

(c) Selecting a subprogram (F7 [SpList])

A ladder program is monitored and edited in units of subprograms. This function is used to

list existing subprograms and to select the subprogram to be displayed.

- 203 -



4. OPERATION

@I Subprogram list display screen

Pressing F7 (SpList] causes a window to be displayed, as shown below. Select the

program to be displayed by pressing a cursor key or the <Page > key then the

c Enter > key.

[Note] The on-line monitoring function of a step sequence program is not supported.

The subprogram of a step sequence program is not selected.

Sub*program ,list-

rJimLZ

LEVEL2

PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR )MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Rl

PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Ll

SPOOOlO (GRIP WORK PIECE ) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND

PO0011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) PUT DOWN A WORK

PO0021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2

PO0022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (b)

@ Display information

The following information appears on the subprogram screen

LEVEL1

LEVEL2

Ladder - PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Rl

(No mark) PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Ll

Step

Sequence

_IpPOOOIO1 (GRIP "OR; PIECE) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND

(S mark) I ISymbol Coil comment

Sub-program No.

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (c)

(d) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])/Entering the search data (<Shift > + <F8>)

ii> Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])

A search for a net starts when the < FB> key is pressed after

been entered.

the search data has

If the < F8> key is pressed without specifying any search data, a search is made for

the data set specified in (.a below, “Entering search data” (see (b)).A search can be made for several types of data, as described below:

- 204 -



4. OPERATION

@Address/symbol

Searching for an address: “address” + < F8> Example) “X0000.0” + < F8 >

Searching for a symbol: “symbol” + <F8> Example) “SYMBOLI” + < F8 >

lunctional instruction number/name

Searching for a number: “S” + “functional-instruction-number” + < F8 >

Example) “Sl ” + < F8 >

Searching for a name: “functionalinstruction-name” + < F8 >

Example) “ENDI” + < F8 >

l et number: “net-number” + < F8 > Example) ” IO” + < F8 >

0 Entering search data (< Shift > + < F8 >)

Data for which a search is to be made by means of operation 0, described above, can

be registered. To repeatedly search for identical data, use this function. While this

function is active, the following dialog box appears.

To position the cursor to another item, press the c Tab > key.

press the < 7 > or < 1 > key.

To change the setting,

;earch Data :

xoooo.o]

. Data Kind

. ADDR/SYMBOL

J

@ WRT-COIL

@ FUNCTION

0 NET-NO

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (d)

.SEARCH DATA Enter the search data: address, symbol, net number, functional

.DATA TYPE

instruction name, functional instruction

number (number only, without S)

Select the type of the search data.

- 205 -



4. OPERATION

(e) Displaying a symbol (F9 [SYMBOL])

This function displays the symbol or comment defined at a specified address. When

eF9> is pressed, the following dialog box appears.

Address [

Symbol [

I Relay Comment [ 1

1

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (e)

ADDRESS : Enter the address of the symbol or comment to

displayed.

SYMBOL : The symbol at the specified address is appears.

RELAY COMMENT : The relay comment at the specified address appears.

. COIL COMMENT : The coil comment at the specified address appears. .

be

(f) Setting a function (FlO [SET])

This function includes the following:

. LADDER MODE: Switching between ladder monitor and on-line

editing

For details of the on-line edit function, see (2) “On-

line editing” in this section.. SYMBOL & COMMENT DISPLAY:Selecting the address display mode in ladder

monitoring or on-line editing

FUNCTION PARAMETER:

Three types of data can be displayed: address,

symbol, and relay comment.

Selecting whether the parameters of

functional instructions are to be

displayed

When the < FlO > key is pressed, the dialog box shown below appears:

To move the cursor to another item, press the <Tab> key. To change the setting, press

the < t > or < 1 > key.

- 206 -



(2) On-line editing

4. OPERATION

Dpisplay satking

- Ladder Mode

@Ladder Monitor OOnline Editor

-Symbol 6 Comment Display 7

l Symbol

(1 Address

0 Relay Comment

(3 Symbol & Address

0 Relay Comment & Address

(7 Relay Comment & Symbol

Fig. .6.4.1 f)

To select the "Online ditor" creen, select [Ladder monitor] from the 12. Diagnose] puff-

down menu. then press F10 : [Setting). The ‘Display setting” dialog box appears. In the

dialog box, select [OnlIne Editor].

-Ladder Mode

(1 Ladder Monitor @Online Editor

-Symbol & Comment Display -

l Symbol

0 Address

(3 Relay Comment

0 Symbol 6 Address(3 Relay Comment 6 Address

0 Relay Comment 6 Symbol

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (g)

- 207 -



4. OPERATION

(b) On-line editing

On-line editing operations (1)

modification

c Delete 7, again

number + cF6>

_ine deletion ” -” deletion

\let, line, element

nsertion

<Ctrl> + <Fi 7

- 209 -



4. OPERATION

On-line editing operations (2)

ursor movemen e cursor up or

the cursor to the left <4->, <+>

Symbol

Setting

Displaying the symbol or F9 : (Symbol] See (l),comment defined at a “Ladder

specified address monitor.”

Switching between ladder FlO : [Setting] See (I),

monitor and on-line editing, “Ladderswitching between symbol monitor.”

drsplay and comment display,

etc.

3thers Updating the ladder program F7 : [UPDATE] (i) 0

Restortng the ladder program < Shrft > + < F7 > (i) @I

to the state existing prior to

editing

(c) Changrng the input mode

To change the input mode on the edit screen, use the following keys.

The current Input mode is displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen. When

nothing is displayed, it indicates that overwrite mode is selected (default).

0 Insert mode

Key : -c Insert Z

Function : When a contact or coil is entered in this mode, the contact or coil is

inserted at the cursor posrtion.

Cancel : Press the <Insert > key in insert mode.

~‘8 Delete mode

Key : < Delete >

-210-



4. OPERATION

Select Contact/Coil

Key : <TAB>, <Shift> + <TAB>

Function : Select Contact/Coil at the input line.

<TAB > changes Contact/Coil in the input line to the forward

direction. < Shift > + -Z TAB > changes reverse.

The contacts and coils are displayed in the order indicated below:

Change address only

Key : ‘address’ + < Enter >

Function : Change address on ladder diagram without changing input line.

The contact or coil at the cursor position is modified.

[Input Key]@ Input ContactCoil

KeyFunction

(e) Connect/delete line

0 Input ‘-’

Key

Function

(2) Entering “I”

Key

Function

c Enter >

Write ContactCoil which is set at input line to ladder diagram.

<F4>

Input horizontal line. If In the delete mode, delete Contact/Coil or

horizontal line.

<F5>

A vertical ltne IS entered to the right of the cursor position. In

delete mode, a vertical line is deleted.

(f) Inserting a net, line, or element

(1) Inserting a net

Key : <Ctrl> + Fl [Netlns]

Function : inserts a single blank net after the net at the cursor position.

-212-



4. OPERATION

0 Inserting a lrne

Key : < Ctrl > + F2 (Lilns]

Function : Inserts a single blank line under the line to which the cursor is

positioned.

0 Inserting an element

Key : < Ctrl> + F3 [Elmlns]

Function : Inserts a single blank element at the cursor position.

(g) Cut and paste function

CO Specifyrng a range

Key : < Ctrl> + F4 [Select]

Function : Specifies the range to be cut or copied. The range is specified by

means of the following procedure:

i) Position the cursor to the first net in the desired range.

ii) Press the <Ctrl> and < F4 > keys. (SEL is displayed .at the

bottom right corner of the screen.)

iii) Position the cursor to the last net in the desired range.

Cutting and copying of a specified net range is explained in @I

or @I below.

Cancel : Press the < Ctrl > and < F4 > keys in range mode.

0 Cutting a net

Key : <Ctrl> + F5 [Cut]Function : Cuts a net. When a net range is specified, the specified net range

is cut. The cut portion is saved in the buffer for subsequent

pasting.

0 Copying a net

Key : <Ctrl> + F6 [Copy]

Function : Copies a net into the buffer for subsequent pasting. When a net

range is specified, the specified range is copied.

GO Pasting a net

Key : cCtrl> + F7 [Paste]

Function : Writes a net that was previously cut or copied and saved into the

buffer.

-213-



4. OPERATION

(h) Cursor

0 Move cursor Up/Down

Key : <T>,<l>

Function : Up/Down cursor, When press < 1 > at the top of the screen orpress < 4 > at the bottom of the screen, the screen scrolls.

r3 Move cursor to Left/Right

Key : <c> , <+>

Function : Move cursor to the left/light. When pressing < +> at the left end

of the screen, the cursor moves to one line above and right end.

When pressing < -+> at the right end of the screen, the cursor

moves one line below and left end.

At the top.bottom of the screen, the screen scrolls.

@ Move to thww top of ladder

Key : -zHome >

Function : Move cursor to the top of ladder

0 Move cursor to the bottom of ladder

Key : <End>

Function : Move cursor to the bottom of ladder.

0 Previous page

Key : < Page Up >

Functron : Go to the previous page.

@iI Next page

Key : -cPage down >

Function : Go to the next page

(i) Others

6) Update

Key : <F7>

Function : Update the modrfication to the ladder diagram on PMC.

Note) When the [UPDATE] function is used, the ladder program on the PMC is modified.

Before executing lhrs function, check whether modification of the ladder program is

permitted.

-214-



4. OPERATION

@I Undo

Key : < Shift > + < F7 >

Function : Restore ladder diaggram just before the last update < F7 >

Note) Applying the [Undo] function causes the effects of editrng since the last update to be lost.

4.6.4.2 PMC Status window

“PMC Status” window displays the status of program on PMC.

(1) Menu position

To activate “PMC Status” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC Status] on

the menu

(2) Window view

2. Diagnose

d Ladder Monitor

PMC Statue- ‘.

Signal Status

PMC Parameters +

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

!iEkq***/**Series/Edition of PMC*a**/** -Series/Edition of ladder Editing Card

PMC TYPE

PMC-•*'* -Connected PMC type

SCAN1

CUR Oms 7 Current scan time

MAX Oms -Maximum scan time

NIN Oms-Minimum scan time

Date/Time

oo/oo/oo -Month/Date/Year

oo:oo:oo 7Hour:Minute:Second

Fig. 4.6.4.2 (a)

-215-



4. OPERATION

4.6.4.3 Signal Status window

“Signal Status” window displays the status 01 stgnals on PMC in real time. You can examine the

signal status of any PMC address, and you can also change the signal status on this window.

(1) Menu position

To activate “Signal Status” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [signal Status]

on the menu.

\/ Ladder Monitor

PMC Status

Signal Statue

PMC Parameters --f

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

(2) Window view

When [SIGNAL STATUS] is selected, the window shown below appears.

(a) Window view without symbols :

Signal Status ,. .,;, ;, ‘...’ ,., .;,, ,,.. ..,,, ,,,

ROOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 : 01

ROOOOl 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 80

R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00003 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 :lC

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :oo

R00006 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 : AA

R00007 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 : 55

R00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig. 4.6.4.3 (a)

-216-



4. OPERATION

(b) Window view with symbols :

Cursor

,-&WORK1 t -OFF- -ON-

Byte symbol

ROOOOl f' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TOOL1

R00003 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 f.

PMC Address Hexadecimal expression

Fig. 4.6.4.3 (b)

(c) Function keys:

F4

Symbol

F8

Search

FlO

Wrt On

or or

Fig. 4.6.4.3 (c)

(3) Operations

Basic operation Function

Cursor keys Move cursor.

c Page up >: < Page down > Move address area on window.

<TAB >!< Shaft > + <TAB > Skip to next/previous kind of address.

c Enter > Alternate signal status. <Enter > key turns the signal status ON

whrch was OFF, and turns OFF which was ON. c Enter > key is

effective only when the write-protection is unlocked.

[Symbol]:[Adress) < F4 > Display/Hide symbols.

‘address’ + [Search] < F8 > Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).

[Wrt On];[WrtOff] cFlO> Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is

effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlock.

-217-



4. OPERATION

(Warning)

(Note)

(4) Message

Signal status changes and PMC parameter changes should always be made with

extreme care. Signal status changes and PMC parameter changes can have

serious and unforeseen results on a control system, and on the process to which it

applies, if they are improperly used. It is recommended that these functions not beused with people near the equipment.

Attempts to change some signal statuses may fail. At an address to which

sequence programs, the CNC, MMC, l/O Link and other external l/O devices write

repeatedly, the signal status cannot be changed. (The CNC repeatedly writes to F

addresses, the MMC to M addresses, and external 110 devices to X addresses.)

Message Meaning and countermeasure

Sure to modify ? You tried to change signal status although write-protected. If the

attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to

cancel change.

4.6.4.4 PMC Parameter

“PMC Parameter” sub-menu consists of the menu items for the windows below.

0 Timer window

@ Counter window

0 Keep relay window

6I Data table control window

6) Data table window

To display the “Parameter” submenu, display the [2. Diagrose] pull-down menu, then select [PMC

Parameter] from the menu.

The submenu can be displayed by pressing the < + > or < +> key with the cursor positioned to

[PMC Parameter].

!. Diagnose

J Ladder Monitor

PMC StatusSignal Status

PMC Parati&ei e

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

Tf@rl ., ” .“.‘...‘. ICounter

Keep relay

Data table control

Data table

-218-



4. OPERATION

(Warning) When changing a signal status or PMC parameter, extreme care is necessary. If

the function for modifying the signal status or PMC parameter is applied incorrectly,

the machine may act unpredictably. Avoid using the function if personnel are

present near the machine.

(Note) If you can not write PMC parameter, it might be protected.

For the detail, please refer PMC programing manual.

(1) Timer window

“Timer” window displays the contents of PMC Timer address. You can examine the contents

ofPMC “Timer” address, and you can also change the values for TMR instruction.

(a) Menu posrtion

To active “Timer” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC Parameter] on

the menu. Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Timer] which activates “Timer”

window.

12. Diagnose 1

d Ladder Monitor

PMC Status

Sicinal Status

PM; Eiara,,tert' ‘i*Timet: “. ,.

PMC alarm status Counter IRUN/STOP the ladder Keep relay

System Information Data table control

J Data table

(b) Window view

0 Window view without symbols:

Ti

1. TOO000 6000’00

2. TO0002

3. TO0004

4. TO0006

5. TO0008

6. TOO010

7. TO0012

8. TO0014

9. TO0016

10. TO0018

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1000

0

er : . . ,. ,.:..,:

11. TO0020 0

~12. TO0022 0

13. TO0024 0

14. TO0026 0

15. TO0028 0

16. TO0030 0

17. TO0032 0

18. TO0034 0

19. TO0036 0

120. TO0038 0

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (a)

-219-



4. OPERATION

@ Window viewwith symbols:

*1. T%OOOO 600000

2. TO0002 0

3. TO0004 0

4. TO0006 0

5. TO0008 0

Byte symbol

PMC Address

ker. :

6. TOO010 0

7. TO0012 0

8. TO0014 0

ONE SECOND

9. TO0016 1000

10. TO0018 0

0 Function keys:

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (b)

F4

Symbol

or

F4

1---T-Adress

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (c)

F8

Search

(c) Operations

FlO

ii

Wrt On

or

II

FlO

WrtOff

The following table lists the operations supported by the [TIMER] window.



c Page up >, -zPage down > Move address area on window.

‘number’ + <Enter > Change timer value. Enter new timer value in milli-seconds.

You can enter new value only when the write-protection is

unlocked.

The valid timer values are :

O-3,145.680 ms for timer No. l-8

o-523.280 ms for timer No. 9-150

[SymbolJ/[Adress] < F4 > Display/Hide symbols.

- 220 -



4. OPERATION

Basrc operation I Function

‘address’ + [Search] < F8 >

I I

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).

You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter

address, T, C, K, and D. at the “Timer” window. When C, K or

D address is specified to search, “Timer” window is closed and

the special window for the address is opened with the address at

top of window.

I earch timer address by timer number.

I nlock write-protectionIRe-protect. When the protection is

effective the cursor IS yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

‘number’ + [Search] < F8 >

[Wrt On)/[WrtOff] < FlO >

(d) Message


Sure to modify ? You tried to change timer value although write-protected.

If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer

[No] to cancel change.

(2) Counter window

“Counter” window displays the contents of PMC Counter address. You can examine

contents of PMC Counter address, and you can also change the values for CTR instruction.

(a) Menu posrtion

the

To actrvate ‘Counter” window, pull down 12. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC Parameter]

on the menu. Then sub-menu appears whrch contains item [Counter] which activates

“Counter” window.

!. Diagnose I

r/ Ladder Monitor

PMC Status

Sianal Status

P&K ‘Parameteif 3

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

Timer

Cotinter

Keep relay

Data table control

Data table

-221-



4. OPERATION

(b) Window view

When [COUNTER] is selected, the following window uppears.

0 Window view without symbols :

+ati,., . .

No. Address Preset/Current

1. cooooo lOta/ 347

2. coooo4 256/ 129

3. COO008 O/ 04. coo012 o/ 05. COO016 O/ 06. c00020 O/ 07. COO024 O/ 0

8. COO028 36/ 0

9. COO032 O/ 0

10. COO036 o/ 0

141: ‘. ;.:’ ., ..,.,... .:; :.::.; .Y: ,.: . . ,.,. .:’ :. .


11. c00040 o/ 012. coo044 o/ 013. COO048 o/ 014. COO052 o/ 015. COO056 o/ 016. COO060 o/ 017. COO064 o/ 018. COO068 o/ 019. c00070 o/ 0

20. COO076 o/ 0

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (d)

@ Window view with symbols:

7 Cursor

WORK COUNTER

pzY_, cooooo lOOO/ 347

2. coooo4 256/

3. COO008I l

129

O/ 0

4. coo012 O/ 0

5. COO016J_

Symbol - Current counter value

Counter number and AddressPreset counter value

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (e)


6. c00020 O/ 0

7. TO0024 O/ 0

8. COO028 36/ 0

9. COO032 O/ 0

10. COO036 O/ 0

n ;eic :;: ,: : 2. :.:: :_.::,_; ,:.:,; :: ..,

@I Functton keys :

F4 F8

Symbol Search

FIO

Wrt On

or or

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (e)

-222-



4. OPERATION

(c) Operations

The table below lists the operations supported by the [COUNTER] window.

Basrc operatron Function


< Page up > I c Page down > Move address area on window.

‘number’ + c Enter > Change timer value. You can enter new value only when the

write-protection is unlocked.

The valid counter values are :

O-65,535 for binary counter

O-9,999 for BCD counter

(Symbol]/(Adress] < F4 >

‘address’ + (Search] < F8 >

Display/Hide symbols.


You cannot search any other address than PMC parameteraddress, T, C, K, and D, at the “Counter” window. When T, K

or D address is specified to search, “Counter” window is closed

and the special window for the address is opened with the ’

address at top of window.


[Wrt On][WrtOff] < FlO >

Search counter address by timer number.

Unlock write-protectionIRe-protect. When the protection is

effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

(d) Message

Meaning and countermeasure

You tried to change counter value although write-protected.


[No] to cancel change.

(3) Keep relay window

“Keep relay” window displays the status of PMC Keep relay address. You can examine the

signal status of PMC Keep relay address, and you can also change the status of Keep relays.

(4 Menu position

To activate “Keep relay” window, pull down (2. Diagnose] menu, and select (PMC

Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Keep relay] which

activates “Keep relay” window.

!. Diagnose

/ Ladder Monitor

PMC Status

Signal Status

PMC Paramtrtojt -+

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

Timer

Counter

Kaf3p relay

Data table control

Data table

- 223 -



4. OPERATION

(b) Window view

~Address 7 CursorII.+c

,.

_IL.,Keep.:

KOOOOO

KOOOOl

K00002

K00003

K00004

KOO005

K00006

K00007

K00008

K00009

‘0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Y.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

. .:

.,.@l&y :...::.:I.. ., :: .:I,., ..i.,.. :..,. .’ ,j,.

KOOOlO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

KOOOll 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00012 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00013 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00014 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00015 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00016 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00017 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00018 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00019 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Fig. 4.6.4.4 g)

@I Function Keys :

F8 FlO

Search Wrt On

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (h)

(c) Operations

Basic operatron Functron


< Page up > i < Page down > Move address area on window.

< Enter > Alternate slgnal status. <Enter> key turns the signal status ON

which was OFF, and turns OFF which was ON. <Enter> key iseffective only when the write-protection is unlocked.

‘address’ + [Search] < F8 > Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).


address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Keep relay” window. When T,

C or D address is specified to search, “Keep relay” window is

closed and the special window for the address is opened with the


[Wrt On]i[WrtOff] < FlO> Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is


- 224 -



4. OPERATION

(d) Message

Message

Sure to modify 7


You tried to change signal status although write-protected. If theattempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to

cancel change.

(e) Data for PMC control software

Some keep relay data are used by PMC control software.

In this manual, the addresses related to the operation of the On-line function are

described.

For the detail, please refer PMC programming manual.

(The addresses marked I*’ do not effect the operation of the On-line function but used by

PMC control software.)

#7

#4

#l

#O

#O

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #l #O

DTBLDSP * * MEMINP + l PRGRAM LADMASK

DTBLDSP 1 : Can not display data table control data in PMC parameter.

MEMINP 0 : Can not change signal status.

PRGRAM 0 : Can not activate On-line Editing and the functions in I/O menu.

LADMASK 1 : Can not display Ladder monitor.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #l #O* * * * * l * FROM-WRT

FROM-WRT 1 : Displaying F-ROM write dialog box when exiting On-line editing.

(4) Data table control window

“Data table control” window displays the informations of Data groups for PMC Data table

address. You can examine the Data group attributes. and you can also change the attributes

on this window.

(a) Menu positionTo activate “Data table control” window, pull down (2. Diagnose] menu, and select (PMC

Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appears which contains item (Data table

control] which activates “Data table control” window.

-225-



4. OPERATION

d Ladder Monitor

PMC Status

Signal Status

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

Timer

Counter

Keep relay

Dhta table control"~. ::'

Data table

(b) Window view

0 Window view with symbols :

Cursor

D&ta tabLe control.,‘.

:5 . ..: ‘.

JO. Start address+

Number

1. DATA-TABLE-TOP 8000

2. DO0050 10

3. TOOL-TABLE 20

4. DO0200 100

5. BCD-CONV-TABLE

Type

byte

word

word

byte

word

Format

Hex

Dee

Dee

Dee

BCD

IStart address:

I

Data size I

Protection .

on

off

off

off

0 f:

symbol of the group Data format Write-protection

Data group number Number of element

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (i)

(?,I Function keys:

F4

Symbol

F8

Search

FlO

Wrt On

or

FlO

WrtOff

-226-



4. OPERATION

(c) Operations

The table below lists the operations supported by the Data table control window. Table of

the data table control display (1).

Basic operation I__ Function

Cursor keys I Move cursor.

< Page up > i < Page down > I Move address area on window

‘D-address’ + c Enter > Change “Start address” with the cursor on the item. You can

enter new address only when the write-protection is unlocked.

You can omit the leading character ‘D’ of the address.

‘number’ + < Enter > Change “Number” with the cursor on the item. You can enter

new number only when the write-protection is unlocked.

< Enter > Change “Type”, “Format” and “Protection” with the cursor on

the item. When the cursor is on “Type” or “Format”, small

dialog box is displayed to choose the item. You can change

them only when the write-protection is unlocked.

Table of the data table control display (2).

Basic operatron

[New]<Fl>

[Delete] c F2 >

[G.Data] < F3>

[ Symbol]‘[ Adress] < F4 z=

‘address’ + [Search I< F8 >

‘number” + [Search] < F8 >

(Wrt On]/[WrtOtf] < F10 >

Function

Make new data group. [New] duplicates the data group on the

cursor. A hundred data groups can be created at most.

Delete data group on the cursor. You cannot delete all the data

groups because one data group must exist at least.

Switch to “Data table” window. The data group which the cursor

was on is displayed.

Display/Hide symbols.



address, T, C, K and D, at the “Data table control” window.

When T, C, K or D address is specified to search, “Data table

control” window is closed and the special window for the

address is opened with the address at top of window.

Search data group by data group number.

Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is


-227-



4. OPERATION

(d) Messages

Message

Sure to modify ?


You tried to change signal status although write-protected.


(No] to cancel change.

(5) Data table window

“Data table” window displays the contents of PMC Data table address according to Data

groups defined by Data table control data. You can examine the contents of Data table, and

you can also change the values of Data table on this window.

(a) Menu position

To activate “Data table” window, pull down (2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMCParameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Data table] which

activates “Data table” window.

2. Diagnose

d Ladder Monitor

PMC Status

Siqnal Status

PMC alarm status

RUN/STOP the ladder

System Information

Timer

Counter

Keep relay

Data table control

t)atii:tdbl(i

(b) Window view

When [Data table] is selected. the following window appears

@ Window view without symbols :

Data table..

Group 1 : DO0000 - 007999, 8000 bytes. hexadecimal, protected 1DO0000 F6DO0001 FF

DO0002 EC

DO0003 FF

DO0004 D8

DO0005 FF

DO0006 BO

DO0007 FF

DO0008 60

DO0009 FF

DO0010 coDO0011 FE

DO0012 80

DO0013 FD

DO0014 00

DO001 5 FB

DO0016 00

DO0017 F6

DO0018 00

DO0019 EC

Frg. 4.6.4.4k)

DO0020 00DO0021 D8

DO0022 00

DO0023 BO

DO0024 00

DO0025 00

DO0026 BO

DO0027 00

DO0028 00

DO0029 00

- 228 -



4. OPERATION

Data group information:

Group 1 : DOOOO- D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, rotected

I

t

t

t

Area of Data group Data formatT

Data group numberNumber of element Write-protection

and data size

@ Window view with symbols :

I Data group rnformation

-Data table. :’ .,”

~Groupl:DOOOOO - D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

DATA-TABLE-TOP

-DO0000 .:.. F6

ADO0001 FF

DO0002 EC

DO0003 FF

DO0004 D8

DO0005 FF DO0010 co

DO0006 BO DO0011 FE

DO0007 FF DO0012 80

DO0008 60 DO0013 FD

DO0009 FF DO0014 00

- Symbol

- Address

I Cursor

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (I)

@ Function keys:

F3 F4 F8

C.Data Symbol Search

FlO

Wrt On

or or

F4

T-1dress

Ftg. 4.6.4.4m)

- 229 -



4. OPERATION

(c) Operations

The following table lists the operations supported by the [DATA TABLE1 window.

Operations supported by [DATA TABLE] window



-z Page up > J< Page down > Move address area on window.

<TAB s/c Shift > + c TAB > Skip to next/previous data group.

‘number’ + < Enter > Change data value. You can enter new value only when the

write-protection is unlocked. The valid data values are :

For details of the values that can be input, see the table of input

data values below.

(CData] < F3 > Switch to “Data table control” window.The displayed data group is displayed at top of the window.

[Symbol)/[Adress) < F4 >

‘address’ + [Search] < F8 >

Dtsplay/Hide symbols.



address, T, C, K and D, at the “Data table” window. When T, C

or K address is specified to search, “Data table” window is

closed and the special window for the address is opened with the



[Wrt On]/(WrtOff] < FlO >

Search data group by data group number.

Unlock write-protectionGte-protect. When the protection iseflective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

Data table

I byte I word double-word (dword)

Decimal -128 -127 -32,768 -32,767 -2.147,483,648 - 2,147,483,647

BCD 0 - 99 0 - 9,999 0 - 99,999,999

00 - FF 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF

(d) Messages


Sure to modify ? You tned to change data table value although write-protected.


(No] to cancel change.

- 230 -



4. OPERATION

4.6.4.5 PMC alarm status

The “PMC ALARM MESSAGE” dialog box displays a PMC alarm message.

(1) Menu position

To activate “PMC alarm message” dialog box, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC

alarm status] on the menu.

(2) Window view

d Ladder Monitor

PMC Status

Signal Status

PMC Parameter -_)

System Information

When [PMC alarm status] is selected, the following dialog box appears.

ALARM NOTHING

Fig. 4.6.4.5 (a)

(3) Operation

Press c Enter >, < space > or < . > key to close “PMC alarm message” dialog box.

(4) Messages

The alarm messages same as PMC’s are displayed in this window.

See the manual of PMC for detail of the messages.

For details of messages, refer to the following manual:

“FANUC PMC MODEL PAliPAB/RAlIRA2’RA3/RBIRB2/RB3IRB4/RB5/RB6iRC/RC3/RC4~

NB/NB2 Ladder

Language Programming Manual” (B-61 863E)

-231 -



4. OPERATION

4.6.4.6 Executing or stopping a ladder program

The ladder execulron status can be changed from “RUNNING” to “STOP” or from “STOP” to

“RUNNING”.

(1) Displaying the dialog box

To display the IRUNSTOP the ladder] dialog box, display the 12. Diagnose] pull-down menu,

then select [RUNSTOP the ladder] from the menu.


2. Diagnose

4 Ladder Monitor

PMC Status

Signal Status

PMC Parameter -3

PMC alarm status: ?.g?JNpJ*iiop.. & ::‘&$&&$f

System Information

When [RUN/STOP the ladder] is selected, the dialog box shown below appears.

(a) Ladder running state

While a ladder program is being executed, the following dialog box appears.

Frg. 4.6.4.6 (a)

[YES] : Stop the ladder program.

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without stopping the ladder program.

- 232 -



4. OPERATION

4.6.5 Input/Output

The 13. I/O] menu provides the following options:

1. For the [LOAD FROM PMC] dialog box

2. For the [STORE IN PMC] dialog box

3. For the [WRITE F-ROM] dialog box

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

4.651

In case of operating NC, the screen display of NC (Position, etc.) might slow when

using input/output functions (Load from PMC, Store to PMC, etc.).

There is no problem in the operation of NC. It is recommended to using input/output

functions while NC is not operating.

When screen made by C language executor is displayed, the

decreases. It is recommended to use input/output functions

screens (Posrtion, etc.).

Loading from the PMC

communication speed

after moving to other

A program held on the PMC can be transferred to the personal computer.

“LOAD FROM PMC” IS used to transfer a ladder program from the PMC to the personal computer

when, for example. using the program with the on-line function.

(1) Menu positionTo dtsplay the “LOAD FROM PMC” dialog

select (Load from PMC] from the menu.

box, display the 13. l/O] pull-down menu, then

- 234 -



4. OPERATION


Selecting ILoad from PMCI causes the following dialog box to appear.

LOad from’ pMc “‘..’ .:,l:‘.:j....::.. . .: . ,\ .:,.. . ..: .&, .,.....(,,::...::

- Transfer data type

. LADDER 0 ALL

0% 100%I 1

j .‘. _r”^’ Programszeindicator

Abort loading

Execute loading Close dialog box

Fig. 4.6.5.1 (a)

(3) Operation

Select a desired button by pressing the <Tab > key, then press the < Enter > key.

Once the program has been loaded normally, the dialog box closes automatically.

4.6.5.2 Storing to the PMC

A program held by the personal computer is transferred to the PMC.

Use “Store to PMC” to transfer a ladder program from the personal computer to the PMC to

enable, for example, the use of the program with the on-line function.

Menu position

To display the “Store to PMC” dialog box, display the 13. l/O] pull-down menu, then select

[Store to PMC] from the menu.

-235-



4. OPERATION


Selecting (Store to PMCI causes the following dialog box to appear.

stag* tQ p#fc ‘. ;. .: : .,:.:: :..I :.j. ..

: ,. .,

-Transfer data type

0 LADDER 0 ALL

0% 100%

f--- Load program size indicator

I Aborl storingI

Execute storing Close dialog box

Fig. 4.6.5.2 (a)

(3) Operation

Select a desired button by pressing the <Tab > key, then press the c Enter > key.

Once the program has been stored normally, the dialog box closes automatically.

(Note) While “Online Edrtor” is in progress, a program cannot be stored to the PMC. To

enable storing to the PMC, move to “Ladder Monitor”.

If the CNC is turned off after an edited program is stored to the PMC but before the

program is written to F-ROM, the results of editing will be lost. When storing a

program to the CNC, therefore, write it to F-ROM (see Section 4.6.5.3).

4.653 Writing to F-ROM

The results of editrng by the on-ltne function are written to flash ROM (F-ROM) in the PMC.

(Note) The results of rnodificatron made using “Online Editor”, “Store to PMC”, etc. will be lost

tf the CNC is turned off before the results are written to F-ROM. To store the modified

results to the CNC. write them to F-ROM.

- 236 -



4. OPERATION

4.6.6 Communication

This function establishes or disconnects a communication link between a personal computer and

PMC. The on-line function can be used only while a communication link is established betweenthe personal computer and PMC. Before attempting to use the on-line function, therefore, establish

the communication link.

Selecting [ON-LINE FUNCTION] or [ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] from the initial menu

causes the communication link to be established automatically. (See Section 4.6.1.2, “Starting the

on-line function.“)

(1) Menu position

To display the “Communication” dialog box, display the 14. Communication] pull-down menu,

then select [Communication] from the menu.


(a)

(b)

Displaying the “Communication” dialog box

Selecting [Communication] causes the following dialog box to appear:

Communication

Fig. 4.6.6 (a)

communication

Displaying the “PARAMETER” dialog box

Selecting [Param] from the “Communication” dialog box causes another dialog box to

appear as shown below.

Press the <Tab7 key to select the desired parameter, then set that parameter by pressing

a cursor key.

-238-



4. OPERATION

- Parity

l one (3 Odd (.) Even

-Stop bit

01 bit l bit

m T-_rl’

tt

- Parity bit

c

TIStop bit

Close dialog boxClose dialog box canceling modifications

- Serial port(Choose channel)

- Baud rate

(Choose one of parameters)

Fig. 4.6.6 (b)

(Note 1) If the communication link cannot be established successfully, check the following

points:

0 Is the RS232C cable securely connected to both the personal compuler and

CNC?

e/i, RS-232C cable:

. Is the cable an On-Line cable? (See Appendix 8.)

Is the cable free of damage?

(3 Communication parameters (baud rate, parity, slop bit) of the on-line function:

Do FAPT LADDER and PMC have identical communication parameters?

If the communication link cannot be established even after these problems havebeen corrected, turn off then restart the personal computer.

(Note 2) Do not attempt to set communication parameters until after disconnecting the

communrcatron link.

Do not termrnate the on-line function untrl after drsconnecting the communication

link.

Do not drsconnect the RS232C cable until after disconnecting the communication

link.

-239-



4. OPERATION

4.6.7 Examples of operation

This section provides the followrng two examples of using the on-line function:

0 Monitoring a ladder program held by the PMC

@ Monitoring a ladder program held by a personal computer

4.6.7.1 Monitoring a ladder program held by the PMC

(1) Connecting the RS-232C cable

(a) Connect one end of the RS232C cable to the COMl or COM2 port of the personal

computer.

(b) Connect the other end of the RS-232C cable to the R232-1 or R232-2 port on the main

board of the CNC.

(2) Setting the parameters for the on-line monitor on the PMC

(a) Press the CNC’s [PMC], [MONIT], and [ONLINE] soft keys in that order. The

PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen appears.

(b) Set the communicatton parameters. (See Section 4.6.2. “Preparation.“)

(c) Specify USE for the RS232C parameter. Check that the RS232C status Indication

changes to STAND-BY.

(Note) If USE is specified for the parameter, STAND-BY status is automatically selected when

the CNC is nexl turned on. In this case, this operation is unnecessary.

(3) Starting the on-line function

(a) Start FAPT-LADDER II by executing the following command:

C: +r FLADDER >fladder(When FAPT-LADDER II is installed under C: y FLADDER)

- 240 -



4. OPERATION

(Note) If communication cannot be established, select the [Param] button in the

“Communication” dialog box. Check the setting in the “Parameter” dialog box which

subsequently appears.

w=mwter.. “,, ‘ . .

:.. : :.i ;.,: .::i..:.::.; :..I.. .\.. . . .I.: . . .,. . . . ,. : :: . . . .::> .,., :.:: . >:I::.:.::.::.: s:::..,, ,,,,

- Channel

0 COMl 0 cot42

- Stop bit

01 bit l bit

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (c)

(e) When communication starts normally, the “Communication” dialog box closes

automatically. The “Load from PMC” dialog box appears, and a program is loaded from the

PMC

(Note)

- Transfer data type

. LADDER 0 ALL

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (d)

II the most recently monitored program is used, the processing required to load the

program can be omitted. (If an identical machine is monitored continuously, the loading

time is reduced.)



4. OPERATION

Monitoring action of ladder diagram

The “Ladder Monitor” window is displayed as following.

(a) Displaying the “Ladder Monitor” window

1. File 2.Diagnose 3. I/O 4. CommunicationI 1

.:.. . ,......I,; .;:::,

.

[LEVEL i]

La&de* Moni&i :‘.’ y::,’ ‘..

“::“:.:;::I:i_:‘.:-.:-_::i.:il;:~,l:: . .: .

NET 00001-00006

DO00

I

ROOOO.lr\

DO00

I I

ROOOO.Or\v

. SUB 1

END1

F7 F8 F9 FlO

SpList Search Symbol Seting

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (f)

(b)

(c)

Monitoring contact and coil status

Contacts and coils are displayed to Indicate their status: ON (1) or OFF (0). They are

displayed with thick or thin line according to their status as follows.

ON (1) OFF (0)

-1 k Thick Thin

w Thin Thick

--( F Thick Thin

q )-- Thick Thin

- (S)- Thick Thin

__ CR)_ Thick Thin

Moving In the ladder

The area dlsplayed on the window can be moved by cursor-up/down key and <Page

up >‘< Page down > Function key < F8 > [Search] is useful to jump directly to your

destmation.

- 244 -



4. OPERATION

(4 Searching for a net

To move to a desired position, enter the number of the net to be displayed, its address, or

functional instruction number (Sxxx). Then, press function key F8 [SEARCH].

(e) Openrng the “Display setting” dialog box

Pressing function key FlO [SET] causes the “Display settrng” dialog box to appear.

biepfay setting

- Ladder Mode

(1) Ladder Monitor. Online Editor

-Symbol 6 Comment Display -

. Symbol

0 Address0 Relay Comment

c> Symbol b Address

@Relay Comment & Address

cj Relay Comment 6 Symbol

- Function Parameter

0 Display

(f) Displaying functional instruction parameters

Position the cursor to “Function Parameter” and check “Display”. Then, press the

<Enter> key to close the “Display setting” dialog box. The functional instruction

parameters appear as shown below:

1Fig. 4.6.7.1 (g)

-OFF-

+ IRST SUB 36 0002

ADDBTCTRL- 1

---i tACT TCNT-1

I0000000001

u_

121

NXT-TCNT

I 131

Conlents of address

TCNT-1

1

Contents of address

NXT-TCNT

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (h)

- 245 -



4. OPERATION

(b) Checkmg the alarm state

When the PMC enters the alarm state, the color of the PMC alarm icon changes from gray

to yellow. Should this occur, select 12. Diagnose] and open the “PMC alarm message”

dialog box. Then, check the details of the alarm state. (For details of icons, see (4),

“Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 4.6.1.2.)

v ., . .

& iMrnt mawage. . . .\. .::. : .._ ,

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (k)

(cl Checking whether a program is running

While a ladder program is running, the icon shown in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (I) is visible. When no

ladder program is running, the icon indicated in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (m) is visible. (For details of

icons, see (4), “Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 4.6.1.2.)

Program on PMCis running.

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (I)

To change the ladder program execution status, select 12. Diagnose] then use the

“RUNiSTOP the ladder” dialog box.

(d) Displaying the communication status

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (m)

While communication with the PMC is being performed, the icon shown in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (n)

is visible. When communication with the PMC has not been established, the icon indicated

in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (0) is visible. (For details of icons, see (4). “Displaying the PMC status

(icon)” in Section 4.6.1.2.)

iiiiz!lommunication

/is active.

Communication

is not active.

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (n) Fig. 4.6.7.1 (0)

When changing the status of the communication being performed with the PMC, use the 14.

Communrcation] dialog box.

- 247 -



4. OPERATION

(7)

(a)

(b) Searching Address

Enter “RO.0” and press function key < F8 > (Search], the address ROOOOO is displayed at top

of the window, and the cursor moves onto signal of ROOOOO.O.

Monitoring signals

Opening “Signal Status” window

Pull down the 12. Diagnose] menu, select [Signal Status] from the menu, the “Signal Status”window is displayed,

GO0000

GO0001

GO0002

GO0003

GO0004

GO0005

GO0006

GO0007

GO0008

600009

0,. 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

i

0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 : 00

0 : 00

0 : 00

0 : 00

0 :oo0 : 00

0 :oo0 : 00

0 : 00

0 : 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (p)

and the functions of function keys change as following.

F4

Symbol

or

F4

IIIAdress

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (q)

F8

Search

FlO

Wrt On

or

Signal Status

ROOOOO 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 42

ROOOOl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (r)

- 248 -



4. OPERATION

(cl Displaying symbol

Function key <F4 > [Symbol] displays symbols of addresses on the window, just above the

corresponding signal. Symbols defined for byte address are also displayed just above their

addresses on the window. When the symbols are displayed, the function key c F4 > changes

to [Adress] which hides the symbols.

byte symbol

_):.. ,,. .: y ,..I.,

I‘. signal SPatus

. . .I

CONST -ON- -OFF-

ROOOOO 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0' : 42

ROOOOl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

I 00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :oo I

(d) Unlocking write-protection

bit symbols

Fig. 4.6.7.1 s)

Press function key < FlO> [Wrt On] to unlock write protection of the contents of addresses

displayed on the window. The color of cursor changes to red from yellow. And the function

key < FlO > changes to [WrtOff].

(Warning) Signal status changes should always be made with extreme care. Signal status

changes can have serious and unforeseen results on a control system, and on the

process to which it applies, if they are improperly used. It is recommended that

these functions not be used with people near the equipment.

- 249 -



4. OPERATION

(e) Changing status

Move the cursor in the window by the cursor keys, <Page up> and <Page down> to the

signal you want to

<Enter> key turnswas ON.

change, then press <Enter> key to make the signal status change.

a signal status ON which was OFF, and turns a signal status OFF which

r

Signa Stat&s

CONST -ON- -OFF-

ROOOOO 0 L 0 0 0 0 L 0 : 42

ROOOOl 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 02

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (t)

(Note) Some signals may not change their status even if you change them, because the Ladder

(f)

(9)

diagram writes the signals frequently, or the signals are frequently updated by NC. MMC,

or the external I10 devices such as l/O-Link: NC writes signals on F-address, MMC on

M-address, and the external l/O devices on X-address.

Enabling write-protection again

Press function key <Flop [WrtOff) to re-protect the contents of addresses on the window

from unforeseen changes. The color of cursor returns to yellow from red. And the function

key cFlO> returns to [Wrt On).

Hrdrng “Signal Status” wrndow

Pull down the 12. Diagnose] menu,

Status” window drsappears.

(Note) Non-volatrle PMC address T, C, K and D which is called “PMC parameter” has special

window to display and modify them (see 4.4.5 for detail).

select [Ladder Monitor] from the menu, then the “Signal

-250-



4. OPERATION

(8)

(9)

Storing a program to flash memory

A program edited using the on-line function is written to flash memory of the PMC. If the CNC

is turned off before the program is written to flash memory, the results of editing will be lost.

(a) Displaying the “Write to Flash ROM” dialog box

Select 13. I/O] from the menu bar. Select [F-ROM write] from the menu. The “Write to

Flash ROM” dialog box appears as shown below. Select [OK] to store the edited program.

(The “Executing” message appears.

., :. wrjtc-ko raskl RCIH..’

Are you sure you want to write to

Flash ROM ?

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (u)

After the program has been stored, the dialog box closes automatically.

Storing a program to a file

A program edited using the on-line function can be named and stored to a file. The stored

program can be decompiled and edited using the off-line function.

(a) Storing a program to a file

Select 11. FILE] from the menu bar. Then, select [File save]. The “Save program” dialog

box appears as shown below. Select ]OK] to store the edited program.

save program

Program name

YFLADDERYSAMPLE

I

piq ’

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (v)

After the file has been stored. the “Save program” dialog box closes automatically

(Note) When a program held in the memory of the PMC is monitored or edited, the program is

named PMC-RAM by default. To store the program, rename the program in advance.

The data of PMC-RAM is automatically updated when another program is monrtored or

edited.

-251 -



4. OPERATION

(J) Ending the on-line function

(a) Ending the on-line function

Select [ l . FILE] from the menu bar. Then, select [Exit).A message dialog box appears as shown below. Select [OK] to end the on-line function.

II re you sure you want to exit ?I

4.6.7.2 Monitoring a ladder program held by a personal computer

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (W)

To transfer a program created using the off-line function to the PMC and subsequently execute it,

start the on-line function as described below:

(1) Selecting a program

Select [Program Selection] from the initial menu. Then, enter the name of the program to be

used.

RBd( STEP SEQ [ C: YDFI TRYSRl VLE

ROBB- YZO - J 503 Wers l on 01. 0

Press [ TABI key t o move the curs or and

pr ess [ ENTERI or [ SPFI CEI ey t o sel ect.

Of f - Li ne Functi on I

On-Li ne Funct i on

IOn-Li ne ( sel ected progr am

I ut I I Itu I

I Exi t I

Fig. 4.6.7.2 (a)

-252-



4. OPERATION

(2)

(3)

Starting the on-fine function

Select [ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] from the initial menu.

If compilation or decompilation is necessary, either of the following messages is displayed.

I ource program has been updated. Compile it ? (Y/N) I

Memory card format file has been updated. Decompile it?(Y/N)

In this case, enter Y to compile or decompile the program.

Storing the program to the PMC

When the on-fine monitor is started, the personal computer is automatically connected to the

PMC, and the selected program is compared with a program held on the PMC. If the two

programs match. the subprogram selection screen is displayed. If not, a dialog box is

displayed as shown below:

N:E-3160 Selected program is not same.

71 Load from PMC program memory.

[Stole/ Store to PMC program memory.

-1 Select program.

IDisregard] Disregard difference.

Quit On-Line function.

Fig. 4.6.7.2 (b)

In this case, select [STORE] to transfer the selected program to the PMC.

(Note) The dialog box shown above appears when the program selected on the personal

computer does not match that on the PMC. This is because either program is modified

either by off-fine editing or with the internal edit function, for example.

When the on-fine monitor is started with the program stored in the PMC selected, the

dialog box shown above does not appear. Instead, the subprogram selection screen

appears.

The ladder monitor and signal monitor can be operated as described in Section 4.6.7.2,

“Monitoring a ladder program on the PMC.”

- 253 -



5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST


This chapter describes the general messages output by FAPT LADDER-II. Messages are output

and categorized as indicated below:

function-name : E-xxxx : error-message

LL

L Error number (four digits)

Category (error, warning, etc.)

Name of the processing which caused the error

(1) Function name

The processing causing the error is represented by a single alphabetic character.

Function name Processing

(2) Message category

Output messages are classified into the following categories. The categories are represented

by single alphabetic characters.

A

6

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

N

Initial menu and option setting

Title editing

I/O module editing

System parameter editing

Ladder diagram/step diagram editing

Symbol and comment editing

Message editing

Printing

Compilation

Decompilation

Mnemonic conversion

Input/Output

On-line monitor

F: Fatal error. The error number is 2xxx.The system can be operated, but processing of the user program cannot be continued becauseof an error.

E: Error. The error number is Sxxx.Processing is continued, but the results will be lost. Alternatively, the processing is stopped.

W: Warning. The error number is 4xxx.

Processing is continued. The results will be retained, but cannot be guaranteed.

-254-




5.1 A : INITIAL MENU

(program name selection, option setting, Oh-Line execution)

5.1 .l Fatal error

Number Messsge

A:F-2000 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.

Contents

A:F-2001 1 NSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE. I

A:F-2004 THIS DATA CAN NOT BE HANDLEDAT THIS VERSION OF FAPT LAD-DER.

A: F-2005 SOURCEPROGRAMHASWRONG The source program contains an invalid file or does not con-FILE (S). tain necessary files.

Check the source program files.

A:F-2006 1NOT FOUND XXXX FILE. I

A:F-2007 NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE PRO-GRAM.

A:F-2008 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.

A:F-2009 1CANNOT CLOSE XXXX FILE. I

A:F-2010 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM BRO-KEN.

5.1.2 Error

Number

A:E-3120

A:E-3121

A:E-3122

A:E-3124

A:E-3125

A:E-3126

A:E-3128

A: E-31 30

A:E-3131

A:E-3132

A:E-3133

A:E-3134

A:E-3137

1

T

Message

ENTER PROGRAM NAME.

THE SOURCE PROGRAM DOESNOT EXIST.

PMC MODEL FILE IS NOT FOUND.

CANNOT CREATE NEW PRO-GRAM XXXX.

ILLEGAL PATH OF SOURCE PRO-GRAM NAME.

SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE DIF-FERENT.

XXXX FILE READ ERROR

XXXX FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANLKEY.

XXXX FILE OPEN ERROR.

XXXX FILE CLOSE ERROR

INSUFFICIENT DISK ERROR.

INVALID OPTION INITIALIZED.(XXXX FILE WAS UPDATED.)

CANNOT CREATE FILE XXXX.

I

Contents

The name of the source program has not been input. Inputthe source program name.

The specified source program is not compatible with the sys-tem. For details of which machine models are compatible,see Section 1.2.2.

Some system files (xxxx.TBL) cannot be found. Reinstallthe system.

The specified source program cannot be created becausea directory having the same name already exists. Inputanother source program name.

The specified path does not exist. Check the input sourceprogram name.

A FORMAT-A/B program was specified when copying asource program. FORMAT-A/B cannot be used with FAPTLADDER-II. Convert the program via a memory card or mne-

monic format file. For details, see Appendix 3.File xxxx cannot be read.

File xxxx cannot be read.

File xxxx cannot be opened.

File xxxx cannot be closed.

The file cannot be output because there is insufficient freespace on the disk. Terminate the system and delete anyunnecessary files in the disk to create more free space.

The option file (OPTION) has been initialized because Itsdata was destroyed.

File xxxx cannot be created.

-25!3-




Number Message Contents

A:E-3138 ILLEGAL SOURCE PROGRAMNAME.

I I

A:E-3139 lLL;ANLXMyX SOURCE PRO-

1 A:E-3140 1NOT FOUND FILE. I I

1 A:E-3143 1CANNOT OPEN FILE. 1File xxxx cannot be opened. I

1 A:E-3144 1CANNOT CLOSE FILE. I File xxxx cannot be closed.

A:E-3145 1FILE I/O ERROR. ( An error occurred during file access.

A:E-3146 t XXXX FILE I/O ERROR. I I

A:E-3147 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES.

A:E-3148 XXXX FILE WRITE ERROR. HITANY KEY.

Data cannot be written to file xxxx.

5.2 B : TITLE EDITING

5.2.1 Error

Number Message Contemts

B:E-3020 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program title file (TITLE) cannot be read.

B:E-3021 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Datacannot be writtento the source programtitlefile (TITLE)or control file (CONTROL).

BE-3022 FILE l/O ERROR. HIT ANY KEY An error occurred during file access.




5.3 C : l/O MODULE EDITING

5.3.1 Error

Message Contents

The source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) cannot beread.

Data cannot be written to the source program I/O module file(IOMODULE) or control file (CONTROL).

Input data is invalid. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the inputprocedure.

The specified group does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to con-firm the input value range.

The specified base does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to con-firm the input value range.

The specified slot does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] toconfirmthe input value range.

The specified module does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] toconfirm the module names that can be specified.

The specified module cannot be used at this address.Check whether the output module is specified at address Xand whether the input module is specified at address Y.

The specified group, base, and slot have already beenassigned modules.Specify different group, base, and slot numbers.

The specified channel does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] toconfirm which channels can be specified.

For I/O Unit-B (xxx:power-on/off information), a slot otherthan slot 0 cannot be specified. Specify slot 0.

FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY:E-3021

C: E-3022 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY

C: E-3023 INPUT DATA INVALID

C: E-3024 APPOINTED GROUP NOT EXIST

APPOINTED BASE NOT EXIST: E-3025

C: E-3026 APPOINTED SLOT NOT EXIST

C: E-3027 APPOINTED ID CODE NOT EXIST

C: E-3026 INPUT KEY NOT USED

C: E-3030 ADDRESS APPOINT ILLEGAL

C: E-3032 THE SAME GROUP,BASE ANDSLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.

INVALID CHANNEL NO. APPOINT: E-3033

C: E-3034 INVALID DATA, EXCEPT ‘O’, IS SPE-CIFIED AT THE SLOT OF XXX AS

l/O UNIT B.

5.3.2 Warning


THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND The specified group, base, and slot have already beenSLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. assigned modules. Check whether the same numbers can

be assigned for the group, base, and slot.

C:W4020

C:W4021 INVALID DATA, EXCEPT ‘O’, IS SPE- For the I/O Unit-B module, a base other than base 0 cannotCIFIED AT THE BASE OF I/O UNIT be specified. Specify base 0.B.

C:W4022 BOTH I/O UNIT-A AND UNIT-BARE SPECIFIED IN THE SAMEGROUP.

I/O Unit-A and I/O Unit-B cannot be assigned to the samegroup. Specify different groups.

-257-



-

sms

ss

:%oJpw

0WOV

uESuH

sV

a

3

‘ONV-w0

.e

(awAH

m

9aSa

1o




5.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING

5.51 Fatal error


E:F-2100 CANNOT READ * FILE.

E:F-2101 CANNOT WRITE * FILE.

E:F-2102 CANNOT SEEK * FILE.

5.5.2 Error (at editing ladder diagram)

Number Message

E:E-3100 INPUT INVALID

Contents

E:E-3101 1ADDRESS BIT NOTHING I

E:E3102 1RELAY OR COIL NOTHING I

E:E-3103 1HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL I

E:E-3104 1VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL I

E:E-3105 1 LLEGAL FUNCTION NO. I

E:E-3106 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL

E:E-3107 PARAMETER NOTHING

E:E-3108 LADDER ILLEGAL

E:E-3109 ERROR NET FOUND

E:E-3110 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT

E:E-3111 1PLEASE COMPLETE NET I

E:E3112 ILLEGAL NETS CLEAED

E:E-3113 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

E:E-3114 FUNCTION NOT FOUND

E:E-3115 1LADDER BROKEN I

E:E-3116 1ADDRESS BYTE NOTHING IE:E-3117 STACK REGISTER OVER(8BIT)

ERR

E:E-3118 PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO.I I

E:E-3119 1PLEASE KEY IN FUN NO.

E:E-3120 SYMBOUCOMMENT DATA TOOLARGE

E:E-3121 1SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST IE:E-3122 SOURCE PROGRAM OF DIFFER- A Format-B program was found to exist when renaming a

ENT FILE FORMAT Format-A program.

E:E-3123 ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME An invalid subprogram name was input.

E:E-3124 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB-PROGRAM

E:E-3125 SAME SUB-PROGRAM NAMEEXISTS

E:E-3126 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITIONWILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOUSELECT TO ZOOM I********‘.

E:E-3127 SOURCE PROGRAM OFANOTHER FORMAT EXISTS

A Format-B program, having the same name as that speci-fied for the Copy/Move to file function,was found to exist dur-ing Format-A program editing.




Number 1 Messacle I Contents

E:E-3128 ILLEGAL SYMBOL A value that cannot be used as a symbol was input duringsymbol editing.

E:E-3129 PROGRAM OPEN ERRORE:E-3130 PROGRAM NOT EXIST

E:E-3131 NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE

E:E-3132 PROGRAM NOT READI I

E:E-3133 1PROGRAM NOT WRITE

E:E-3134-7 DIRECTORY NOT EXIST

E:E-3135 1LADDER DATA NOT EXIST

E:E-3136 1PROGRAM IS OPENED I

E:E-3137 PROGRAM NAMES LIMIT OVER

E:E-3138 CAN NOT RENAME LATMP An attempt was made to perform renaming after editingLATMP with the File function.

E:E-3139 1 PROGRAM NOT EXIST

5.53 Error (at editing step sequence)

Number

E:E3200

E:E-3201

E: E-3202

E:E3203

E:E-3204

E:E-3205

E:E-3206

E:E-3207

E:E-3208

E:E-3209

E:E-3210

E:E-3211

E:E-3212

E:E-3213

E:E-3214

E:E-3215

Message

ILLEGAL SOURCE CODE.

BUFFER SIZE OVER.

NUMBER OF NEST BRANCH TOOBIG.

NUMBER OF BRANCH TOO BIG.

SIZE OF TABLE BUFFER TOO BIG.

UNCONNECTED STEPSEQUENCE DIAGRAM.

SELECTED BRANCH ERROR.

PARALLEL BRANCH ERROR.

SYNTAX ERROR.

STEP LINE SYNTAX ERROR.

TRANSITION LINE SYNTAXERROR.

CANNOT INSERT.

CANNOT MAKE DIAGRAM.

HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL.

JUMP FORWARD CHECK ERROR.

CHECK INCOMPLETE ERROR.

Contents

A read error occurred when reading the specified intermedi-ate code file.

An intermediate code exceeds the Edit buffer size.

The maximum allowable number of branch nests has beenexceeded.

The maximum allowable number of branches has beenexceeded.

The maximum allowable numberof element tables has beenexceeded.

The step, transition, branch, or line is not continuous.

The start sideof the select branch does not agree with its endside.

The start side of the parallel branch does not agree with itsend side.

The sequence In the select branch is other than “transitionto step to transition.” Or, the sequence in the parallel branchis other than “step to transition to step.”

The step line contains an element other than initial step,step, block step, jump (dummy step), and serial move (verti-cal line).

The transition line contains an element other than initial step,step, block step, and jump (dummy step).

Insertion is not possible at the specified location. Or, ifinserted, the maximum coordinate value is exceeded.

A soft key that cannot be changed was specified whenchanging an element.

A horizontal line was specified in place of the closing codeof the branch.

The label pointed to by JUMP does not exist.

The intermediate code cannot be created because it has notbeen completely checked.

-260-




Number Message

E:E-3216 CHART SEQUENCE ERROR.

Contents

The step line is not properly connected to the transition line.

1 E:E-3217 1CHART START CODE ERROR. 1The chart start code does not exist (step). I

E:E-3218

t---E:E-3219

CHART END CODE ERROR.

JUMP CLOSE ERROR.

The chart end code does not exist.

JUMP has not been closed correctly.

E:E-3220

E:E-3221

E: E-3222

E:E-3223

HORIZONTAL LINE DUPLICATE A branch contains two or more left end codes. (Invalid dataERROR. exists before and after the branch code.)

BRANCH UNCONNECTED ERROR. The branch connection is invalid.

BRANCH SEQUENCE ERROR. There is an invalid code before or after the branch start andend codes.

CANNOT COPY DIAGRAMS. The copy destination is invalid.

FEE3224 1CANNOT MOVE DIAGRAMS. 1The move destination is invalid. I

1 E:E-3225 1 LLEGAL SPECIFIED POSITION. 1The specified coordinate value does not exist. I1 E:E3226 / STRINGS NOT FOUND. I The specified character string does not exist. I

I E:E-3227 STEP NUMBER DUPLICATE The specified step number is already in use. Check whichERROR. step numbers are already in use. I

I E:E-3228 LABEL NUMBER DUPLICATE The specified label is already defined.ERROR. I

IE:E_3229ANNOT DELETE TEMPORARYFILE.

The temporary file cannot be deleted.

E:E-3230 ;;E;zWPROGRAM NAME

E:E-3231 INPUT INVALID.

E:E-3232 EXPECTED ADDRESS.

The same file already exists, but with a different extension.

Data outside the address range is set.

No subprogram number is specified.

I

:E-3233 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUE An attempt was made to perform ZOOM for more than eightPROGRAM. layers. I

E:E-3234

t---

E:E-3235

ILLEGAL FILE NAME.

SUB-PROGRAM ALREADY, ENTRIED.

The specified subprogram is a file that is currently beingedited.

1 E:E-3236 1CANNOT DELETE PROGRAM. 1The intermediate code file cannot be deleted. IE:E-3237 1CANNOT CHANGE DATA. Data cannot be converted because it is invalid.

- 261-




55.4 Warning (at editing ladder diagram)

WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOUSELECT TO SAVE.

E:W4109 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITIONWILL BE CANCELLEDJF YOUSELECT TO UPDATE/APPEND.

THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION.

E:W4110WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOUSELECT TO OVERWRITE.

E:W4111 MACHINE KIND AND INPUT PRO-GRAM NOT CONSISTENCY !

-262-




5.6 F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING

5. 6. 1 Error

Number 1 Message Contents

F:E-3100 INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.

F:E-3101 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOOLARGE

F:E-3102 SAME SYMBO LDATA EXIST

F:E-3103 NO DEFINITION ADDRESSAPPOINTED

F:E-3104 NOT FOUND DATA ERROR

F:E-3105 FILE READ ERROR HIT ANY KEY

F:E-3106 1FILE WRITE ERROR HIT ANY KEY 1

F:E-3107 1DATA SAVE ERROR I

F:E-3108 1SAME ADDRESS DATA EXISTS. 1

F:E-3109 t INPUT ADDRESS DATA. I

F:E-3110 1 LLEGAL SYMBOL. I

5.7 G : MESSAGE EDITING

5.7.1 Error

Number Message

G:E3100 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPE-CIFIED AT *.

Contents

G:E3101 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.

G:E-3102 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF *WERE DELETED.

-263-




5.8 H : PRINTOUT

58.1 Fatal error


H:F-2005 SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG

FILE(S). ($)

H:F-2066 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.I

5.8.2 Error

Number 1 Message

H:E-3100 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.I

H:E-3101 1CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.

H:E-3102 1CANNOT READ XXXX FILE.

H:E-3106 1CANNOT WRITE XXXX FILE.

H:E3107 1OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED.

H:E-3166 WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE.

H:E-3109 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE NEEDXXXX BYTE FREE

1

H:E-3110 INSUFFICIENT CURRENT & TMPDISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE

1 FREE

H:E-3111 STEP NUMBER (XXXX) OVER.

SYMBOL & COMMENT FILE READ

NET COMMENT FILE READ

I

H:E-3114 SYMBOL 8. COMMENT DATA BRO-KEN.

Contents

An attempt was made to reserve memory, but there wasinsuffff ient free space.

File xxxx cannot be opened.

File xxxx cannot be read.

File xxxx cannot be found.

File xxxx does not exist.

The format of file xxxx is invalid.

Data cannot be written to the file xxxx.

An error occurred upon opening the output file.

An error occurred upon writing to the output file.

There is insufficient free space on the disk. Reserve xxxxbytes of free space.

There is insufficient free space on the disk to pertom cross-reference. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space.

The maximum allowable number of steps for the ladder dia-gram has been exceeded. The maximum number of stepsthat can be printed is 32767.

An error occurred upon reading symbol data.

An error occurred upon reading a net comment.

The symbol data is invalid.

5.8.3 Warning

Number Message

H:W-tlOO CANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT.

H:WAlOl CANCEL FILE OUTPUT.

H:W-4102 SEL SWITCH OFF

Contents

The <BREAK> key was pressed before the completion ofprinting.

The <BREAK, key was pressed during file output.

The SEL indicator on the printer is not lit. Press the SEL but-ton such that the indicator lights.

-264-




5.9 I : COMPILE

5.9.1 Fatal error


I:F-2100 1NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE I

I:F-2101 1OUT OF MEMORY

5.9.2 Error


I:E-3100 XXXX READ ERROR The source program cannot be read. (This error normallydoes not occur during compilation.)

I:E-3101 XXXX WRITE ERROR The compilation results cannot be written.

I:E-3102 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME An invalid source program name is specified. (This errorILLEGAL. normally does not occur during compilation.)

I:E-3103 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NOT Source program xxxx does not exist. (This error normally

FOUND. does not occur during compilation.)

I:E-3105 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM FOR- The source program format is FORMAT-A. (This error nor-MAT IS DIFFERENT. mally does not occur during compilation.)

I:E-3107 SYSTEM PARAMETER READ The source file for the system parameter data does not exist.ERROR.

I:E-3108 TITLE READ ERROR. The source file for the title data does not exist.

I:E-3109 I/O MODULE READ ERROR. The source file for the I/O module data does not exist.

I:E-3110 VERIFICATION ERROR The input password differs from the registered password.

I:E-3111 THIS WORD CAN NOT BE USED Input the password correctly.AS PASSWORD. TRY ANOTHERWORD

I:E-3112 ONLY ALPHABETICAL AND The input password contains a non-alphanumeric charac-NUMERICAL CHARACTERS ARE ter.

ALLOWED

I:E-3200 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED An instruction that cannot be run by the specified programINSTRUCTION. exists.

I:E-3201 THERE IS NO COIL IN THE FUNC- A functional instruction is lacking a required coil.TIONAL INSTRUCTION WHICHNEEDS THE COIL.

I: E-3220 SPECIFIED VALUE FOR A PARAM- An out-of-range value is specified in a parameter of instruc-ETER OF THE XXXX INSTRUC- tion xxxx.TION IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE.

l:E-3221 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFER- The parameter of the subprogram start instruction (SP) con-ENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. tains a program number that does not correspond to the pro-

gram name.

I: E-3222 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER An out-of-range program number or an address other than

IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX a program number is specified in a parameter of instructionINSTRUCTION. xxxx.

I: E-3223 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS An out-of-range label number or an address other than aSPECIFED FOR THE XXXX label number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.INSTRUCTION.

I: E-3250 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladder program is empty. Specify the END1 or END2instruction.

l:E-3251 THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM The size of the ladder program exceeds the maximum sizeIS TOO LARGE. specified for the selected program type.

l:E-3252 LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN. An unrecognizable instruction exists.

l:E-3253 LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT Because the first level of the main program takes too long toTHE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE. execute, the ladder cannot be executed. Make the first level

smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time inthe system parameter.

-265-





I: E-3254 THE NUMBER OF DIVISION OF Because the number of second level divisions in the mainLADDER EXCEEDS 99. program exceeds the maximum of 99, the ladder cannot be

executed. Make the second level smaller, or increase the

ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter.

l:E-3270 SP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE SP is the start instruction for a subprogram. It cannot beUSED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. used in the main program.

I:E-3271 SPE INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE SPE is the end instruction for a subprogram. It cannot beUSED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. used in the main program.

l:E-3272 JMPC INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE The JMPC instruction performs a jump from a subprogramUSED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. to the second level of the main program. It cannot be used

in the main program.

l:E-3273 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subpro-USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND gram cannot be called from other than the second level ofLEVEL MAIN PROGRAM. the main program.

I:E-3274 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subpro-BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND gram cannot be called from other than the second level ofLEVEL MAIN PROGRAM. the main program.

l:E-3290 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTtON AT A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicateTHE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM. the start of the subprogram.

l:E-3291 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction ojndicateAT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB- the end of the subprogram.PROGRAM.

l:E-3292 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the SPE instructionBEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION. because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subpro-

gram.

l:E-3293 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogramIN THE SUBPROGRAM. because the SP instruction indicates the start of a subpro-

gram.

I:E-3310 THERE IS NO END1 INSTRUCTION. The END1 instruction s not found at the end of the first level.

I:E-3311 THERE IS NO END2 INSTRUCTlON. The END2 instruction is not found at the end of the secondlevel.

l:E-3312 THERE IS NO END3 INSTRUCTION. The END3 instruction s not found at the end ofthe third level.

I:E-3313 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the END1 instructionBEYOND END1 INSTRUCTION. because the END1 instruction indicates the end of the first

level.

I:E-3314 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the END2 instructionBEYOND END2 INSTRUCTION. because the END2 instruction indicates the end of the

second level.

I:E-3315 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the END3 instructionBEYOND END3 INSTRUCTION. because the END3 instruction indicates the end of the third

level.

I:E-3316 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the END instructionBEYOND END INSTRUCTION. because the END instruction indicates the end of the entire

ladder program.

I:E-3317 END1 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE END1 is specified for other than the first level.USED.

l:E-3318 END2 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE END2 is specified for other than the second level.USED.

I:E-3319 END3 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE END3 is specified for other than the third level.USED.

I:E-3320 END INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE The END instruction is specified for the first level.USED.

l:E-3330 THERE IS NO COME INSTRUCTION. The COME instruction is not specified when the COMinstruction, that indicates the start of the instruction controlrange, is specified.





l:E-3331 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subpro-USED IN THE RANGE CON- gram cannot be called from within the COM instruction con-TROLED COM INSTRUCTION. trol range.

l:E-3332 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subpro-BE USED IN THE RANGE CON- gram cannot be called from within the COM instruction con-TROLED COM INSTRUCTION. trol range.

l:E-3333 ANOTHER COM INSTRUCTION The COM instruction. that indicates the start of the instruc-CAN NOT BE USED IN THE tion control range, is specified twice within the range.RANGE CONTROLED COMINSTRUCTION.

l:E-3334 COME INSTRUCTION MUST BE The COME instruction, that indicates the end of the instruc-THE PAIR WITH COM. tion control range, is specified when the COM instruction,

used to indicate the start of the range, is not specified.

I:E-3335 COME INSTRUCTION IS The COME instruction is specified to indicate the end of theDETECTED THOUGH THE CASE instruction control range when the end of the range hasOF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFI- already been defined as a number of coils.CATION.

l:E-3340 THERE IS NO JMPE INSTRUCTION. The JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of thejump block, but the JMPE instruction, that indicates the endof the block, is not specified.

l:E-3341 ANOTHER JMP INSTRUCTION Another JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start ofCAN NOT BE USED IN THE a jump block before the JMPE instruction s specified to indi-RANGE OF JMP INSTRUCTION. cate the end of the first block.

I: E-3342 JMPE INSTRUCTION MUST BE A JMPE instruction that indicates the end of a jump block isTHE PAIR WITH JMP. specified when no JMP instruction, hat indicates the start of

a block, is specified.

l:E-3343 JMPE INSTRUCTtON IS DEIECTED A JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of a jumpTHOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL block when the end of the block has already been defined asNUMBER SPECIFICATION. a number of coils.

l:E-3350 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. The JMPB instruction does not contain label xxxx that indi-cates the jump destination.

l:E-3351 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED Two or more identical label numbers are found when defin-TWICE OR MORE. ing jump destinations with the LBL instruction. Specify

unique label numbers.

I:E-3352 TOO MANY LABELS. The number of jump destinations defined with the LBLinstruction exceeds the maximum allowable number thatcan be specified for the selected program type. Decreasethe number of defined jump destinations.

l:E-3353 THE DESTINATION OF JMPB The JMPB instruction cannot be used to jump from a pointINSTRUCTION IS BEYOND COM/ inside to a point outside the COM instruction control range,COME INSTRUCTION. or vice versa. JUMP operations can be performed only

entirely within the range or entirely outside the range.

I:E-3400 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED The step sequence program contains a failed instruction orINSTRUCTION. an instruction hat cannot be used with the selected program

type.

I:E-3420 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFER- The parameter ofthe program stat-l nstruction (SP) containsENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. a program number that does not correspond to the program

name.

l:E-3421 AN ILLEGAL STEP NUMBER IS Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range step number orSPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX an address other than a step number.INSTRUCTION.

l:E-3422 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range program numberIS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX or an address other than a program number.INSTRUCTION.

l:E-3423 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range label number orSPECIFED FOR THE XXXX an address other than a label number.INSTRUCTION.

-267-





LE-3440 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicateAT THE TOP OF THE SUBPRO- the start of the subprogram.GRAM.

l:E-3441 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicateAT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB- the end of the subprogram.PROGRAM.

l:E-3442 STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM No otherinstructions can be placed after the SPE instructionEXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUC- because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subpro-TION. gram.

l:E-3443 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogramIN THE SUBPROGRAM. because the SP instruction ndkates the start of a subprogram.

l:E-3460 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS Two or more defined jump destinations have identical labelASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE numbers. Define a unique label number for each jump des-STEP PROGRAMS. tination.

l:E-3461 TOO MANY LABELS. The number of defined jump destinations exceeds the num-ber allowed for step sequence editing. Reduce the numberof jump destination definitions.

l:E-3462 DSTEP INSTRUCTION WITHOUT There is no label corresponding to the specified DSTEPDLBL. instruction.

l:E-3480 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX ISASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE

Two or more steps have identical step numbers. Define aunique step number for each step.

STEP PROGRAMS.

l:E-3570 THE SIZE OF THE MESSAGE DATA The amount of message data exceeds the maximum num-IS TOO LARGE. ber of characters that can be specified for the selected pro-

gram type. Reduce the total number of characters.

I:E-3600 DATA TOO LARGE.(LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE)

The combined size of the ladder program and the stepsequence program exceeds the maximum allowable sizespecified for the selected program type. Reduce the size ofthe ladder or step sequence program.

I:E-3601 DATA TOO LARGE. The combined size of the message, symbol, comment, lad-(MESSAGE + SYMBOL + COM- der, and step sequence data exceeds the maximum allow-MENT + LADDER + STEP SEQUE- able size specified for the selectecl program type. ReduceNCE) the size of any of these data types.

l:E-3620 THERE IS NO SUBPROGRAM The selected program does not contain any subprogram fifexxxx. numbered xxxx. Create a subprogram ile having this number.

l:E-3640 LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE PRO- The END instruction is placed at the end of the second levelGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END when it is followed by a subprogram. Or, the END instructionINSTRUCTION. is placed at the end of a subprogram when there is a subse-

quent subprogram having a higher program number.

l:E-3650 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. There is no label corresponding to the specified JMPCinstruction.

l:E-3651 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED In the main program, two or more LBL instruction ump des-TWICE OR MORE. tinations have identical label numbers. Define a unique label

number for each jump destination.

l:E-3652 TOO MANY LABELS. The total number of LBL instruction jump destinationsdefined in the main program exceeds the maximum allow-able number specified for the selected program type.Reduce the total number of jump destinations defined in themain program.

l:E-3653 THE LABEL OF XXXX TO REFER Label xxxx, indicating a jump destination, cannot be placedEXISTS IN ANOTHER LEVEL. in other than the second level because the JMPC instruction

specifies a jump from a subprogram to the second level ofthe main program. Define label xxxx in the second level.

l:E-3654 THE LABEL OF XXXX EXISTS IN Label xxxx, indicating the jump destination of the JMPCTHE RANGE OF THE COM instruction, is within the COM instruction control range.INSTRUCTION. Place label xxxx outside the range.

-268-




5.9.3 Warning


kW-4100 THE TITLE DATA WHICH COULD The title data contains kana or kanji characters. These char-NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC acters are replaced by spaces.

WAS REPLACE WITH SPACECODE.

I:W4101 ILLEGAL OPPANEL (PARAMETER). Necessary addresses (key address, LED address, etc.) arePROCEED TO COMPILE USING not set when YES is specified for the system parameter indi-‘NO’ eating whether the FO operator panel is to be used. The

value of this parameter is changed to NO during compilation.

I:W4102 EDITING SUEPROGRAM HAS There is a subprogram for which editing has not yet beenNOT COMPLETED. completed. Complete the editing of this subprogram.

I:W4103 MULTIPLE SUB-PROGRAMS WITH Twosubprograms haveidenticalnumbers(e.g., Pl.#lAandSAME NUMBER EXIST. Pl.#SS). The ladder program is the first to be compiled

(Pl.#tA in the above example).

I:W4104 THE SOURCE-PROGRAM IS FOR- Symbols and comments are always output in FORMAT-B.MAT-B. THIS PARAMETER IS

IGNORED:SYMBOL/COMMENTI:W4105 THE SOURCE-PROGRAM IS FOR- The FORMAT-B data does not include a net comment.

MAT-B. THIS PARAMETER IS Specifying this item has no effect.IGNORED: NET COMMENT

I:W4200 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladderprogram isempty. Thisladderprogramisnotout-put to a memory card file.

I:W4201 LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT The first level of the main program takes too long to execute.THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE. Make the first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder

execution time in the system parameter.

l:W4202 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICA-TION OF COM INSTRUCTION IS

The end of the COM instruction control range cannot be spe-cified as a number of coils. The specified number of coils is

NOT ALLOWED. ignored, the end of the range being identified by the COMEinstruction.

l:W4203 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICA- The end location of a jump cannot be specified as a numberTION OF JMP INSTRUCTION IS of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the endNOT ALLOWED. location being identified by the JMPE instruction.

I:W4204 UNUSED NET COMMENT The ladder program contains a pointer to a lost net commentPOINTER FOUND. character string. This pointer is not ouiqut to a memory card file.

I:W4400 THERE IS NO STEP SEQUENCE The step sequence program is empty. This step sequencePROGRAM. program is not output to a memory card file.

I:W4500 THE SYMBOL DATA WHICH The symbol data contains a special character that cannot beCOULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.CNC WAS REPLACED WITHSPACE CODE.

I:W4501 THE COMMENT DATA WHICH The comment data contains a special character that cannotCOULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by aCNC WAS REPLACED WITH space.

SPACE CODE.

l:W4502 COMMENT DATA SIZE EXCEEDS More than 65,535 characters have been input as comment64KB. SYMBOUCOMMENT DATA data. None of the symbol and comment data is output to aIS NOT CONVERTED TO THE memory card file.MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE.

I:W4570 THE MESSAGE DATA WHICH The message data contains a special character that cannotCOULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by aCNC WAS REPLACED WITH space.SPACE CODE.

I:W4600 UNREFERENCED SUBPROGRAM Subprogram xxxx is not called by any program. This pro-xxxx. gram is, however, output to a memory card file.

-269-




5.10 J : DECOMPILATION

5.10.1 Fatal error

Number

J:F-2100

J:F-2101

J:F-2102

J:F-2103

J:F-2104

J:F-2105

Message

FUNCTION CODE ERROR.

DATA:-,SYSTEMx

PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM‘XxXx’ MEMORY CARD FORMATFILE.

‘XxXx’ MEMORY CARD FORMATFILE NOT FOUND.

MISMATCHED PASSWORD.

‘XxXx’ MEMORY CARD FORMATFILE READ ERROR.

‘XXXX’ SOURCE PROGRAMWRITE ERROR.

5.10.2 Error

Contents

The function code specified in the memory card file does notmatch that defined in the system. The file’s function codeappears immediately after DATA; the system’s function codeafter SYSTEM. Install valid system data.

The program specified in memory card file xxxx does notmatch the selected program type. Select a valid program.

Specified memory card file xxxx does not exist. Create thefile.

The entered password is invalid. Enter the password cor-rectly.

Memory card file xxxx cannot be read. The file is invalid.

Data cannot be written to source program xxxx.


J:E-3100 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED There is a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot beINSTRUCTION. used with the selected program type.

J:E-3101 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION There is a subprogram in the selected program that does notAT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB- end with the SPE instruction.PROGRAM.

J:E-3200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA The symbol data size in a selected program exceeded the sys-IN SOURCE PROGRAM EXCEEDS temdefined limit before the program was executed. The pro-THE LIMIT. gram thus cannot be executed; reduce the symbol data size.

J:E-3300 ID CODE (l/O MODULE) An invalid ID code is specified at address xxxx in the l/OERROR.(ADDRESS XXXX) module data. The program cannot be executed; prepare a

valid memory card file.

-270-




510.3 Warning


J:W4100 THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM The number of steps defined in a subprogram in the ladderIS TOO LARGE. program exceeded the maximum number that can be speci-

fied for the selected program type. The subprogram is out-put to the source program. Make necessary corrections byediting the ladder diagram.

J:W4101 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT xxxx net comment pointers do not correspond to any netPOINTER FOUND. comment character string. These net comment pointers are

not output to the source program. Edit the ladder diagramas necessary.

J:W4102 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT xxxx net comment character strings do not correspond toSTRINGS FOUND. any net comment pointer. These net comment character

strings are deleted. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.

J:W4103 XXXX DUPLICATED NET COM- xxxx identical net comment pointers have been found. Char-MENT POINTER FOUND. acter strings are copied so that the same net comment char-

acter strings have the same net comment pointers.

J:W4104 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS Step number xxxx is assigned totwo

or more different steps.USED TWICE OR MORE. Edit the step sequence as necessary.

J:W4200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA The total number of data items exceeded the system-de-EXCEEDS THE LIMIT. fined limit when the symbol data merge operation reached(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX) the indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx).

Data subsequent to this symbol data is not output to thesource program.

J:W4201 XXXX SYMBOL DATA AT DUPLI- xxxx symbol data items are defined for the same address.CATED ADDRESS FOUND. Either the source data or the memory card data becomes

valid, depending on the setting of the symbol merge option.

J:W4202 SAME SYMBOL EXISTS. The symbol character string defined in the indicated symbol(ADDRESS XXXX. SYMBOL XXXX) data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) is already defined at

another address. This symbol data is not output to thesource program.

J:W4203 ILLEGAL SYMBOL. The indicated symbol data (address: &symbol: xxxx)(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX) was foundto be invalid as a result of the IEC-cornpliant sym-bol character string check. This symbol data is not output tothe source program. To output it to the source file, changethe setting in the %%%FLSET.CNF file.

J:W4204 SYMBOL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL The symbol data containing symbol xxxx contains an invalid(SYMBOL XXXX) address. This symbol data is not output to the source pro-

gram.

J:W4300 ILLEGAL OPERATOR PANEL (SYS- The operator panel specification in the system parameterTEM PARAMETER). PROCEED TO data is invalid. Processing continues while ignoring theDECOMPILE USING ‘NO’. operator panel specification.

J:W4301 THIS MEMORY CARD FORMAT The R/D extension address cannot be used because theFILE IS NOT FOR EXPANDED R/D PMC version of PMC-RC is earlierthan 3. Change the PMCADDRESS. version in the system parameter.

J:W4800 ‘XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT The header section of memory card file xxxx is invalid. How-FILE ILLEGAL. ever, processing continues.

J:W4900 ‘OPTION’ READ FAILED. The file settings have returned to the defaults.SE-I-I-ING HAS CHANGED INTODEFAULT.

The settings in the OPTION file of the selected program can-not be read. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. Theoption reset function key may be used.

J:W4901 ‘%%%FLSET.CNF’ READ FAILED. Symbol character check is not performed.SYMBOL CHARACTERS ARE NOTCHECKED.

The settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF file cannot be read.Create a valid file or modify the file settings. When this checkis not made, processing may be continued even withouimaking the changes.

-271-




5.11 K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION

5.11 .l Fatal error

Number Message

K:F-2006 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.

K:F-2001 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.

K:F-2006 NOT FOUND ‘XxXx’ FILE.

K:F-2097 NOT FOUND ‘XxXx’ SOURCEPROGRAM.

K:F-2100 FILE I/O ERROR.

Contents

KF-2101 1SET-UP FILE BROKEN. I

K:F-2102 1 LLEGAL OPTION(S). I

K:F-2103 INSUFFICIENT PARAMETER(S).

K:F-2104

K:F-2105

TOO MANY PARAMETERS.

ILLEGAL OPTlON-SPECIFIED FILE.

Required system or functional instruction parameters arenot specified.

The functional instruction contains more parameters thanare required.

K:F-2106 1 LLEGAL IDCODE. I

K:F-2107 EXPECTED TERMINATOR.

K:F-2108 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROMSOURCE-PROGRAM.

K:F-2109 EXPECTED IDCODE.

K:F-2110 ILLEGAL PARAMETER(S).

K:F-2111 CREATE TEMPORARY FILE(S) INCURRENT DIRECTORY.

K:F-2112

K:F-2113 ILLEGAL NAME OF SET-UP FILE.

K:F-2114 1NOT FOUND SET-UP FILE.

K:F-2115 1EXPECTED ‘/PC’ OPTION. I

NOT SPECIFIED ENVIRONMENTALVARIABLE ‘TMP’.

K:F-2116 ‘XxXx’ EXECUTABLE FILE NOTFOUND. I

K:F-2117 1 NPUT DATA ILLEGAL. I

-272-




5.11.2 Error

Number Message Contente

K:E-3100 ‘XXXX’ FILE CANNOT EXECUTE.

K:E-3101 ‘XXXX’ SYMBOL 8 COMMENTDATA BROKEN.

K:E-3102 CANNOT BE HANDLE DATA TYPE The mnemonic of extended symbol ‘%@2-C’ is converted‘%@2-C. when %%%FLSET.CNF is a FORMAT-A/B file.

K:E-3103 CANNOT CONVERT FILES OF THEPMC SERIES SET UP THE SYS-TEM.

K:E-3104 ;;Z;OT OVERWRITE EXISTING

K:E-3105 CANNOT SPECIFY BIT ADDRESS A bit address is specified in the byte address parameter ofOF PARAMETER. the functional instruction.

K:E-3106 CANNOT SPECIFY BYTE ADDRESS A byte address is specified for the basic instruction.ON BASIC INSTRUCTION.

K:E-3107 CANNOT SPECIFY OUTPUT MOD- An output module is specified as the input addressof the I/OULE AT INPUT ADDRESS. module data.

K:E-3108 CANNOT SPECIFY INPUT MOD- An input module is specified as the output address of the I/OULE AT OUTPUT ADDRESS. module data.

K:E-3109 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ADDRESS A parameter prohibited address is specified as the addressPROHIBITED USING AS PARAME- parameter of the functional instruction.TER.

K:E-3110 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BITADDRESS.

K:E3111 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BYTEADDRESS.

K:E-3112 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT An output prohibited address is specified as the outputADDRESS. address parameter of the functional instruction.

K:E-3113 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT An output prohibited address is specified for the coil,ADDRESS WITH COIL.

K:E-3114 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ODD An odd-number prohibited address is specified as an odd-ADDRESS. number address.

K:E-3117 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 2. The system parameter contains a value that is other than amultiple of 2.

K:E-3118 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 5. The system parameter contains a value that is other than amultiple of 5.

K:E-3119 EXPECTED ADDRESS. The basic instruction has no address.

K:E-3120 EXPECTED FUNCTION NUMBER.

K:E-3121 EXPECTED PARAMETER(S). The functional instruction has no parameter.

K:E-3122 IDCODE NOT FOUND IN ‘XxXx’.

K:E-3123 ILLEGAL ADDRESS. An invalid address or an address that cannot be specified isspecitied in the symbol and comment data, or message data.

K:E-3124 ILLEGAL ADDRESS IN DATA An invalid address is specified in the functional instructionTABLE. data table.

K:E-3125 ILLEGAL ADDRESS OF PARAME- An invalid address is specified in the functional instructionTER. address parameter.

K:E-3126 ILLEGAL CHARACTER(S). The system parameter, title data, symbol and commentdata, or message data contains invalid character data.

K:E-3127 ILLEGAL SOURCE-PROGRAMNAME.

-273-





K:E-3128 ILLEGAL MNEMONIC FILE NAME.

K:E-3129 ILLEGAL PARAMETER NUMBER. The system parameter contains an invalid data number.

K:E-3130 ILLEGAL TITLE NUMBER. The data number of the data identifier is invalid.

K:E-3131 ILLEGAL VALUE. The system parameter contains an invalid value.

K:E-3132 ILLEGAL VALUE IN BASE DATA. An invalid value is specified in the base data of the I/O mod-ule data.

K:E-3133 ILLEGAL VALUE IN GROUP DATA. An invalid value is specified in the group data of the I/O mod-ule data.

K:E-3134 ILLEGAL VALUE IN SLOT DATA. An invalid value is specified in the slot data of the I/O moduledata.

K:E-3135 ILLEGAL VALUE OF PARAMETER. An invalid value is specified in the data table of the functionalinstruction.

K:E-3136 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-ACTER(S).

K:E-3137 INPUT MNEMONIC FILE NAME.

K:E-3138 1uNA’Mu:OURCE-PROGRAM

K:E3139 INVALID A NUMBER OF CONVERTDATA.

K:E3140 INVALID FUNCTIONS NAME. An unsupported functional instruction is specified.

K:E-3141 INVALID FUNCTION NUMBER.

K:E-3142 INVALID MODULE NAME. The module name of the I/O module data is invalid.

K:E-3143 RETURN STATUS FROM SPAWN ISE2BIG(=7).

K:E-3144 INVALID PMC SERIES OF SPECI-FIED SOURSE-PROGRAM.

K:E-3145 INVALID QUALIFIER. The system parameter, title data, symbol and commentdata, ladder, or I/O module data is followed by an invalidcharacter.

K:E3146 LACK OF XXXX FILE.

K:E-3147 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.

K:E-3148 MNEMONIC FILE NOT FOUND.

K:E-3149 NOT ENOUGH PARAMETER(S). Required system or functional instruction parameters arenot specified.

K:E-3150 NOT FOUND BASE DATA. The base data of the I/O module is not found.

K:E-3151 NOT FOUND GROUP DATA. The group data of the I/O module is not found.

K:E-3152 NOT FOUND MODULE NAME. The module name of the l/O module is not found.

K:E-3153 NOT FOUND SLOT DATA. The slot data of the I/O module is not found.

K:E-3154 NOT FOUND ‘XxXx’ PROCESSINTERFACE FILE.

K:E-3155 NOT FOUND ‘XXXX’ SOURCE-PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FILE.

K:E-3156 NOT FOUND ‘XXXX’ SUB PRO-GRAM FILE.

K:E-3157 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS. The address of the mnemonic data or I/O module data isspecified.

K:E-3158 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS IN DATA An out-of-range address is specified in the functionalTABLE. instruction data table.

-274-




Number bmge Contents

K:E-3159 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF An out-of-range address is specified as a message settingADDRESS. address.

OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF

I

An out-of-range address is specified in the functional

PARAMETER. instruction parameter. I

OUT OF PARAMETER VALUE. An out-of-range value is specified in the functional instruc-tion parameter. I

1 K:E3162 / OUT OF VALUE. 1An out-of-range value is specified in the system parameter. 1

K:E-3163 OUT OF VALUE IN BASE DATA.

K:E-3164

K:E-3165

An out-of-range value is specified in the base data of the I/Omodule data.

OUT OF VALUE IN DATA TABLE. An out-of-range value is specified in the functional instruc-tion data table.

OUT OF VALUE IN GROUP DATA. An out-of-range value is specified in the group data of thel/O module data. I

I

:E-3166

1 K:E-3167

1 K:E-3168

1 K:E3172

OUT OF VALUE IN SLOT DATA. An out-of-range value is specified in the slot data of the I/Omodule data

PLEASE SHORTEN FILE NAME.

PROCESS ERROR.

SOURCE-PROGRAM NOT FOUND.I

K:E3173 SPECIFIED CONVERT DATA NOTFOUND.(XXXX) 1

SPECIFY THE VALUE(SLOT)EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT-B ‘XxXx’.

SYMBOL DATA COUNT OVER.

SYMBOL DATA NOT FOUND. Although comment data exists, there is no symbol data.

ITNOT FOUND.K:E-3178 SYMBOL OR COMMENT DATA

IOnly symbol or comment data was converted to the address.

I

K:E-3179 THE SAME GROUP,BASE,AND The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data allSLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. have the same number.

K:E-3181 TOO LONG STRINGS. The length of the system parameter, message data, or titledata exceeds the maximum.

K:E-3187 TOO MANY CHARACTERS IN 1 The number of characters entered on a line of the systemLINE. parameter, message data, title data, symbol and comment

mnemonic data, mnemonic data, or I/O module dataexceeds the limit.

(-3188 (TOO MANY PARAMETERS. 1are required.he functional instruction contains more parameters than

I

K:E-3189 TOTAL VALUE OF BASE AND SLOT The sum of the base data and slot data values of the l/OIS OVER. module data exceeds the maximum.

K:E-3190 UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. The data contains an undefined instruction.

K:E-3191 UNEXPECTED ADDRESS. An address is specified in a location where it is not required.

K:E-3192 UNEXPECTED PARAMETER(S). A parameter is specified !or an instruction that requires noparameters.

K:E-3193

I----:E-3194

UNKNOWN DATA NUMBER. A nonexistent data number is specified for a system parame-ter or data identifier.

DATA ENTRY ERROR. An attempt to register symbol and comment data failed.

I K:E-3195 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-

IThe symbol data contains a double-byte character.

ACTER(S) IN SYMBOL DATA. Doubkbyte characters cannot be used in symbol data. I

-275-




5.11.3 Warning

Number Message

K:W4100 COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND.

K:W4101 DATA NOT FOUND.

K:W4102 DELETED KANJI CHARACTERS.

Contents

Only symbol data was convened to the address.

The system parameter, title data, symbol and commentdata, message data, or I/O module data does not exist.

K: W-4 103 F)PECTED CONTROL CONDlTlON Nocontrol condition is specifiedforthefunctional instruction.

K:W4104 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPE- Invalid character data exists in ‘xxxx.’CIFIED AT ‘XxXx’.

K:W4105 ILLEGAL OP.PANEL(PARAMETER). System parameter ‘OP.PANEC contains an invalid value;PROCEED TO DISCOMPILE the value is converted to “NO.”USING ‘NO’.

K:W4108 ILLEGAL SYMBOL. The symbol data is nonstandard (check levet-1). (For FOR-MAT-C only)

K:W4!07 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR- The message data contain a doubltiyte character.ACTER(S).

K:W4108 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR- Comment data containing a double-byte character wasACTER(S) IN COMMENT DATA. converted without the doubltiyte character cooversion

option (J option).

K:W4109 LOGICAL OPERATED WITH An operation was performed using a register that is not regis-UNUSED REGISTER(S). tered in the ladder data.

K:W4110 LOGICAL PRODUCT REMAINS IN A register exists that has not been output to the ladder data.REGISTER(S).

K:W4111 MESSAGE DATA INCLUDE KANA Message data xxxx contains a double-byte or single-byteOR KANJI CHARACTERS AT katakana character.‘XXXX’.

K:W4112 NOT ENOUGH CONTROL CONDI- Control conditions required for the functional instruction are

TION (S). not specified.K:W4113 NOT FOUND DATA AT XXXX No message is defined for address xxxx.

ADDRESS.

K:W4114 NOT FOUND PARAMETER NUM-BERED XXXX.

--K:W4115 NOT FOUND TITLE NUMBERED

xxxx.

K:W4116 NOT FOUND ‘XXXX’ PMGCS FILE.

K:W4117 NOT USED NET COMMENTPOINTER EXIST. XXXX

K:W4118 OUTPUT UNUSED REGISTER(S).

K:W4119 OVERWROTE EXISTING DATA.

K:W4120 INVALID QUALIFIER. An invalid character follows the end code “%” of the systemparameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladderdata, message data, or I/O module data.

K:W4121 REGISTERS OVERFLOW.

K:W4122 SOME GARBAGE DATA ARE During conversion to Format-B, data that does not belongFOUND AT END OF LADDER to level 1 to 3, or to any subprogram, is found. This indicatesDATA. that there is data subsequent to the last SPE.

K:W4123 SPECIFY SAME GROUP,BASE, The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data alAND SLOT. have the same number.

K:W4124 SPECIFY SAME NUMBER(GROUP)AT I/O UNIT-B AS I/O UNIT-A.

-276-




Number Mesaage Contents

K:W4125 SPECIFY THE VALUE(BASE)EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT-B.

K:W4126 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF ‘XXXXWERE DELETED, BECAUSE OFEXCEEDING THE LIMIT.

K:W4127 TOO MANY CONTROL CONDI-TIONS.

K:W4128 UNEXPECTED COIL(S).

The functional instruction is subject to too many controlconditions.

A coil was specified when not required by the functionalinstruction,

K:W4129 UNEXPECTED CONTROL CONDI- A basic instruction was specified in a functional instructionTION(S). for which no control conditions are required.

K:W4130 REDEFINITION OF ADDRESS Two or more symbol definitions exist for a single address.DATA. When the start code of thesymbol data is”%O2,” the symbol

definition must not be specified more than once. The secondand subsequent definitions are ignored. For informationrelating to the start code, see Section 4.5.8.3.

K:W4131 REDEFINITION OF SYMBOL DATA. The same symbol is specified for two or more differentaddresses. Symbols other than the first specified symbolare replaced by spaces.

K:W4132 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR SYM- The character string length of the symbol data exceeds theBOL DATA. maximum (six characters for FORMAT-A and FORMAT-B;

16 characters for FORMAT-C). The symbol data is replacedby spaces.

K:W4133 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COM- The comment data length exceeds 30 characters. The com-MENT DATA. ment data is replaced by spaces.

K:W4134 SYMBOL DATA ALREADY EXIST Two or more different symbols are specified for the sameaddress. (For FORMAT-C, an identical symbol may be spe-cified in more than one location.) Symbols other than thatspecified first are replaced by spaces.

K:W4135 RELAY COMMENT DATA ALREADY Two or more diierent character strings are specified for theEXIST. same relay comment at the same address. (For FOR-MAT-C, an identical character string may be specified inmore than one location.) Relay comments other than thatspecified first are replaced by spaces.

K:W4136 COIL COMMENT DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for theEXIST. same coil comment at the same address. (For FORMAT-C,

an identical character string may be specified in more thanone location.) Coil comments other than that specified firstare replaced by spaces.

K:W4137 COMMENT TITLE DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for theEXIST. same comment title at the same address. (For FORMAT-C,

an identical character string may be specified in more thanone location.) Comment titles other than that specified firstare deleted.

K:W4138 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR RELAY The relay comment data length exceeds 16 characters. (ForCOMMENT DATA. FORMAT-C only) The relay comment data is replaced by

spaces.

K:W4139 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COIL The coil comment data length exceeds 30 characters. (ForCOMMENT DATA. FORMAT-C only) The coil comment data is replaced by

spaces.

K:W4140 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COM- The comment title data length exceeds 30 characters. (ForMENT TITLE DATA. FORMAT-C only) The comment title data is replaced by

spaces.

-277-




5.12 L : INPUT/OUTPUT

5.12.1 Error


L:E-3106 NOT EXIST ‘XxXx’ FILE. File xxxx does not exist.

L:E-3101 ROM ID UNMATCH ERROR The currently set cassette or module does not match the cur-rently selected machine model.

L:E-3102 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.

L:E-3103 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.

L:E-3104 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file.

L:E-3105 FILE CLOSE ERROR The specified file cannot be closed.

L:E-3106

L:E-3107

INVALID RECEIVE DATA

TIME OUT ERROR

Data other than an IS0 code has been received.

No response was received within a specified period after thePC issued an instruction. Check the destination’s powersource, settings, cable connections and parameters (baudrateand stop bit), and whetherthe contents of CONFIGSYS

are valid.

L:E-3108 ACCESS CANCELED

L:E-3109 FILE-ROM UNMATCH ERROR

Access has been interrupted.

The tile contents do not match the ROM data. ,

L:E-3110

L:E-3120

L:E-3121

L:E-3122 PART OF ROM DATA INVALID

CONTROL CODE ERROR

FIRST RECORD INFORMATIONERROR

ROM DATA CAN’T CONDENSE

The control code is invalid.

The contents of the first record are invalid.

The ROM data cannot be comoressed.ERROR

The ROM file data is invalid.

L:E-3123 ROM FILE > ROM ERROR The ROM file exceeds the size of ROM itself.

L:E-3124 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E-3125 ROM PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT The ROM parity of the specified file is invalid.FILE

L:E-3126 ROM COUNT ERROR The ROM count is invalid.

L:E-3150 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR The ROM file cannot be opened.

L:E-3151 WORK FILE OPEN ERROR The work file cannot be opened.

L:E-3152 WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR

L:E-3153 WORK FILE CLOSE ERROR

L:E-3154 S RECORD FORMAT ERROR

L:E-3155 WORK FILE SEEK ERROR

L:E-3156 WORK FILE WRITE ERROR

L:E-3157 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR

L:E-3158 WORK FILE READ ERROR

L:E-3159 ROM FILE READ ERROR

L:E-3160 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR

L:E-3180 ROM SET ERROR

L:E-3181 DIAGNOSIS ERROR

L:E-3182 EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR

L:E-3183 COMPARE ERROR

L:E-3184 DATA FILE WRITE ERROR

L:E-3185 BLANK CHECK ERROR

L:E-3186 DATA SEND ERROR

The work file cannot be initialized.

The work file cannot be closed.

The S record format is invalid.

A seek operation cannot be performed for the work file.

Data cannot be written to the work file.

Data cannot be written to the ROM file.

The work file cannot be read.

The ROM file cannot be read.

The ROM file format is invalid.

The EROM is mounted improperly.

An error was detected during EROM diagnosis.

The EROM is faulty.

The EROM data does not match the ROM file contents.

Data cannot be written because the EROM is not deleted.

The EROM is not yet deleted.

The number of data items is invalid.

-278-




Number 1 Mewage I Contents I

L:E-3187 PARITY ERROR A parity error occurred during data transmission.

L:E-3188 ROM WRITER IS OCCAPIED The writer is in use.

L:E-3189 ROM TYPE ERROR The ROM type is invalid.

L:E-3190 COMPARE ERROR ADDRESS = ,INPUT DATA = . FILE DATA =

L:E-3191 ‘FL10 _ATDAT’ FILE FORMAT The format of the FLIO_AT.DAT file is invalid.ERROR. HIT ANY KEY. I

L:E-3192 MEMORY CARD ERROR An error occurred during memory card format conversion.

L:E-3193 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT An error occurred during memory card format conversion.PARAMETER

L:E-3194 NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR

IThe third parameter specified for memory card format con-version is invalid. I

L:E-3195 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card formatconversion.

L:E-3196 NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format con-version is invalid.

L:E-3197 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that can per-form memory card format conversion.

L:E-3198 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalidCASSEl-TE SIZE) (the count falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3199 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalidFILE SIZE) (the file size falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3200 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting tile cannot be read.

L:E-3201 INITIALIZE ERROR

L:E-3202 NOT EXIST FILE

L:E-3203 FILE READ ERROR

L:E-3204 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE

Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.

The memory card format conversion file does not exist.

The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.

There is insufficient free space on the disk to activatememory card format conversion.

L:E-3205 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card formatconversion.

L:E-3206 NOT MAKE FILE

L:E-3207 NOT OPEN WORK FILE

The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.

The work file for memory card format conversion cannot beopened.

L:E-3208 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR

IAn error occurred upon creating a conversion table formemory card format conversion. I

L:E-3209 1PMC TYPE I/O ERROR 1An I/O error occurred for the machine model settina file. 1

L:E-3210 BREAK PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an l/Ooperation. I

L:E-3211 IMPOSSOBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed.

L:E-3212 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E-3213 FILE SEEK ERROR

L:E-3214 FILE READ ERROR

A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.

-Ihe specified file cannot be read.

L:E-3215 FILE OPEN ERROR

L:E-3216 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERTFILE

The specified file cannot be opened.

The source file for which format conversion is to be per-formed does not exist.

L:E-3217 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalidROM SIZE) (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range). I

L:E-3218 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR

L:E-3219 1FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR

The file size cannot be obtained.

The file size cannot be changed.

L:E-3220 1DATA SEEK ERROR

-279-




(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

IN TEXT FILE IT IS NEEDED

(COULD NOT FILD COMMANDINTERPRETER

interpreter is not found).

-280-




Number MeJ=s((e Contents

L:E-3336 INVALID ‘X PARAMETER’ IN TEXT ‘X Parameter’ in the text file is invalid.FILE

L:E-3339 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed.

L:E-3340 I==;T INITIALIZE IS COMPLETE The port has been successfully initialized.

L:E-3341 ;;;;;RARY FILE FORMAT The temporary file format is invalid.

L:E-3342 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY The work file cannot be deleted (the pathname is invalid).FILE(FOR INVALID PASS NAME)

L:E-3343 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY The work file cannot be deleted (the specified file is notFILE(FOR COULD NOT FIND FILE) found).

L:E-3344 UNKNOWN PMC TYPE The specified machine model is an undefined PMC model.

LIE-3345 PORT INITIALIZE ERROR Port initialization failed.

L:E-3350 PORT ERROR(OVER RUN) A port overrun occurred (detected by the I/O port statuscheck).

L:E-3351 PORT ERROR(PARTY) A parity error occurred (detected by the I/O port statuscheck).

L:E-3352 PORT ERROR(FRAMING) A framing error occurred (detected by the l/O portstatuscheck).

L:E-3353 PORT ERROR A break interrupt error occurred (detected by the l/O port sta-(BREAK INTERRUPT) tus check).

L:E-3354 PORT ERROR A time out error occurred (detected by the l/O port status(TIME OUT) check).

L:E-3355 PORT ERROR A data transmission error occurred (detected by the l/O port(DATA OUTPUT) status check).

L:E-3356 TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR The system timer is invalid. Change the data in the text file(FLIO_AT.DAT). For details, see the comment section ofFLIO_AT.DAT.

L:E-3400 ILLEGAL XXXX PROGRAM NAME. - Unpermitted character is used in specified program name.- The program name is over 8 characters.

L:E-3401 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE IS Forrnat-AIB source program is specified. Specify F0mat-CDIFFERENT. source program.

L:E-3402 XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.

L:E-3403 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES. Specified source program’s PMC type is unknown.

L:E-3404 XXXX DIRECTORY DOES NOT Specified directory for backup does not exist.EXIST.

L:E-3500 NOT EXIST ‘XxXx’ FILE. File xxxx does not exist.

L:E-3501 pLRf’;ARAMETER COUNT The number of input parameters is invalid.

L:E-3502 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE The machine model label of the input parameter is invalid.

LABEL NAME ERROR

L:E-3503 DATA FILE OPEN ERROR The data file cannot be opened.

L:E-3504 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read.

L:E-3505 CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN The source file for which format conversion is to be per-ERROR formed cannot be opened.

L:E-3506 ;;;;RT OBJECT FILE OPEN The destination file for source file conversion cannot beopened.

L:E-3507 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN The numberof parameters specified in the data file is invalid.DATA FILE

L:E-3508 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.

L:E-3509 INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION The contents of the data file are invalid.

-281-




1 Number 1 Mesaage Contents

CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ The source file cannot be read.

L:E-3511 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing.

L:E-3512 E;;;kRT SOURCE FILE FORMAT The ROM file format is invalid.

I L:E-3513 CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE

I

Data cannot be written to the destination file.ERROR

L:E3514 DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST

L:E-3515 COCNVERT CANCEL

The data file does not exist.

Conversion has been canceled.

I L:E-3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue pro-cessing.

L:E-3600 NOT EXIST ‘XXXX’ FILE. File xxxx does not exist.

L:E-3601 INPUT PARAMETER COUNT The number of input parameters is invalid.ERROR

L:E-3602 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE The machine model label for the input parameter is invalid.

LABEL NAME ERROR

1 L:E-3603 ( DATA FILE OPEN ERROR 1The data file cannot be opened.

L:E-3604 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read.

L:E-3605 EE;;pT SOURCE FILE OPEN The source file cannot be opened.

L:E-3696 CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN The destination file cannot be opened.ERROR

L:E-3607 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.DATA FILE

L:E-3608 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.

1 L:E-3609 1 NVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION 1The contents of the data file are invalid.

L:E-3610 CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ The source file cannot be read.

ERROR

L:E-3611 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing.

L:E-3612 CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT The ROM file format is invalid.ERROR

L:E-3613 EE;;p OBJECT FILE WRITE Data cannot be written to the destination file.

L:E-3614 DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST The data file does not exist.

L:E-3615 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled.

I L:E-3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue pro-cessing.

I L:E-3617 SUM CHECK ERROR OF S The S record check sum is erroneous.RECORD

L:E-3618 rFORMAT ERROR OF SO RECORD 1The SO record format is invalid.

L:E-3619 1PMC TYPE CODE ERROR ( The machine model code for the SO record is invalid.

L:E-3620 DATA CONVERT ERROR A data conversion error occurred.

L:E-3621 FORMAT ERROR OF S RECORD ) The S record format is invalid.

L:E-3622 PMC ADDRESS ERROR The specified PMC address falls outside the allowablerange.

L:E-3700 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT An error occurred during memory card format conversion.PARAMETER

L:E-3701 NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specified for memory card format con-version is invalid.

L:E-3702 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card fonatconversion.

-282-




Number Messaurge Contents

L:E-3703 NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format con-version is invalid.

L:E-3704 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that supports

memory card format conversion.

L:E-3705 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory cardormat conversion is invalid(OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE) (the count falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3766 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory card ormat conversion is invalid(OUT OF FILE SIZE) (the file size falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3707 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting file cannot be read.

L:E-3708 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.

L:E-3709 NOT EXIST FILE The memory card format conversion file does not exist.

L:E-3710 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.

L:E-3711 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activatememory card format conversion.

L:Ei3712 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card formatconversion.

L:E-3713 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card fom?at conversion file cannot be created.

L:E-3714 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot beopened.

L:E-3715 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table formemory card format conversion.

L:E-3716 PMC TYPE l/O ERROR An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.

L:E-3717 BROKEN PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/Ooperation.

L:E-3718 IMPOSSIBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed.

L:E-3719 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E-3720 FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.

L:E-3721 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.

L:E-3722 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.

L:E-3723 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT The source file for which format conversion is to be per-FILE formed does not exist.

L:E-3724 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory card formatconversion is invalid(OUT OF ROM SIZE) (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3725 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be determined.

L:E-3726 FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed.

L:E-3727 DATA SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section

L:E-3728 ROM INFORMATION ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.

L:E-3729 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file.

L:E-3730 OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred in the object file.

L:E-3731 DATA MAX OVER The amount of data exceeds the allowed maximum.

L:E-3732 $-TEA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM Execution cannot be continued because the data size i:smaller than that of the count.

L:E-3733 INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY The size of the memory card data section is invalid.CARD

L:E-3734 INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE The memory card file is invalid (the identification data i:invalid).

L:E-3735 INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.

L:E-3736 ROM PARITY ERROR The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.

L:E-3737 PARAMETER ERROR There is an invalid parameter (memory card format).(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

-283-




5.12.2 Warning

Number Message Content8

L:W4100 ROM PARITY WARING OF

APPOINT FILE, CONTINUE TOTRANSFER? (Y/N)

L:W4101 ROM PARITY WARING OFAPPOINT FILE I

L:W4102 XXXX IS A PROGRAM OF Restoring program PMC type and system PMC type is IDIFFERENT PMC TYPE. same.

L:W4200 * NORMAL END Processing ended normally.

L:W4201 * D _PROGOPT -DRAM UNMATCH The DRAM does not match.

L:W4202 * PARITY UNMATCH The parity does not match.

L:W4203 * CASSETTE SIZE = XXXX Cassette size = xxxx

L:W4204 * ROM COUNT = XXXX ROM count = xxxx

~~~~I~~;~~IE~~~YT&THE j The last 120h bytes of the ROM file have been deleted.

L:W4206 * ADJUST OBJECT FILE SIZE TO The ROM count is appropriate for the object file size.ROM COUNT SIZE

L:W4207 * ADD OBJECT FILE SIZE The object file size has been increased by xxxx bytes.(XXXX BYTE)

-284-




5.13 N : ON-LINE MONITOR

5.13.1 Error


N:E-3001 FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR

N:E-3003 FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR The F-ROM is faulty.

Replace the F-ROM.

Contact FANUC Service.

N:E-3006 FLASH ROM SIZE ERROR The size of the sequence program is greater than that ofF-ROM.

Increase the size of F-ROM.

Try using the off-fine CONDENSE function.

N:E-3007 FLASH ROM NOT EMG STOP The CNC is not in emergency stop status.

Set the CNC to emergency stop status.

N:E-3008 ;fz%RROM PROGRAM DATA The PMC sequence program has failed.

Input the sequence program again.

N:E-3030 LADDER SIZE ERROR The sequence program is too large to be written to the PMC.Check the size of the sequence program.

N:E-3031 PMC CONTROL TYPE BSI (RAl). When the PMC control module type is RAl , on-line editingcannot be performed.

N:E-3036 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR The size of the sequence program exceeds the option-spe-(OPTION). cified size.

Reduce the size of the sequence program.

N:E-3037 PMC TYPE UNMATCH. The PMC type is invalid.

Convert the machine model using the off-line function.

N:E-3038 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP). The ladder step number option does not exist.

N:E-3041 THE COMMUNICATION TO PMC IS Communication with the PMC has not been established.NOT READY. Start communication with the PMC.

N:E-3042 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC. Processing cannot be continued because of a PMC alarm.

Clear the cause of the PMC alarm.

N:E-3045 LADDER SIZE OVER (PMC)

ERROR STATUS = nn

N:E-3046 THE PROGRAM IS NOT

CORRESPONDING (PMC). STA-TUS=NN

N:E-3947 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC

ERROR STATUS = nn

N:E-3048 LADDER DATA ERROR (PMC)

ERROR STATUS = nn

N:E-3050 INPUT INVALID

The ladder program being edited is too large to be written tothe PMC.

Reduce the size of the ladder program.

The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.

Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches thePMC program.

Processing cannot be continued because a PMC alarm isissued.

Check whether the ladder data being edited is valid.

The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.

Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches thePMC program.

An invalid value has been entered.

Enter a valid value.

N:E-3051 OBJECT BUFFER OVER

N:E-3054 COM FUNCTION MISSING

The sequence program is full.

Reduce the size of the ladder program.

The usage of the COM (SUBS) functional instruction isinvalid.

Check whether the usage of COM and COME (SUB29) isvalid.

N:E-3055 JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the JMP (SUBlO) functional instruction isinvalid.

Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUBBO) isvalid.

-285-




Number Message

N:E-3056 END FUNCTION MISSING

Contents

The usage of the ENDl, END2, END3. and END functionalinstructions is invalid.

Check whether these instructions have been entered in the

correct order.N:E-3056 LADDER BROKEN Data cannot be updated because the ladder program has

failed.

Input the ladder program again.

N:E-3660 CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the CALL and CALLU functional instructionsis invalid.

Enter these instructions in the second ladder level, or in asubprogram.

N:E-3061 COM FUNCTION MISSING(CALLSP)

N:E-3062 JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP)

TheCALLorCALLUfun&malinsbu&nissper%edbetweenthe COM (SUB9) and COME functional nstructions.

Do not specify CALL or CALLU between COM and COME.

Within the subprogram, the usage of the JMP (SUB1 0) func-tional instruction is invalid.

Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.

N:E-3063 SUB PROGRAM MISSING The usage of the SP functional instruction is invalid.

Check whether the usage of SP and SPE is valid.

N:E-3064 SP NO. DUPLICATE The specified subprogram number already exists. .Specify another subprogram number.

N:E-3065 SUB PROGRAM NOTHING No subprogram exists.

Create a subprogram.

N:E-3066 END FUNCTION NOTHING The END functional instruction does not exist.

Enter the END functional instruction.

N:E-3066 LBL COUNT OVER The number of labels exceeds the allowed maximum.

Reduce the number of labels.

N:E-3069 LBL NO. DUPLICATE The specified label number is already in use.

Specify another label number.

N:E-3070 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPB does noiexist.

Enter the LBL functional instruction.

N:E-3071 COM FUNCTION MISSING (JPMB) The JMPB functional instruction is specified between theCOM and COME functional instructions. This instructioncannot be used to perform a jump from between COM andCOME.

Do not insert JMPB between COM and COME. Or, entertheLBL functional instruction, together with JMPB, betweenCOM and COME.

N:E-3072 JMPB FUNCTION MISSING The JMPB inskuctioncannot ump to other than a subprogram.

Ensure that it jumps to a subprogram.

N:E-3073 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC does noiexist.

Enter the LBL functional instruction.

N:E-3074 COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL) The specified LBL functional instruction is specifiecbetween COM and COME. This instruction cannot be usecto perform a jump from between COM and COME.

Do not insert LBL between COM and COME. Or, enter theJMPC functional instruction, together with LBL. behveerCOM and COME.

N:E-3075 JMPC FUNCTION MISSING The JMPC functional instruction is specified in other than 2subprogram.

Specify the JMPC functional instruction in a subprogram.

N:E-3076 LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC exists ira level other than the second ladder level.

Enter the LBL functional instruction in the second laddelevel.

I

I

1

r

-

-286





N:E-3077 SYMBOL UNDEFINE

N:E-3080 LADDER ILLEGAL

N:E-3082 ILLEGAL OPERATION

N:E-3084 DATA TABLE COUNT OVER

The entered symbol is not yet defined.

Enter a valid symbol name.

The ladder program is invalid.

Input the ladder program again.

An invalid operation was performed (e.g., an attempt wasmade to create a relay or coil in a functional instruction).

Be careful to specify operations correctly.

The number of data tables exceeds the allowed maximum.

Reduce the number of data tables.

N:E-3085 EDIT BUFFER OVER There is no free space in the buffer in which editing can beperformed. Reduce the size of the net being edited.

N:E-3090 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT An unnecessary relay or coil exists.

Delete the unnecessary relay or coil.

N:E-3691 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The specified address is not found.

Check the specified address.

N:E-3092 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal lines of the net are not connected.Connect the horizontal lines.

N:E3093 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL

N:E-3094 RELAY OR COIL NOTHING

N:E-3095 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL

Them is an invalii connectionbetween funckonal nstmcticns.

Ensure that the connections between functional instructionsare specified correctly.

No relay or coil exists.

Add a relay or coil.

The vertical lines of the net are not connected.

Connect the vertical lines.

N:E-3096 PARAMETER NOTHING

N:E-3097 ADDRESS NOT DETECTED

N:E-3100 NET TOO LARGE

N:E-3102 LARGE NET APPEARED

No parameters are specified for a functional instruction.

Specify the required parameters.

No address is specified.

Specify an address.The net being edited exceeds the size of the editing buffer.

Reduce the size of the net being edited.

The net is too large to be displayed.

Reduce the size of the net.

N:E-3111 ERROR NET FOUND An invalid net exists.

Correct the invalid net.

N:E-3113 FUNCTION NOT FOUND The specified functional instruction is not found.

Check the number of the functional instruction.

N:E-3114 ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO Search for a functional instruction has been performed usingthe wrong number.

Check the number specified for the functional instruction.

N:E-3123 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR The MCARD file cannot be opened.ERROR STATUS = nn Check whether the program name has been entered cor-

rectly. Alternatively, the MCARD file may have beendestroyed.

N:E-3124 SYMBOL FILE OPEN ERROR The symbol file cannot be opened.ERROR STATUS = nn Check whether the program name has been entered cor-

rectly.

Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.

N:E-3125 ROM FILE READ ERROR The MCARD file cannot be read.ERROR STATUS = nn The MCARD file may have been destroyed.

N:E-3126 ROM FILE READ ERROR (VMEM) An error occurred when reading data from extendedERROR STATUS = nn memory.

Memory management may have been disabled.

Reboot the personal computer.

-287-




1 Number 1 Message Contents

I

III

L

U:E-3130 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR There is insufficient memory to perform writing to theNOT ENOUGH MEMORY MCARD file.

Memory management may have been disabled.

Reboot the personal computer.

U:E-3131 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the MCARD file.ERROR STATUS = nn Check the amount of free space available on disk, and the

name of the program to be saved.

U:E-3132 NET COMMENT FILE OPEN ERROR The net comment file cannot be opened.ERROR STATUS = nn Check whether the program name has been entered cor-

rectly.

Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.

V:E-3140 FAIL TO ALLOCATE MEMORY FOR There is insufficient memory.DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA. Reserve an area in conventional memory.

V:E-3141 FAIL TO READ FROM PMC DATA An error occurred while reading data table control data fromTABLE CONTROL DATA. the PMC.

Check the connection with the PMC and whether the speci-

fied machine model matches that of the connected PMC.Y:E-3142 FAIL TO WRITE TO PMC DATA An error occurred while writing data table control data to the

TABLE CONTROL DATA. PMC.

Check the connection with the PMC and whether the speci-fied machine model matches that of the connected PMC.

N:E-3143 THIS DATA TABLE GROUP ISWRITE-PROTECTED.

N:E-3144 ADDRESS NOT FOUND.

An attempt was made to change a value in a data tablegroup, but that data table group is writ+protected.

First, checkwhetherthe correct data table group is specified,then set that data table group to write-enabled status.

The specified address is not found.

Check whether the address is specified correctly.

N:E-3150 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS NOT An attempt was made to update or restore the ladder dia-BEEN MODIFIED. gram when it had not been modified.

N:E-3151 AN ERROR OCCURS IN THE LAD- An error occurred in the ladder diagram.DER DIAGRAM. The system cannot switch to update or monitor.

Correct the error in the diagram.

N:E-3153 TEMPORARY FILE LOAD ERROR. There is insuft icient memory.NOT ENOUGH PROGRAMMEMORY

Reserve an area in conventional memory or on disk.

N:E-3155 PROGRAM READ ERROR. There is insufficient memory.NOTENOUGHPROGRAMMEMORY

Reserve an area in conventional memory.

N:E-3158 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS BEEN The system cannot switch to store or monitor because theMODIFIED. ladder diagram has been modified.

Update the ladder diagram.

N:E-3160 ;;K;TF!JHI PROGRAM IS The specified program does not match that in the PMCmemory.

Specify the correct program, or load or store the programsuch that it matches the PMC memory program.

N:E-3161 TRANSFER WAS ABORTED. The user has canceled the transfer.

If the storing of a program is canceled, the program in PMCmemory may be destroyed. Store the program again to loadit into the PMC.

If program loading is canceled, the program remains as is.If the program does not match that in PMC memory, load orstore the program such that it matches the PMC memoryprogram.

N:E-3162 NOT CONNECTED TO PMC. Communication with the PMC has not yet been established.CAN NOT TRANSFER PROGRAM. Set up communication with the PMC.

N:E-3163 MISMATCH PASSWORD The entered password is invalid.

Enter a valid password.

-288-





N:E-3164 TOO LARGE PROGRAM. The size of the specified program exceeds that of the PMCNOT ENOUGH PMC’S PROGRAM program memory.MEMORY Check the sizes of the specified program and the PMC pro-

gram memory.N:E-3167 INVALID PROGRAM NAME.

N:E-3170 CUT BUFFER SIZE OVER.

The program name is invalid.

Check the program name.

The specified range is too great.

Specify a narrower range.

N:E-3171 CUT BUFFER ALLOCATION There is insufficient memory.ERROR. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional

memory, or on disk.

N:E-3172 NET COMMENT CUT ERROR (nn). When nn = 1:

There is insufficient memory.

Reserve an area in extended memory, conventionalmemory, or on disk.

When nn = 2:

The net comment file contains invalid data.Check the net comments using the off-tine function.

N:E-3173 NET COMMENT COPY ERROR Whennn=l:

(nn). There is insufficient memory.


When nn = 2:

The net comment file contains invalid data.

Check the net comments using the off-line function.

N:E-3174 NET COMMENT PASTE ERROR Whennn=l:

(nn). There is insufficient memory.


When nn = 2:

The net comment file contains invalid data.Check the net comments using the off-line function.

N:E-3175 NET COMMENT APPEND ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data.


N:E-3176 NET COMMENT DELETE ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data.

Check the net comments using the off-tine function.

N:E-3177 NET COMMENT DATA WRITE The net comment file contains erroneous data.ERROR. Check the net comments using the off-line function.

N:E-3178 NOTHING NET COMMENT DATA. The net comment file contains no net comment within thespecified range.


N:E-3183 THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED. - On-line editing function and l/O menu functions are pro-tected. Confirm keep relay.

- Data table control data screen is protected. Confinn keeprelay.

N:E-3184 WRITE PROTECT. (NOT MDI MODE PMC parameter is write protected.NOR EMERGENCY STOP.) Set CNC mode to MDI or emergency stop, or stop the se-

quence program.

N:E-3185 WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE.) PMC parameter is write protected.

Set CNC parameter PWE=l , or stop the sequence program.

N:E-3186 WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE PMC parameter is write protected.AND KEY4.) Set CNC parameter PWE=l , or set KEY4=1, or stop the se-

quence program.

N:E-3187 WRITE PROTECT. Signal status is write protected.Confirm keep relay.

-289-



e n a



APPENDIX 1 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

APPENDIX 1 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND

DECOMPILATION

(1) Conditions for starting automatic compilation or decompilation

When [ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] has been selected from the initial menu, automatic

compilation or decompilation is performed according to the following conditions:

[Conditions/results]

The start conditions are determined from the results of companng the time stamps of the

CONTOL and MCARD files for the source program. The conditions under which these files

are updated and the results of updating are described below.

[File updating conditions]

0 CONTOL file

The CONTOL file is updated once the source program has been modified by using the off-

line editing function.

@ MCARD file

The MCARD file is updated once the source program has been input by using the off-line

input/output function (for example, after being transferred from the PMC or converted from

a memory-card or Handy-File format file), or once processing has been terminated after

modifying the ladder program by using the on-line function.

[Results]0 When the CONTOL file has the most recent time stamp

+ Automatic compilation is performed.

[Applicable cases]

When no compilation is performed after the program is edited by using the off-line

function

etc

Q) When the MCARD file has the most recent time stamp

+ Automatic decompilation is performed.

[Applicable cases]

When no decompilation is performed after the program is transferred from the PMC by

using the off-line input;output function

When processing is terminated after the ladder program is edited by using the on-line

function

etc

in) When both files have the same time stamp

* Automatic start processing is not performed.

Al-l



APPENDIX 1 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

[Applicable cases]

. When comprlation is performed after the program is edited by using the off-line function

. etc

(Note) The options applied to automatic compilation or decompilation, started under the above

conditions, are those specified with [PROGRAM OPTION SETTING] of the off-line

function. Before attempting to select [ON-LINE FUNCTION], confirm the set options.

For details of how to set options, see Section 4.5.7.

Al -2



APPENDIX 2 CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE


2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “Oh%% FLSET. CNF”.

“%%%FLSET.CNF” is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by which the behavior

of FAPT LADDER is decided, are described there.

The file exits in the directory in which the system of FAPT LADDER is installed.

And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.

(Note) %%%FLSET.CNF contains the set values used to determine system operation. If data

in this file is not modified correctly, the functions described in this manual may not be

performed correctly. Do not, therefore, attempt to modify any data other than the items

described below.

(1) Sample of “%%%FLSET.CNF”

;=======================I==============================================

; FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File

; ( 'key word =' <= 9characters ).============r==============IPI-PIIPrPII=============================,

I

l ; ======== System information ======E=.

ierl=AOBB-9201-J503 Version 01.0;

rights=Copyrigth (C) 1991-1995 FANUC LTD.:

l : ======== System Setup ======E

:

editor =* Text Editor

,ladkey = 1;

;

Ladder editing key buffer size

( 1 <= ladkey <= 16 )

1:Check symbol

(level-l) for IEC standard

2:No check

I

l : ======== Utility Information =======

4 = UTILITY; Utility Guidance

,Fl = DOS / command.com; [Fl] Soft Key Guidance 61 EXE

F2 = flOadat / FLOADAT; [FZ] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

F3 = View result / FLVIEW.BAT %p.err; [F3] Soft Key Guidance h EXE

F4 =Linker / i_lipmcr-pf103400b.tbl; [F4] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

F5 =*

F6 =I

[F5] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

[F6] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

F7 =; [F7] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

F8 =; [FE] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

F9 =*

FlO=;

[F9] Soft Key Guidance h EXE

[FlO] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

:

[EOF]

A2 - 1




(2) Registering a command in the utility

(a) Function

A tool which is executed under DOS can be registered in the [UTILITY] function on the

initial or off-line menu.=

(b) Key word

(c)

Items “F5 = ” to “FlO = ” are displayed under “IJ; Utility Information11

For these items, describe the tool to be assigned to each function key. Do not modify

currently displayed characters, such as V and F5 =. If such a character is modified, the

system does not recognize the assignment.

Format

Tool name displayed on the utility screen

Characters to the right of : are assumed to be a comment.

w [Fl ] Soft key Guidance & EXE

Delimiter belween displayed name and command

Function key to which the tool is assigned

The maximum number of characters which can be used to specify the tool name and

registered tool are as follows:

. Tool name : 70 characters (or 35 double-byte characters)

. Registered tool : 40 characters

AZ-2



APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM


3.1 Differences from FAPT LADDER

(1) Source program types

FAPT LADDER supports three source program types: FORMAT-A, FORMAT-B, and FORMAT-C,

while FAPT LADDER-II supports only the FORMAT-C type.

ISupported source program type

FAPT LADDER model

FORMAT-A FORMAT-B FORMAT-C

FAPT LADDER (I(Note1) O(Note1) O(Note1)

FAPT LADDER-II X X 0

(Note 1) The supported source program types also vary with the PMC model. For details, refer

to the relevant FAPT LADDER manual.

SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OF FORMAT-C

0 FORMAT-C

This source program type is used on FAPT LADDER-II.

The FORMAT-C source program is organized by below files.

c A case of specifying “C: y DATA-Y PRG C” as source program >-

c: tc

data y

h

PRG Cy

-CONTROL

SYSPARAM

. TITLE

XSYMBOL.xxx

MESSAGE

IOMODULE

LEVEL1 .#LALEVEL2.#LA

LEVEL3.#LA

Pyyy.#LA

Pzzz.#SS

NETCMT.xxx

OPTION

-. MCARD

Source program managing file

System parameter data file

Title data file

Symbol & Comment data file

Message data file

l/O Module data file

(Note 1)

First level ladder data fileSecond level ladder data file

Third level ladder data file

Sub-program ladder data file

Sub-program step sequence data file

Net comment data file

Setting of option

Memory card format file

(Note 2)

(Note 3)

(Note 3)

(Note 1)

(Notel) ‘xxx’s number of multr file managrng.

(Note2) Only for use LEVEL3 ladder at PMC-RC4RC4(STEP).

(Note3) ‘yyy’, ‘IZZ’ is number of sub-program.

A3 - 1




0 FORMAT-A

This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.

The source program is managed using the following names. A single directory can contain

two or more source programs.

- xxxxxxxx.#CN : Ftle managtng user programs

- xxxxxxxx.#PA : File storing system parameters

- xxxxxxxx.#TA : File storing the title data

- xxxxxxxx.#SY : File storing symbols

- xxxxxxxx.#c1 : File storing comments

- xxxxxxxx.#C2 : File storing comments (reserve)

- xxxxxxxx.#ME : File storing messages

- xxxxxxxx.#l0 : File storing the I10 module data

- xxxxxxxx.#LA : File storing ladder

(xxxxxxxx is the specified source program name.)

0 FORMAT-B

This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.

A directory is created with the specified source program name. In the directory, the

program is managed under the following names. A single directory cannot contain two or

more source programs.

- CONTROL

- SYSPARAM

- TITLE

- SYMBOL

- COMMENT1

- COMMENT2

- MESSAGE

- IOMODULE

- LEVEL1 .#LA

LEVEL2.#LA

- LEVELX#LA

- PYYYYY.#LA

- PYYYYY.#SS

system parameters

the title data

symbols

comments

File storing

: Ftle managing the source program

File storing

File storing

File storing

File stonng

File storing

File storing

File storing

File storing

File storing

File storingFile storing

comments (reserve)

messages

the I10 module data

ladder of the first level

ladder of the second level

ladder of the third level

ladder subprogramsstep sequence subprograms

(yyyyy IS a subprogram number.)

143-2




(2) Elimination of ROM format files

FAPT LADDER supports ROM format object files. FAPT LADDER-II, however, does not use

ROM format files because an object file called an MCARD file (memory-card format file) is

added to the source program. The data flow is outlined below.

Some FAPT LADDER operating procedures require the input of ROM format files. FAPT

LADDER-II. however, does not require the input of ROM format files.

(a) FAPT LADDER

0 Compile @ Decompile

@ Output (in ROM format) @I Input (in ROM format)

(b) FAPT LADDER-II

External devices

CNC

Memory-card format file

Handy-File format file

m Compile @I Decompile

(3 Output (In object format) @I Input (in object

3.2 Conversion from FAPT LADDER

Because FAPT LADDER-II supports only FORMAT-C source files and does not support ROM

External devices

CNC

Memory-card format file

Handy-File format file

format)

format files, the following files must be converted before they can be used with FAPT LADDER-II.

Source file of other than the FORMAT-C type

ROM format file

Programs developed for use with FAPT LADDER can be converted for use with FAPT LADDER-II,

by applying any of the following methods:

(1) Conversion to a mnemonic file

A FAPT LADDER program can be converted to a FAPT LADDER-II program by first converting

It to a mnemonic file.

A3-3




Convert a program to a mnemonic file, using the FAPT LADDER mnemonic editing function,

then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(2) Conversion to a memory-card format fileA FAPT LADDER program can also be converted to a FAPT LADDER-If program by first

converting it to a memory-card format fi le.

Convert a program to a memory-card format fde, using [MEMORY CARD] of the FAPT

LADDER. input/output function then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(3) Conversion to a FORMAT-C source file

A FAPT LADDER program can also be converted to a FAPT LADDER-II program by first

converting it to a FORMAT-C source file.

Some FAPT LADDER models support FORMAT-C source files. Convert the source file type to

FORMAT-C, then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(4) Conversion of a ROM format file

FAPT LADDER-II can convert a ROM format file to a memory-card format file, as follows:

(a) Operation

0 Select [OFF-LINE FUNCTION] from the initial menu, then select F6 (I/O]. The [l/O]

screen appears.

@ Press the c F9> key on the (I.‘01 screen. The II/O (ROM FILE)] screen appears.

(Note) No item corresponding to the < F9> key is displayed on the [l/O screen.) The <F9>

key is, however, effective.

(@I Selecttng F2 [READ] displays the II0 (ROM FILE > MCARDI screen. Enter the

ROM file and rnemory card file names, then convert the file.

A3-4




Fl KEY WRITE ( Menory Card - > ROM FORMAT FILE 1

F2 KEY RERO ! Uemory Card c- ROM FORMl l FILE 1

Fig. 6.3.2 (a)

3.3 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program

By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC type sequence program to

another type of it.

3.3.1 Converting by system parameter editing

On the following PMC type, it IS possible to edit the different PMC type data by changing system

parameter of the mnemonrc data.

However, format of the system parameter. usable functional instructions and range of address are

different.

CNC TYPE PMC TYPE

Power Mate-MODEL D PMC-PA1 IPA3

FS IS-MODEL B PMC-NB/NB2

[Example: PMC-RB + PMCRC3]

(1) Set the PMC type to PMC-RB and convert the original source program to mnemonic file.

(2) Change the system parameter of the mnemonic file to PMC-RC3 with a standard text editor.

(3) Set the PMC type to PMC-RC3 on FAPT LADDER system and convert the mnemonic

frle( -+(2)) to source program.

A3 - 5




Original file (PMC-RB) Converted file (PMCRC3)

%@A %@A

%@O

2 BCD

3 NO

1

%@O

Change2 BCD

system parameter 3 NO

4 PMC-RB 4 PMC-RC3

7 100 5 000000

9 YES 6 50

% 7 100

%@l %

01 ABC-KIKAI %@l

02 S-DRILL 01 ABC-KIKAI

02 S-DRILL

%

%@5 %

x000 1 0 1 ID16C %@5

YO08 1 0 4 OD32A x000 1 0 1 IDlCC

% YO08 1 0 4 OD32A

%@E %

%@E

3.3.2 Convert with signal address converter

CONVERTER

FILE NAMEAPPLICABLE PMCCNC TYPE REFERENCE MATERIALS

FSOT CNV.SYM PMC-LjMIM(MMC) -+ PMCRAlIRA2IRAYRB FANUC PMC-

(FSO-T) lRB2/RB3’RB4’RB5’ PROGRAMMING MANUALRBG/RC/RC3/RC4

(FS16118/20-T)(LADDER LANGUAGE)

B-61 863EFSnM CNV.SYM PMC-L’MIM(MMC) + PMCRAl’RA2IRA3IRB

-(FSO-M) lRB2/RB3/RB4/RB51

RBG/RC’RC3/RC4

(FS16/18/20-M)

PM-C CNV.SYM PMC-P + PAliPA3-

(Power Mate (Power Mate

-MODEL C) -MODEL D’F’H)

(Note) The converter file is stored in the drrectory APPENDIX of module system floppy disk (Vol.

5).

A3-6




[Example: PMC -P -+ PMC -PA 1

(1)

(2)

Set PMC type to PMC -P. and convert the original source program to the mnemonic file. (+A.)

Set PMC type to PMC-PAl. And input the source program name and select [END] at edit

mode without editing the ladder program.

(3)

(4)

(5)

Convert the source program(2) to the mnemonic file. (-+B.)

Quit FAPT LADDER. and ac trvate any standard text editor.

(Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.)

Replace the symbol and comment data of the mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the converter file

(PM-CCNV). (-C.)

(6) Replace the ladder data of mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the ladder data of

mnemonic file (PMC-P). (+D.)

(7) Complete the text editor, and ac tivate FAPT LADDER.

(8) Set PMC type to PMC -PAl. and convert the mnemonic file(5) to source program.

(9) Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment data.

A. Original file

(PMC-P)

%@A

%@O

1 2048

%

%@l

%

%@2

%

%@3

RD X21.4

WRT 6121.4

RD.NOT X22.3

WRT.NOT 6122.3

SUB 1

SUB 2

WRT G121.4

RD.NOT X22.3

WRT.NOT 6122.3

SUB 1

SUB 2

b

b@E

Convert file

PM-C CNV.SYM-

%@2

G0004.3 G68.3

G0005.0 G95.0

60005.2 G95.2

60005.3 G95.3

60005.6 683.7

G0006.2 G75.2G0006.4 G74.4

G0007.2 668.2

60007.5 684.5

X1027.4 X23.4

X1027.5 X23.5

X1027.6 X23.6

X1027.7 X23.7

%D. insertron

, c

the original

B. Converted file

(PMC-PAl)

%@A

%@O

2 BINARY

3 NO

4 PMC-PA1

%

%@l

%

%@2

%

%@3

%

%@4

%

%@5

%

b@E

A3-7



APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF

3.3.3 Using data in a sequence program for another program

Data (such as title, symbol 8 comment, ladder, message, and 110 module data) in a sequence

SEQUENCE PROGRAM

program can be used for another sequence program, by the following method.

The range of addresses used varies from one model to another. They may have to be modified.

Refer to the programming manual of the respective models.

[Example : Using the symbols & comment data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]

%@A

%@O2 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC-RB7 100

9 YES

%

%@l

%@2

x000.0 2PX.M

x000.1 2PY.M

;I--

Insert

%

%@E

%@A

%@O

2 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC-RC35 000000

6 50

7 100

9 YES

%

%@l

%@2

x000.0 ZPX.M

x000.1 ZPY.M

%

Converting a step sequence program according to the model

Usually, mnemonics are used to convert a ladder program according to the model.

However, a ROM ftle is used only when a step sequence program for the PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ) is

converted for the PMCRC4(STEP SEC).

The operation, by which the source program C: ‘f DATA Y SAMPLER6 is converted to the source

program C: Y DATA ‘f SAMPLERC. is described as follows.

[Procedure]

Compile the step sequence program C: ‘f DATAY SAMPLERB for PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)

and create a object file. (Create C: Y DATAY SAMPLERB. MEM)

Create the new source program C: Y DATA? SAMPLERC.

The name of object file, which is creattng by (1.1, s change as follows from command line.

C: y > RENAME C: -Y DATA Y SAMPLERB C: Y DATA Y SAMPLERC

A3-8




3.4.1.1 Command input during startup

(1) Uploading

Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.

FLOADAT _ [name of file for storing uploaded data] _ -u (for IBM PC/AT)

When a file with the same name as the file specified for receiving data already exists in the

current directory. the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N >

(2)Downloading

Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232 port.

I

’LOADAT _ [name of file for storing downloaded data] _ -d (for IBM PC/AT)

As shown above, the load commands have the following two parameters:

-u: Uploads data from the P-G to the PC.

-d: Downloads data from the PC to the P-G.

(Note) The above parameters can be specified with either lowercase or uppercase characters.

3.4.1.2 Communications settings

PC side

IBM PC’AT senes MODE COMl: 4800,E.7,2

(PC DOS MODE command) MODE COMl: 9600,E,7.2 (for 9600 baud)

P-G side

IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG

IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG,BRlO (for 9600 baud)

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600. However, note that when the PC

baud rate is set to 9600. the parameter BRlO must be added to the baud rate setting

for the P-G.

It is necessary to set these communications setting only for doing this operation. After

using this function, please restore the communications settings as the section 2.1

(Chapter 1).

The CN number is not fixed. For the P-G or P-G Mark II, the CN number can be any setting from

CNl to CN4. For the P-G Mate, the CN number can be any setting from CNl to CN3. However,

note that the CN number selected here must match the CN number of the IO command. Use the

cables specified in Appendix 8.

A3-10




Operation example

During uploading

OperalIon procedure

-z PC > < PG z= Turn on power.

Example of input and screen contents

< PG > Enter IO command settings. ; IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG(,BRlO)

< PC > IBM PC/AT Series: Enter MODE i (See Section 2 of Communications

command settings. i Settings)

< PG > Store transmission data in P-G memory. : Press the [F2] key to select menu item

: no.2.

; FLOADAT FILENAME -u

< PC > Execute FLOADAT. Enters waiting slate. : < PC > “LOADER START” is displayed.

< PG > Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu. !

< PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the

submenu.

Beglns transmission. ; < PG > “EXECUTING” is displayed.

Zompletes transmission.

-z PG > Returns to the menu. i < PC > “Operation Complete” is displayed.

< PC > The message “Operation Complete” is j “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.

displayed, followed by the prompt “HIT j

ANY KEY”. Hit any key to end operation. :

During downloading

Operation procedure

c PC > < PG > Turn on power.

Example of input and screen contents

c PG > Enter IO command settings.

-z PC > IBM PC/AT series : Enter MODE

command setting

<PG > Turn on [Fl] key. Select no.2 on the

menu. Enters waiting state.

c PC > Execute FLOADAT.

3egins transmission.

Zompletes transmission.

< PG > Returns to the menu.

; IO NC,CNl ,(BRlO,)Fl ,F6

i (See Section 2 of Communications

_ Settings)

i c PG > “EXECUTING” is displayed.

; FLOADAT FILENAME -d

: -cPC > “Output Start” is displayed.

-z PC > The message “Operation Complete” IS ’ -ZPC > “Operation Complete” is displayed.

displayed, followed by the prompt “HIT j “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.

ANY KEY”. Hit any key to end operation.

A3-11




3.4.1.3 Protocol

Durinq uploadinq

When the FLOADAT command is executed on the PC side, a communications request is

issued for the P-G and reception begins. After all data has been received, DC 3 is sent and

transmission is completed.

0 DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmlssion request).

0 Data is received.

(Z$J Completion code is received and reception is completed.

@ DC 3 code is sent.

Transmisston and reception both use the l-byte machlne-dependent BIOS call for input and

output.

Durinq downloading

After the P-G issues a transmission request, the P-G enters the waiting state. FLOADAT is

activated in the PC, then transmission begins. After all data has been sent, DC 4 is sent and

transmission is completed.

0 The P-G issues DC 1.

8 DC 2 code is sent to the P-G

0 Data is sent.

@I DC 4 code is sent.

Transmlsslon and reception both use the l-byte machine-dependent BIOS call for input and

output.

3.4.1.4 BUSY control

When the transmtsslon speed is faster than reception processing, BUSY control is performed by

issuing the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. In the IBM PC/AT series, there is no X parameter, which

effectively has the same resull.

A3-12




3.4.1.5 Data start and end codes

The system WIII automatrcally determine which of the following seven pairs of start and end codes

is used. When none of these codes are used, an error message is displayed and operationterminates.

3.4.1.6 Data conversion (return codes)

(Note) The end codes

shown here must appear at

the beginning of a line. In

other words, strictly speaking,

a data reception end code is

actually denoted by the

sequence CR + LF + an end

code. End codes (% etc.)appearing within comments

are ignored.

(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received, it is converted into two characters, the first of which is CR

(ODH) followed by LF (OAH).

(2) When a CR code (ODH) IS recerved, it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) IS received, CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended to it in that order.

3.4.1.7 Transmission and receive data

Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.

- Discarded I Valid data -

After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, DC 3 is sent for uploading or DC 4 is sent for

downloading, then the file is closed.

A3-13




3.4.1.8 Error detection and messages

This software detects the following four types of errors.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

When there is an error in the command line

Error in the file name, -u. or -d.

Parameter Error

FLOADAT FILENAME -u/-d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)

When the specified file cannot be found

Output file cannot be found or file for receiving cannot be opened.

Cannot open output file

When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received

Wrong data received I .

When there is a definite problem with the start code,

Start Code error detected

or there is a definite problem with the end code

I nd code error detected I

This software only detects errors in the command line and in the FAPT LADDER format.

This software does not support detection of errors in the contents of FAPT LADDER data.

Messaqes

When the file name specified as the file for receivrng data already exists in the current directory,

the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <YIN >

A3 - 14




3.4.1.9 Error detection and handling

1. Incorrect entry found in the command line.

2. Specified file cannot be opened.

3. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.

The followrng causes can be considered for the above errors:

l The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).

l The start code has been omitted (%@‘, where l is A or 0 to 5. was omitted)

l Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.

l Garbage data exists between each unit of data.

l The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER format.

When any of the above errors is detected, the current operation is canceled.

During downloadrng, if an error is detected on the PC, the system will return to the DOS

screen. At the same time, a %, %@E or other end code is sent to the P-G to return rt to the

menu screen.

4. Others

l When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted(When the power to the PC or P-G is interrupted during operation, etc.)

When data transfer is interrupted during uploadrng, the system will enter a waiting state until

data transfer is restarted. (To interrupt the waiting state, press -z CTRL > + <C >).

When data transfer is Interrupted during downloading, the data becomes corrupt and data

transfer must be started over from the beginning.

A3-15



APPENDIX 4 STANDARD SYMBOL DATA

APPENDIX 4 STANDARD SYMBOL DATA

When a mnemonic file and the standard symbol data are combined, it is possible to use the

standard symbol name provided by FANUC.

CNC TYPE

FS16/18-T

FS16/18-M

Power Mate-MODEL D

Power Mate-MODEL H

DATA FILE NAME

F16&F18-T.SYM

FiG&F18-M.SYM

PM-D.SYM

PM-H.SYM

(Note) The standard symbol data is stored in the directory APPENDIX of system floppy (Vol. 5).

A4-1



APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)


This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing the message data incorporating sequence

program of FANUC PMCs .This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file.

The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data, if both message data

size are the same.

This tool is usefull when it is necessary to use some message data files in one ladder program.(For

example: Supporting multi-lingual message.)

< Method of Message size Check >

(1)

(2)

Memory map information IS output when the source program is compiled.

Please check each symbol top address of the original changing ladder and the ladder for

changing to be the same value.

This tool for changrng the message data execute with the “compare file”, then this tool

execute the same check of the message data size.

<Applied PMCs >

1.

(‘1

(2)

(3)

2.

FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3RB3’RB4!RB5/RB6’RC3/RC4INB/NB2

PROCEDURE OF THE MESSAGE DATA CHANGING

Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC by using the.memory card or

floppy disk on the PMC input/output operation ([l/O] screen).

Input the “CHGMES” command with the message data for changing and dummy ladderfile(handy file format).

The message data on the NC is changed by loadtng the output file of this tool on the PMC

input/output operation (I l/O] screen).

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

It IS necessary to use following operating environment for this tool.

(1)

(2)

Memory

235Kbytes or more main memory is required when activating this function without FAPT

LADDER.

Temporary files

This function generates following temporary files for work area on the drive/directory which

is set by environmental variable “TMP” of PC-DOS.

This function generate temporary files on the route directory of current drive when

environmental variable “IMP” is not set.

It is necessary to free max.65KBytes disk space for these temporary files.

$TMPD.T*, $TMPW.T* (n=oo-99)

(These temporary files are deleted by this functron automatically.)

A5 - 1




(3) Hard disk

It is necessary to use following disk space.

l For installation

l To generate temporary files(In case of environmental variable “TMP”

of PC-DOS set on hard disk)

68KBytes

65KBytes

TOTAL 133KBytes

3. INSTALLATION

Please copy EXE-FILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory from FAPT LADDER system floppy

disk(Vol.3).

Key in ‘* CHGMES” on the Installed directory, then following files are generated.

CHGMESEXE . ASC2lMG.EXE . IMG2ASC.EXE : Execute files (.EXE)

RB3DtJMMY.SFM. RB3BASIC.SFM . RB3MES.SFM : example files(.SFM)

Example files(.SFM) are used to confirm the installation of this function by activating example

command.

4. ACTIVATION

Key in following command at the DOS prompt activated in the utility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main

menu).

Or,Please change the directory in whrch this tool is installed.

(It is not necessary to change the directory when the “PATH” is set.)

Then key in followrng command.

CHGMES [INPUT FILE j [OUTPUT FILE] [PMC TYPE] ( [COMPARE FILE] ) <return >

INPUT FILE : :

OUTPUT FILE : :

PMC TYPE : :

COMPARE FILE : :

(Optional)

A handy fi le format file that consists of a dummy ladder and message data

to replace the message data in the basic message ladder file.

Create this file by compiling the source file and converting to a handy file

format file using FAPT LADDER.

A handy file format message file created by this tool.

This file contains only message data.

By loading this file to the CNC, message data in the CNC memorysubstituted.

can be

PMC TYPE (RAl or RAZ or RA3...etc.)

Please key in PMC TYPE that is defined c Applied PMCs > item.

Error will occur at key in other than applied PMCs.

Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)

Please refer to the Fig.“Operation outline”.

This tool compares message size of the “INPUT FILE” and the

“COMPARE FILE” to determine if there is a match. Then, you can

guarantee that only the message will be correctry replaced without

crashing other data when you load the ‘OUTPUT FILE’ to CNC.

A5-2




< Outline of Operation >

Basic message ladder Message for changing + Dummy ladder

VI t Generation, Editing -+ VI

+ + Check the SYMBOL top

COMPILATION address by memory map

display.

I INPUT/OUTPUT (F4:FLOPPY CASSETTE Handy File) I

FLOPPY

lb(Note)

El:CNC

shanging to message ROM data(Using this function)

1 1

CHGMES [In. file] [Out. file] (pmc type] ([Camp. file])

%l 1x2 %3

x2 J FLOPPY MEMORY CARD

I(Note)

Only message data for changing of ROM file

Loading at [l/O)screen operation of PMC.

(Note) It is possible to load by memory card only for FSlG-B, FS18-B, FS-20, FS21-B, and

FS15-B (PMC-NB).

Please refer to the following manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory

card or handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen.

FANUC PMC MODEL PAl/PAYRAl!RA2.!RA3/RBiRB2/RB4iRCiRC3/RC4/NB

PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B-61863E/06)

A5-3




5. USING EXAMPLE

Check the installation of this function by using the following example.

There are some sample files in FAPT LADDER system floppy disk for checking this function.

RB3DUMMY.SFM : : Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy file format)

(Message data (50KB) + Ladder (END1 + ENDZ))

RB3BASIC.SFM : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)

(Message data (50KB) + Ladder data + Symbol&Comment data)

RB3MES.SFM : : Data for checking the result (Message data(5OKB))

(‘1

(2)

(3)

(This file is a normal output file, when this tool execute for above

sample data. It is possible to check result by comparing “OUTPUT

FILE” and this file.)

Execute as the following (In this case the system is installed in marn

body.)

Please key in the following command.

A: Iy > CHGMES RB3DUMMYSFM USERTEST.SFM RB3 RB3BASIC.SFM < return >

You can specify any name for “OUTPUT FILE”.ln this example,“USERTEST.SFM” is used.

Following file is generated on current drive.

USERTEST.SFM (Message data (50KB))

Check the result by using “FC/A”(PC-DOS COMMAND).

A: M > FC/A USERTEST.SFM RB3MES.SFM

If “NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED” IS drsplayed. the result is correct.

6. ERROR MESSAGES

Message

chgmes : PMC type unmstch (pmc type)


PMC type does not match between applied

PMCs.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (input file) PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do

not match.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (compare file) PMC type of compare file and key in PMC

type do not match.

chgmes : Message sizes of (input file) and

(compare ftle) are mismatched

Message size of input file and compare file do

not agree. Please adjust the message size by

adding some dummy message to the input

file. Please confirm the MAP display on the

compile function of FAPT LADDER.

chgmes : Cannot start ASC2lMG ASC2lMG.EXE does not exist in the same

directory of CHGMES.EXE.

A5-4




Message

chgmes : Cannol start IMG2ASC


IMG2ASC.EXE does not exist in the same

directory of CHGMES.EXE.

chgmes : Cannot make temporary file

$tmpd.t”

chgmes : Cannot make temporary file

$tmwd.t”

chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t”

It is impossible to make temporary file.

Disk is insufficient.

. It is impossible to set the file name, because

$tmp’.tOO -$tmp’.t99 exist.

Temporary file can not be closed.

Please check the dtsk space.

asc2img : Cannot allocate memory (“bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB

or more memory, and re-activate.

asc2img : Conversion area in Input is

conflicted

asc2img : Unknown file type

Ladder header of the input file is crushed.

Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.

Illegal format of the Input file. Please change

the format, and re-activate.

asc2img : (input file) : Record No.* has There is an invalid data of input fi le.

Please correct as error message, and

reactivate.

asc2lmg : Cannot open file

asc2img : Cannot close file

There is no input file.

It is impossible to close the file.

Please check the disk space.

asc2img : Cannot wnte It is impossible to write the temporary file.


Img2asc : Cannot allocate memory (“bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB

or more memory, and re-activate.

img2asc : Cannot wrote It IS impossible to write the output file.


A5-5



APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY(FOR THE PMC-RAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY(FOR THE PMGRAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

If a CNC or off-line programmer operating on an upgraded edition is used to output a sequenceprogram to a memory card, the sequence program may not be able to be Input to a CNC or off-line

programmer operating on an earlier edition (see below).

Series 4080. edition 06

A08B-XXXX-J503. editions 01.1 and later

: ,. .,

-

-

II.,

Series 4080, editron 04

Series 4047, edition 01

Series 4054, edition 01

CNC

f

/’/’

I

I

/

,

I

I’.&’

,

,’

: Operating on an upgraded edrtion

: Operating on an earlier edition

-f- - : Unconditionally possible

+ - - - - - - -) : Possible under some condition

Cases ii) and (5) where input.‘output is possible under some condition, are explained below.

l Cases 0’) and (?!

output : No special operatton IS required.

Input : Use the BOOT SYSTEM to enter a sequence program

A6-1



APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

(1) Windows 3.1

0 SMARTDRV.EXE

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, pay attention to the following:

Enable write caching SMARTDRV.EXE

Be careful especially when the AUTOEXEC.BAT contains a command line of

SMARTDRV.EXE.

Wwtoml

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, the following symptom occurs.

l The following alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC writer, disabling

entry.

Alarm message : “Received data Invalid” (for the PC-9801)

“OVERRUN” (for the IBM/PC and compatible)

[Measure]

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for the following disk drives:

a. Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists

b. Drive where ROM format files are created

Example) When the FAPT LADDER system is on drive A, and a ROM format file is to becreated on drive B

SMARTDRV a b + disable write caching for drives A and B

Refer to the Microsoft Windows 3.1 Function Guide, supplied from Microsoft, for detailed

descriptions about how to use SMARTDRV.EXE.

A7 - 1



APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLES


Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer),

or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).

1. For IBM PC/AT

IBM PC/AT

25-pin female

connectorIBM PC/AT cable

CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

2. For IBM PSI2

IBM PS!2

CNC, ROM wnter, or P-G

A8 - 1




l On-line cable (AO8B-0031-K8OllK802)

SD

RD

RS

25-pin male

connectorcs

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

l IBM PC/AT cable

CD

RD

SD

g-pin female

connectorER

SG

6 6OR DR

RS

cs

Cl

2 2

4 4

1 I 5

20 20

7 7

1 1

1 8

2 3

3 2

4 20

5 7

7 4

8 5

9 22

SD

RD

RS

25-pin malecs connector

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

CD

RD

SD

25-pin femaleER connector

SG

RS

cs

Cl

A8-2



APPENDIX 9 INQUIRY FORM

APPENDIX 9 INQUIRY FORM

Companv name -

Person in charqe

Address

Section

Phone No. ( 1

Fax No. ( )

FANUC

sales person

No. Product name Ordering codeVersion Date of

No. purchase

1

2

3

4

[Usage environment]

Machine type used (PC) (Manufacturer: 1

DOS MS-DOS Version (Manufacturer: 1

EMS board: Yes I No (Manufacturer: 1

Other equipment (printer, etc.) (Manufacturer: J

Please print out the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form.

IDetails of inquiry]

Please use this form when you have any questlons about this product.

A9-1



Revision Record

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Eb66184EN)

02

. 456.6 Backup of user pro?

ram IS addedf 4.5.10 Selecttng On-Line unction from Off-Line

Apri. ‘96 Functton IS added4.6.3.2 Selecting Off-Line Function from On-Line

Function IS added4.6.4.7 Displaylng System InformatIon i s added

01 Jan. ‘96

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents



EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS - GRAND-DUCHk DE LUXEMBOURG

GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.

Zone Industrielle

L6469 Echternach

4 (+352) 727979- 1

I (+352) 727979-214

BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS CZECH REPUBLIC

GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.

- Netherlands Branch - c/o GETSCO Inc.

Postbus 7230 - NL.4800 GE Breda Husova 5

Minervum 1603A - NL.4817 ZL Breda CZ-110 00 Praha 1

4 (+31) 765783 201 (CNC)

= (+31) 765783 212 (PLC) = (+420) 22440 1284

I (+31) 765870 181 I (+420) 22440 1284

FRANCE GERMANY

GE Fanuc Automation France S.A. GE Fanuc Automation GmbH

45, rue du Bois Chaland Bernhauser StraBe 45

Lisses

F-91 029 Evry Cedex D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F= (+33) 1 69 89 70 39 (CNC) = (+49) 7158 187 400

4 (+33) 1 69 89 70 20 (PLC) I (+49) 7158 187 455 (CNC)

I (+33) 1 69 89 70 49 I (+49) 7158 187 466 (PLC)

GERMANY GERMANY

GE Fanuc Automation GmbH GE Fanuc Automation GmbH

Elberfelder Str. 45 Otto-Schmerbach-Str. 20

D-40724 Hilden D-091 17 Chemnitz

4 (+49) 2103 87011 (Laser/CNC)

= (+49) 2103 240 415 (PLC) = (+49) 371 8448 113 (CNC)

I (+49) 2103 87 160 (Laser/CNC) = (+49) 371 8448 114 (PLC)

I (+49) 2103 242 153 (PLC) I (+49) 371 8448 115

GERMANY SWEDEN

GE Fanuc Automation Deutschland GmbH GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB

Bensheimer Str. 61 Hammarbacken 4

D-65428 Russelsheim S-l 9149 Sollentuna

4 (+49) 6142 357600 4 (+46) 8 444 5520

I (+49) 6142 357611 I (+46) 8 444 552 1

ITALY ITALY

GE Fanuc Automation Italia S.r.1. GE Power Controls Italia S.p.a

Piazza Tirana 24/4B Via Tortona 27

I-201 44 Milan0 I-201 44 Milan0

4 (+39) 2 417 176 (CNC) = (+39) 2 4242 280 (PLC)

I (+39) 2 419 669 (CNC) I (+39) 2 4242 511 (PLC)

SPAIN SPAIN

GE Fanuc Automation Espana S.A. GE Power Controls Iberica S.A.

Poligono Industrial Olaso Calle Mifio, S/N

Calle Olaso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11 E-08223 Terrassa (Barcelona)

E-20870 Elgoibar = (+34) 3 736 58 28 (PLC)

= (+34) 43 744 450 (CNC) I (+34) 3 783 45 82 (PLC)

I (+34) 43 744 421 (CNC)

SWITZERLAND UNITED KINGDOM

GE Fanuc Automation GE Fanuc Automation (UK) Ltd.

Filiale Suisse/Niederlassung Schweiz Unit 1 - Mill Square

MullerstraBe 3 Featherstone Road

CH-2562 Port Wolverton Mill South

4 (+41) 32 332 87 00 (CNC) Milton Keynes MK12 5BZ= (+41) 32 332 87 04 (PLC) = (+44) 1908 84 4000

I (+41) 32 332 87 01 (CNC)

I (+41) 32 332 87 05 (PLC) I (+44) 1908 84 400101/98



TECHNICAL REPORT No.TMN98/136E

Date Nov.16,1998

General Manager of

Software Laboratory

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE OPERATOR’S MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to:

○ Your information

○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E

FANUC Robotics

CINCINNATI MILACRON

○ Machine tool builder

Sales agency

End user

2. Summary for Sales Documents

3. Notice

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE

4. Attached Document

Drawing

No.

B-62884EN/01-4（01/67 to 67/67）

5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List)

Type of data

No. FLS1-98/B087

November.16.1998

IDEOri inal section of issue

Mana er Person in

charge

V.G.M.



FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING

PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

01 98.11.13 Ino New making B-62884EN/01-4

EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 1/67

TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents

NameFANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Spec.No./Ed. B-62884EN/01

Summary of Change

Group Name/Outline

New, Add,

Correct,

Delete

Applicable

Date

Basic

Function

Working under a Command Prompt of a full

screen of WindowsNT4.0

Functional instruction PSGNL and PSGN2

(Only for PMC-SB5/SB6 for

Power Mate i-D/H)

Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

Add J uly.1998

or later

Optional

Function

Unit

MaintenanceParts

Notice

Correction

Another





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.



Contents

1. Outline.......................................................................................................................................32. Applied Software.......................................................................................................................33. Full screen display of a Command Prompt of Windows NT4.0...................................................4

3.1 Operating Environment.......................................................................................................43.2 Installation..........................................................................................................................5

4. Functional Instruction PSGNL / PSGN2.....................................................................................5

5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC......................................................................................................65.1 Outline................................................................................................................................65.2 Operating Environment.......................................................................................................65.3 The Contents of Package...................................................................................................75.4 Installation and Uninstallation.............................................................................................85.5 Operation.........................................................................................................................14





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

1. OutlineThe following function of Ladder Editing Package has been added.

・ Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of WindowsNT4.0・ Functional instruction PSGNL and PSGN2 (Power Mate i–D/H)

・ Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions.Other explanation (existign functions and operation,etc.) are described in the followingmanual.

Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference ItemsFANUC OPEN CNCLADDER EDITING PACKAGEOPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-62884EN Operation forLadder Editing Package

2. Applied SoftwareThe additional functions described herein apply to the following software.

・ Ladder Editing PackageName Specification Version

Ladder Editing Package A08B-9201-J 510 3.0 or later

・ PMC Control Software(Power Mate i–D/H )

Software Series Version

PMC-SB5/SB6 control software 407B 02(B) or laterLADDER EDITING CARD 407D 01(A) or later





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3. Full screen display of a Command Prompt of Windows NT4.03.1 Operating Environment(Correct a part of the “2.1 Operating environment”)[present]

～

OS ・Microsoft Windows95 (Note1)・DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate J apanese/English system)・DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)

～

[correction]～

OS ・Microsoft Windows95 (Note1)・Microsoft Windows NT4.0 (Note7)・DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate J apanese/English system)・DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)

～

(Add “7.” in “Notes” of “2.1 Operating environment”)7. When using this software under Windows NT4.0, please note the following items.

a) Please install the software after referring to “2.3.1 Registering the software inWindows [Programs] menu.

b)Please install “Service Pack 3” software. Please get this “Service Pack3” fromMicrosoft Corporation.

c)Please define “ANSI .SYS” in the CONFIG file (config.nt) for WindowsNT4.0.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3.2 Installation(Correct a part of the “3.2 Installation”)[present]

2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95 [Programs] menu. ・・・

[correction]2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu.

・・・

4. Functional Instruction PSGNL / PSGN2I t is possible to program the following functional instructions in PMC-SB5/SB6 of

Power Mate i-D/H

a) PSGNL functional instruction (Position signal output)

b) PSGN2 functional instruction (Position signal output 2)





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC5.1 Outline(Add after “4. Error message list”)5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

5.1 OutlineLadder Printer Tool for PMC is a print software of a sequence program which worksunder Windows95/NT4.0. This software is able to print a source program (FORMAT-Ctype) by various forms according to the print setting. This software also has previewfunction.

5.2 Operating Environment(Correct a part of the “2.1 Operating environment”)[present]

～

Printer EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note6)～

[correction]～

Printer [Print (Off-line function)]EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note6)[Ladder Printer Tool for PMC]Printer which can be added by [Printers] of Windows (Note8)

～

(Add “8.” in “Notes” of “2.1 Operating environment”)8. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is an application software for Windows95/NT4.0.

For details, refer “5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC”.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3 The Contents of Package(Replace the “2.2 The Contents of Package”)2.2 The Contents of Package

The Ladder Editing Package is stored in 9 floppy disks listed below.The media size is 3.5 inch 2HD (1.44MB). Please confirm contents.(1) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.1) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-1(2) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.2) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-2(3) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.3) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-3(4) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.4) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-4(5) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.5) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-5(6) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.6) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-6 (Note1)(7) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.7) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-7 (Note1)(8) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.8) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-8 (Note1)(9) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.9) / A08B-9201-J 510#ZZ07-9 (Note1)

(Note1) Vol.6～Vol.9 are disks for Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. Details on each disk areas follows.

Vol.6 Setup disk for J apanese versionVol.7 Setup disk for English versionVol.8 Ladder Printer Tool for PMC (1)Vol.9 Ladder Printer Tool for PMC (2)





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.4 Installation and Uninstallation(Replace (12) in the “2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu”)(12) Upon the completion of installation, the Ladder Editing Package is registered in the

[Programs] menu and the following screen is displayed. If you want to install continuouslythe Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, click [OK] button. I f you don’t want to install this tool,click [Cancel] button. When [Cancel] button is clicked, the installation terminates.

[Note]1. The configuration of the directory in which the Ladder Editing Package has beeninstalled cannot be modified.

2. When installing the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC at WindowsNT4.0, a privilege forAdministrator is needed.

(Add (13), (14) in the “2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu”)(13) When you install the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, the following dialog is displayed.

Set a specified disk and click [OK ] button.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(14) The installer of the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts. Please input the following itemsaccording to the instruction dialog and install this software.

(a) Registration Information (Name, Company )(b) Installation Directory(c) Program Folder

Please refer to “5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC” for details.

(Add after “5.1 Outline” in “5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC”)5.2 Installation and Uninstallation

Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is able to be installed from the setup disk for thissoftware. (Vol.6 : For J apanese or Vol.7 : For English)

[Note]1. When installing the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC at WindowsNT4.0, a privilege forAdministrator is needed.

5.2.1 Starting installer(1) Set the setup disk (Vol.6 : For J apanese or Vol.7 : For English) in a floppy disk

drive. (this example is a case to set it in drive A.)(2) Execute “Setup.exe”. The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.2.2 Operating installationThe installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is basically advanced according to followingprocedures.

1) Installer start2) License contract confirmation3) User registration4) User registration confirmation5) Installation directory selection6) Program folder selection7) Installation information confirmation8) Program copy9) Installation completion

A main operation of installation is described as follows.(1) User registration

Specify your name and the company name. The number of maximum characters of thename and company name is 40 characters. I f you don’t input either the name or the

company name, [Next] button becomes invalid. Please input both items. After inputoperation ends, click [Next] button. In default, the name and the company name of theuser registration of Windows are displayed.

Fig. 5.2.2.1 User registration screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(2) Installation directory selectionSpecify the installation directory. When you want to install in another directory,click [Browse] button. The directory selection screen is displayed and the installationdirectory can be input or can be chosen. After you specify the installation directory,click [Next] button. Default directory is “(SystemDirectory)\ Program Files\ LadderPrinter Tool”.

Fig. 5.2.2.2 Installation directory selection screen

Fig. 5.2.2.3 Directory selection screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(3) Program folder selectionSpecify the program folder. I f the specified folder does not exist, new folder is created.After you specified the folder, click [Next] button. Default folder is “FAPT LADDER-I I”.

Fig. 5.2.2.4 Program folder selection screen

Please perform other operations of the installation according to the questions instructedby the installer.

5.2.3 Configuration after installation(1) Directory configuration

The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC automatically makes the followingsub-directories under the specified directory(For example “C:\ PRTTOOL”).C:\ PRTOOL – ENG (or J PN)

There are files of the help and the resource, etc. in this sub-directory.

[Note]Don’t delete the above-mentioned directory except uninstallation of this tool.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(2) Dynamic Link Library (DLL) filesMost of system files of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC are installed in the specifieddirectory. But the following DLL files are installed in the system directory of Windows(For example : C:\ Winnt40\ system32).

a) Mfc40.dllb) Msvcrt40.dll

[Note]Don’t delete the above-mentioned files except uninstallation of this tool.

(3) Program Folder and ShortcutWhen installing this tool, the following program folder and shortcut are made.The program folder name is specified by the installation of this tool.(Default name : “FAPT LADDER-I I”)Two shortcuts are made as follows.

a) [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC]

This is a shortcut for starting Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.b) [Uninstall Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] (Note1)

This is a shortcut for uninstallation of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

[Note]1. This shortcut is made only when installing at WindowsNT4.0.

(4) RegistryWhen installing Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, the information of this tool is writtenin the registry of Windows.

5.2.4 UninstallationThis tool has the function of uninstallation. When you execute the uninstaller, the files,the folder, the registry, and the program folder, etc. made by the installer are deleted.Uninstaller is started according to the following procedures.(1) Common operations of WindowsNT4.0 and Windows951)Select [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] on “Add/Remove Program Properties” of thecontrol panel. And click [Add/Remove] button.

2)After a confirmation dialog box is displayed, click [Yes] button. The uninstaller starts.(2) Only operations of WindowsNT4.0Another operation to start the uninstaller is to select [Uninstall Ladder Printer Toolfor PMC] on the program folder.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.5 Operation(Add after “5.2 Installation and uninstallation” in “5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC”)

5.3 Operation5.3.1 Start

Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts when selecting “PMCLDPRT.exe” in the directory atwhich the this tool is installed with the Explorer etc., or selecting the shortcut of this tool.And an initial menu is displayed.

5.3.2 TerminationTo terminate Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, click the close button of the application window,or select the [Close] of the control menu, or select the [Exit] of the “File” menu on the initialmenu or the program opening menu.

5.3.3 Menu configurationThe configuration of menu, which this tool displays, is as follows.(1) Initial menu

Fig. 5.3.3.1 Menu configurationchart

Initial menu View

Status Bar

Tool Bar

Help Topic

Version

File Open Program

Exit





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(2) Program opening menu

Program openingmenu View

Help

File

Status Bar

Tool Bar

Help

Version

(1) Refer to Fig. 5.3.3.2(b)

Fig. 5.3.3.2(a) Menu configuration chart

File

Open Program

Exit

Fig. 5.3.3.2(b) Menu configuration chart

Close Program

Print

Preview

Printer





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.4 Example of basic operation when printingThe following example shows a basic operation of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC from thebeginning to print “Title Data” and “Ladder Diagram” of program name “RB4_SFC”.[Operation](1) Start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMCLadder Printer Tool for PMC starts when selecting “PMCLDPRT.exe” in the directoryat which the this tool is installed with the Explorer and etc., or selecting the shortcut of this tool. And an initial menu is displayed.

Fig. 5.3.4.1 Initial menu screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(2) Open the file (Selecting the program)1) Select [Open Program] of the [File] menu.

Fig. 5.3.4.2 [File] menu screen

2) Specify the program name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting theprogram name which you want to open (a program name which you want to print) orselecting the folder of the program which you want to open (a program which youwant to print) on the following screen, click [Open] button. If you select a folder(directory) of a sequence program, the program is automatically opened. In this case,the folder of "RB4_SFC” is selected.

Fig. 5.3.4.3 Program selection screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3) When the program is selected, the program-opening screen is displayed.

Fig. 5.3.4.4 Program-opening screen

(3) Print1) Click [Print] button of the print preview toolbar displayed in the upper part of the

program-opening screen.

[Print] button

Fig. 5.3.4.5 Print preview toolbar





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

2) When clicking [Print] button, the print dialog is displayed. Click [Option] buttonwhen you want to set print options. Click [Printer] button when you want to setprinter items. Refer to “5.3.8 Print screen” or “5.3.9 Printer set screen” for details.

Fig. 5.3.4.6 Print dialog screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3) Choose items which you want to print. In this case, click [Select] button of “PrintData” group, first, then choose “Title Data” and “Ladder Diagram” which are to beprinted.

Fig. 5.3.4.7 Selection item screen (1)





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

4) Erase the check marks other than “Title Data” and “Ladder Diagram”.

Fig. 5.3.4.8 Selection item screen (2)





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5) When clicking [OK] button, the print starts. When you want to discontinue whileprinting, click [Cancel] button of the printing screen.

Fig. 5.3.4.9 Printing screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.5 Initial menuThe initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of LadderPrinter Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are threemenus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu.Select [F ile] to open the program.Select [View] to switch to show and hide toolbar or status bar.Select [Help] to refer to help and version information.

Before specifying any program in the initial menu, [Print] button of toolbar becomesinvalid and cannot be clicked. Refer to “5.3.10 Toolbar” for details of toolbar.

Fig. 5.3.5 Initial menu screen

5.3.5.1 FileThe [File] menu has menus for specifying print program and for terminating LadderPrinter Tool for PMC.

Fig. 5.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(1) Open ProgramOpen a printing program. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the programname is selected.

Fig. 5.3.5.1 Program selection screen

Specify the program name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputtinga program name which you want to print, click [Open] button. Click [Cancel] buttonto discontinue opening the program.

(2) ExitExits Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.5.2 View[View] menu is a menu related to the display of toolbar and status bar.

Select [Tool Bar] to switch to show and hide toolbar.Select [Status Bar] to switch to show and hide status bar.

Fig. 5.3.5.2 [View] menu screen

(1) Tool BarSwitch to show or hide the toolbar. Toolbar includes buttons for some of most commoncommands in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. A check mark appears next to the menuitem when the toolbar is shown. Refer to “5.3.10 Toolbar” for details of toolbar.

(2) Status BarSwitch to show or hide the status bar. Status bar describes the action to be executed bythe selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard Latch State. A check

mark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is shown. Refer to “5.3.11Status Bar” for details of status bar.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.5.3 Help[Help] menu is a menu related to help and version information.Select [Topic] to refer to help and to retrieve the topic.Select [Version] to refer to version information.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(a) [Help] menu screen

(1) TopicUse this command to display the opening screen of Help. An index to topics, on whichyou can get help, is offered to you. F rom the opening screen, you can jump to step-by-

stepinstructions for using Ladder Printer Tool for PMC and to various types of referenceinformation. Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you wantto return to the opening screen.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(b) Help Topics screen

(2) Version The version number of this application is displayed. The copyright notice and version

number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is displayed. When returning tothe menu screen, click [OK ] button.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(c) Version information screen 5.3.6 Program Opening Menu

Program Opening Menu is a menu in the state that the program is selected. There are





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in Program Opening Menu.Select [F ile] to operate functions related to files and printing.Select [View] to switch to show and hide toolbar or status bar.Select [Help] to refer to the help and version information.When specifying the program, [Print] button from the toolbar can be clicked. Refer to“5.3.10 Toolbar” for details of toolbar.

Fig. 5.3.6 Program Opening Menu screen

5.3.6.1 File [File] menu is a menu to operate functions related to files and printing.

Select [Open Program] to open an existing program.Select [Close Program] to close the program which is opened now.Select [Print] to print and to set the print option data.

Select [Preview] to display the document on the screen as it would appear on theprinted document.Select [Printer] to select a printer and printer connection setting.

Fig. 5.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening)

(1) Open Program





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Close a program which is opened now and open a new program. File dialog isdisplayed as a screen where the program name is specified. Refer to “(1) Open Programin 5.3.5.1 File” for details.

(2) Close ProgramClose a program, which is opened now. After closing the program, the menu becomesan initial menu.

(3) Print The sequence program is printed, and the option of the print item is set, and theprinter is set. Print dialog screen is opened. Refer to “5.3.8 Print screen” for details.

(4) PreviewDisplays the document on the screen as it would appear on printed document. The

mainwindow will be replaced with a print preview window in which one or two pages will bedisplayed in their printed format. Refer to “5.3.7 Preview screen” for details of preview.

(5) PrinterSelects a printer and set various items. Print setting dialog is displayed.Refer to “5.3.9 Printer set screen” for details.

(6) ExitExits Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.6.2 View[View] menu is a menu related to the display of toolbar and the display of statusbar.Select “Tool Bar” to switch display and hide of toolbar.Select “Status Bar” to switch display and hide of status bar.

(1) Tool BarSwitch to show or hide the toolbar. Toolbar includes buttons for some of mostcommon commands in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. A check mark appears next tothe menu item when the toolbar is shown. Refer to “5.3.10 Toolbar” for details of toolbar.

(2) Status BarSwitch to show or hide the status bar. Status bar describes the action to be executed bythe selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard Latch State. A checkmark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is shown. Refer to “5.3.11Status Bar” for details of status bar.

5.3.6.3 Help[Help] menu is a menu related to the help and version information.Select [Help] to refer to the help.Select [Version] to refer to version information.

Fig. 5.3.6.3(a) [Help] menu screen (Program opening)





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(1) HelpOffers you a help of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. From the opening screen, you can

jump to step-by-step instructions for using Ladder Printer Tool for PMC andvarious

types of reference information.Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you want to

returnto the opening screen.

Fig. 5.3.6.3(b) Help screen

(2) VersionThe version number of this application is displayed. The copyright notice and versionnumber of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is displayed. When returning to

the menu screen, click [OK] button.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.7 Preview Screen (Program opening screen)When selecting [Preview], the preview screen is displayed. When opening the programspecified with [Program Open], [Title] preview of the program is displayed.

The preview toolbar offers you options to view either one or two pages at a time; to moveback and forth through the document; to zoom in and out of pages; and to initiate a print

job. When selecting [Title] and [Ladder] and etc. button of the print item on toolbar, thePreview screen corresponding to the button is displayed.

The print item not selected by print dialog cannot preview, and the print item which dosenot correspond by PMC model cannot be previewed.

Fig. 5.3.7 Preview screen (Program opening screen)





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Details of each button are as follows.

Tool OperationBring up the print dialog box, to start a print job.Preview the previous printed page.

Preview the next printed page.Preview one or two printed pages at a time.Zoom in the printed page.Zoom out the printed page.Return from print preview to the editing window.

Display Preview of “Title Data”.Display Preview of “System Parameter”.Display Preview of “Symbol Comment”.Display Preview of “Ladder Diagram”.Display Preview of “Step Sequence Diagram”.

Display Preview of “I/O Module Data”.Display Preview of “Message Data”.Display Preview of “Cross Reference”.Display Preview of “Bit Address Map”.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[OK] Button Begins the print.[Cancel] Button Discontinue printing.[Option] Button Set the option concerning the print data. When this

button is selected, the print option set dialog isdisplayed.

[Printer] Button Do the printer setting and the print setting. When thisbutton is selected, the printer set dialog is displayed.

5.3.8.2 Title Data printSet the option of the Title Data print.

Fig. 5.3.8.2 Title Data print option screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Details of each item are as follows.[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.

[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Title Data print. The integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when theframe print is specified. A title and a sub title can bespecified up to 60 characters.

[Title] Specify the title of the Title Data print. I n default,“Title Data” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Title Data print. The characterstring is not set in default.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the TitleData print. This button is effective when any print itemis selected.

[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set

dialog.[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print

option set dialog.[Help] Button Refer to help of the Title Data print option.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.8.3 System Parameter printSet the option of the System Parameter print.

Fig. 5.3.8.3 System Parameter print option screen


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the System Parameterprint. The integer value can be set. I n default, “1” is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when theframe print is specified. A title and a sub title can bespecified up to 60 characters.

[Title] Specify the title of the System Parameter print.In default, “System Parameter” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the System Parameter print. Any

character string is not set in default.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of theSystem Parameter print. This button is effective whenany print item is selected.

[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print optionsetting dialog.

[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the printoption setting dialog.

[Help] Button Refer to help of the System Parameter print option.

5.3.8.4 Symbol & Comment printSet the option of the Symbol & Comment print.

Fig. 5.3.8.4 Symbol & Comment print option screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Symbol & Commentprint. The integer value can be set. I n default, “1” is set.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frameprint is specified. A title and a sub title can be specifiedup to 60 characters.

[Title] Specify the title of the Symbol & Comment print. Indefault, “Symbol & Comment” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Symbol & Comment print. Anycharacter string is not set in default.

[Page Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.[All] All are printed.[L ine No.] Specify the range of the line number, which you want

to print.

[Page No.] Specify the range of the page number, which you wantto print.

[Comment] Group Select the kind of comment. In default, [Relay Comment]is checked.

[Relay Comment] Specify to print only the relay comment.[Coil Comment] Specify to print only the coil comment.[Relay Comment/Coil Comment] Specify to print both the relay comment and the

coil comment.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the

Symbol & Comment print. This button is effective whenany print item is selected.

[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option setdialog.

[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the printoption set dialog.

[Help] Button Refer to help of the Symbol & Comment print option.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram printSet the option of the Ladder Diagram print.

(1) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.5(a) Ladder Diagram print option screen


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Ladder Diagram to beprinted. An integer value can be set. I n default, “1” is set.


[Title] Specify the title of the Ladder Diagram print. I n default,

“Ladder Diagram” is set.[Sub Title] Specify the title printed with the Ladder Diagram. Anycharacter string is not set in default.

[Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.[All] All are printed.[Net No.] Specify the range of the net, which you want to print.[Page No.] Specify the range of the page, which you want to print.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[Print Program] Group Set printing Ladder Program. In default, [All] is checked.[All] All are printed.[Unit] Print specified subprogram. I nput the subprogram name

which you want to print, or select the subprogram namefrom combo box.

[Relay/Coil] Group Specify the data printed for each contact. In default,[Symbol] is checked.

[Symbol] Print the symbol data of contact.[Relay Comment] Print the relay comment data of contact.

[Page Feed(Sub Program)] Specify the presence of form feed for each subprogram.Default is no form feed.

[Cross Reference] Specify the presence of cross reference. Default is nocross reference.

[Details…] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Ladder Diagram print. The Ladder Diagram detailed setting dialog is displayedwhen selecting. Refer to “2 Ladder Diagram print optiondetailed screen” for details.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of theLadder Diagram. This button is effective when any printitem is selected.



[Help] Button Refer to help of the Ladder Diagram print option.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Fig. 5.3.8.5(b) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Step No.] Specify the presence of the step number. Default is

checked.[Net No.] Specify the presence of the net number. Default is

checked.

[Line] Group Specify the space between l ines in the net. In default,[Narrow] is checked.

[Narrow] Print the lines of the net with narrow space.[Wide] Print the lines of the net with wide space.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.8.6 Step Sequence Diagram printSet the option of the Step Sequence Diagram print. As for the PMC model which doesn’tcorrespond to the step sequence, this page is not displayed. Moreover, the PMC modelthat corresponds to the step sequence is not displayed if there is no step sequence fileeither.

Fig. 5.3.8.6 Step Sequence Diagram print option screen


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Step SequenceDiagram print. An integer value can be set. I n default,“1” is set.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


[Title] Specify the title of the Step Sequence Diagram print. I ndefault, “Step Sequence Diagram” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Step Sequence Diagram print. Anycharacter string is not set in default.

[Print Program] Group Select Step Sequence Program to be printed. In default,[All] is checked.

[All] All are printed.[Unit] Print selected subprogram. I nput the subprogram name,

which you want to print or select the subprogram namefrom combo box.

[Sub Program No.] Specify the presence of the print of the sub programnumber. Default is checked.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the StepSequence Diagram print. This button is effective whenany print item is selected.



[Help] Button Refer to help of the Step Sequence Diagram print option.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.8.7 I/O Module Data printSet the option of the I/O Module Data print.

Fig. 5.3.8.7 I /O Module Data print option screen


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the I /O Module Data.An integer value can be set. I n default, “1” is set.


[Title] Specify the title of the I/O Module Data. I n default,“I /O Module” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the I /O Module Data. Any character

string is not set in default.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[Print Channel] Group Specify the print channel. Only when the PMC model isPMC-QC, it is possible to set this item. This group is notdisplayed for another model.

[1 Channel] Print the first channel. Default is checked.[2 Channel] Print the second channel. Default is checked.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of the I/OModule Data print. This button is effective when anyprint item is selected.



[Help] Button Refer to help of the I /O Module Data print option.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.8.8 Message Data printSet the option of the Message Data print. When the PMC model is PMC-QC, thispage is not displayed because there is no message file.

Fig. 5.3.8.8(a) Message Data print option screen


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Message Data.An integer value can be set. I n default, “1” is set.


[Title] Specify the title of the Message Data. I n default,“Message” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Message Data. Any characterstring is not set in default.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.[All] All are printed.[Address] Specify the range of the address, which you want to

print. Refer to “Table 5.3.8.8(b)” for the specification of range.

[Page No.] Specify the range of the page, which you want to print.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of theMessage Data print. This button is effective when anyprint item is selected.



[Help] Button Refer to help of the Message Data print option.

Table 5.3.8.8(b) Specification of address of Message DataAddress specificationKind

Example of keyinput

Output address

Bit Address A5.0 Only the specified bit address

Byte Address A4 Specified Byte Address and BitAddress in a range of 0-7.

Address rangeSpecification

A2.3-A5.7 All addresses within the specifiedRange





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.8.9 Cross Reference printSet the option of the Cross Reference print.

(1) Cross Reference print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.9(a) Cross Reference print option screen


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Cross Reference.An integer value can be set. I n default, “1” is set.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


[Title] Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. I n default,“Cross Reference” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Anycharacter string is not set in default.


print. Refer to “Table 5.3.8.9(b)” for the specification of range.

[Address Kind] Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified.

[Comment] Group Specify the printed comment. In default,[Relay Comment] is checked.

[Relay Comment] Print the relay comment.[Coil Comment] Print the coil comment.

[Double Check] Specify whether the checking of writing the coil doublyand the double use of the function instruction isexecuted.Default is not checked.

[Details…] Button Specify a detailed setting for the Cross Reference. The

Cross Reference print detailed setting dialog is displayedwhen selecting. Refer to “(2) Cross Reference print optiondetailed screen” for details.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and preview the CrossReference. This button is effective when any print item isselected.



[Help] Button Refer to help of the Cross Reference print option.

Table 5.3.8.9(b) Specification of address of Cross Reference print table

Address specificationKind

Example of keyinput

Output address

Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address

Byte Address X10 Specified byte address(Contain the bit address)





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Addressrange specification

F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within thespecified range

F10.5-F10 To the specified byte addressfrom the specified bit address

(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

Fig. 5.3.8.9(c) Cross Reference print option detailed screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Details of each item are as follows.[Print Guidance] Group Set a guidance/sub guidance of the output form. The

guidance/sub guidance can be specified up to 19characters.

[Guidance] Set a guidance of the output form. In default,“STEP NO./NET NO.” is set.

[Sub Guidance] Set a sub guidance of the output form. Any characterstring is not set in default.

[Print Information] Group Set the printed step/net number.[Step No.] Print the step number. Specify it the step number is

printed and the first character. [Step No.] is checked indefault and [Top Char] is “S”.

[Net No.] Print the net number. Specify it the net number isprinted and the first character. [Net No.] is checked indefault and [Top Char] is “N”.

[Print No. Type] Set the number print form. In default, “Step No./Net No.”

is set.

[Coil Guidance] Group Set the coil guidance. In default, [Ladder DiagramGraphics] is checked.

[Ladder Diagram Graphics] Print by the graphic same as the ladder diagram.[User Define String] Print by the character string, which the user defined.

The following four can be defined, when [User DefineString] is selected. Four all can be specified up to 13characters.

[Read] Specify the character string to indicate the reference byRead contact. I n default, “Read” is set.

[Write] Specify the character string to indicate the reference byWrite contact. I n default, “Write” is set.

[Set] Specify the character string to indicate the reference bySet contact. I n default, “Set” is set.

[Reset] Specify the character string to indicate the reference byReset contact. In default, “Reset” is set.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[Line Feed Count] Specify the number of line feed inserted between theaddresses. A value of 0-9 can be specified.In default, “1” is set.

[Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kindsof address. Default is checked.

5.3.8.10 Bit Address Map printSet the option of the Bit Address Map.

(1) Bit Address Map print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.10(a) Bit Address Map print option screen





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Bit Address Mapprint. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set.


[Title] Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. I n default,“Bit Address Map” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Anycharacter string is not set in default.


print. Refer to “Table 5.3.8.10(b)” for the specification of

range.[Address Kind] Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print.

The plural items can be specified.[Using Address] Print only the address used. Default is checked.

[Details…] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Bit Address Map print. The Bit Address Map print detailed set dialog isdisplayed when selecting. Refer to “2 Bit Address Mapprint option detailed screen” for details.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and preview the BitAddress

Map print. This button is effective when any print itemisselected.



[Help] Button Refer to help of the Bit Address Map print option.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Table 5.3.8.10(b) Specification of address of Bit Address Map print table


Example of keyinput

Output address


Byte Address X10 Specified byte address

(Contain the bit address)AddressRange specification

F10.0-F12.7 All addresses withinthe specified range

F10-F20 All addresses withinthe specified range

(2) Bit Address Map print option detailed screen

Fig, 5.3.8.10(c) Bit Address Map print option detailed screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds

of the addresses. Default is checked.

[Use Address Mark] An arbitrary sign can be set in the used address mark.Specify one character. In default, “@” is set.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.8.11 Common ItemSet the option of a Common Item.

Fig. 5.3.8.11 Common I tem option set screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Guidance Message Language] Group Specify the guide message language whenthe title and the system parameter areprinted. [First Language] is checked indefault and [First Language](combo box)is “English”.

[First Language] Print in the language selected in the first language.[First/Second Language] Print in the languages selected in the First language

and the Second language.[First Language] (combo box) Specify the first language. In default, "English” is

set.

[Second Language] (combo box) Specify the second language. When [First/SecondLanguage] is selected, it is possible to specify.In default, "English” is set.

[Print] Group Specify the cover page print. In default, [Cover] is notchecked.

[Cover] Specify the presence of the cover page. A file can bespecified when this item is checked. The file can beselected with the “File” button. The format of the cover





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

page file which can be selected is a metafile.



[Help] Button Refer to help of the Common I tem.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.9 Printer set screen 5.3.9.1 Printer setting

Set the printer.

Fig. 5.3.9.1 Printer set screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Printer] Group The printer setting and display information.

[Name] Set the printer used. Choose the Default Printer; orchoose the Specific Printer option and select one of thecurrent installed printers shown in the box. You installprinters and configure ports using the Windows ControlPanel.

[Cond] Display the state of the selected printer.[Kind] Display the kind of the selected printer.[Spot] Display the place of the selected printer.[Cmnt] Display additional information on the selected printer.

[OK] Button Save the printer setting and end printer dialog.[Cancel] Button Discontinue the printer setting and end printer dialog.[Page] Button Display print setting Dialog to set the number of lines

per one form the margin, etc..Refer to 5.3.9.2 - 5.3.9.6 for details.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.9.2 Line CountSet the line count, and point of character/line, and font which can be printed on one page,when printing other than the Ladder Diagram and Step Sequence Diagram.

Fig. 5.3.9.2 Line Count set screen

Details of each item are as follows.[L ine Count] Specify the maximum number of lines, which can be

printed on one page. Line Point and Font Size might beautomatically adjusted according to Line Count.In default, “72” is set.

[Char Point] Set the width of the character by point. Font Size mightbe automatically adjusted according to Char Point.In default, “10” is set.

[L ine Point] Set the height of one line by point. L ine Count and FontSize might be automatically adjusted according to LinePoint. I n default, “10” is set.

[Font] Group Specify font.[Font Face] Set the font face. In default, “System” is set.[Font Size] Set the font size. L ine Count, Char Point and L ine Point

might be automatically adjusted according to Font Size.In default, “10” is set.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[Reset] Button Reset all the items of “Line Count” page to the default.[OK] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog.[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting

dialog.[Help] Button Display the help of Line Count.

5.3.9.3 Line Count (Ladder)Set the line count printed on one page, and point of character/line, and font etc., when

theLadder Diagram and the Step Sequence Diagram is printed.

Fig. 5.3.9.3 Line Count (Ladder) set screen

Details of each item are as follows.[L ine Count] Specify the maximum number of lines, which can be

printed on one page. Line Point and Font Size might beautomatically adjusted according to Line Count.In default, “78” is set.

[Char Point] Set the width of the character by point. Font Size mightbe automatically adjusted according to Char Point.In default, “9” is set.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[L ine Point] Set the height of one line by point. L ine Count and FontSize might be automatically adjusted according to LinePoint. I n default, “9” is set.

[Font] Group Specify font.[Ladder Data] Select Ladder Data for which the Font is set.[Font Face] Set the font face with which selected [Ladder Data] is

printed. The all default is “System”.[Font Size] Set the font size with which selected [Ladder Data] is

printed. Line Count, Char Point and Line Point might beautomatically adjusted according to Font Size. The alldefault is “9”.

[Reset] Button Reset all the items of “Line Count(Ladder)” page to thedefault.

[OK] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog.[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting

dialog.[Help] Button Display the help of L ine Count(Ladder).





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.9.4 MarginSet margin at the top, bottom, right and left in the print page.

Fig. 5.3.9.4 Margin set screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Upper] Set an upper margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm).

In default, “20” is set.[Under] Set an under margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm).

In default, “10” is set.[Right] Set a right margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm).

In default, “10” is set.

[Left] Set a left margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm).In default, “10” is set.


dialog.[Help] Button Display the help of Margin.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.9.5 Paper SizeSet the size of the printed form.

Fig. 5.3.9.5 Paper Size set screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Size] Set the size of the form. In default, “A4” is set.


dialog.[Help] Button Display the help of Paper Size.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.9.6 Print TypeSet various items concerning the frame added to the print page.

Fig. 5.3.9.6 Print Type set screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Frame Print] Group Set the presence of the frame and the character string

printed. If [Frame Print] is not checked, the followingsetting cannot be done.

[File] Specify the metafile name used when the frame isprinted. The file name can be selected with the “File”button.

[Data] Specify the data for which the character string,coordinates, and font are set.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[String] Specify the printed character string set with [Data]. The data specification by the following forms is alsopossible.

%[T]: Print the title data.%[S]: Print the sub title data.%[P]: Print the program name.%[N]: Print page number.

Default is as follows.String Data 1: %[P]String Data 2: %[T]String Data 3: %[N]String Data 4: %[S]String Data 5 is not set.

[X Pos] Specify the print beginning position (X coordinates) of thecharacter string set with [Data]. The unit is a millimeter(mm). Default is as follows.

String Data 1: 10String Data 2: 75String Data 3: 180String Data 4: 75String Data 5: 0

[Y Pos] Specify the print beginning position (Y coordinates) of thecharacter string set with [Data]. The unit is a millimeter(mm). Default is as follows.

String Data 1: 10String Data 2: 10

String Data 3: 10String Data 4: 15String Data 5: 0

[Font] Group Specify the font set with [Data].[Font Face] Specify the font face set with [Data]. The all default is

“System”.[Font Size] Specify the font size set with [Data]. The all default is

“12”.


dialog.[Help] Button Display the help of Print type.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.10 ToolbarThe toolbar is displayed below the menu bar at the top of the application window.The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many tools used in Ladder PrinterTool for PMC.To hide or display the Toolbar, choose Toolbar from the “View” menu.

Fig. 5.3.10 Toolbar

Details of each button are as follows.

Tool Operation

Open an existing document. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC displays theopen dialog box, in which you can locate and open the desired file. I t isa shortcut to “5.3.5.1 (1)Program Open” and “5.3.6.1 (1)Program Open”.

Open the print dialog. It is a shortcut to “5.3.6.1 (3)Print”. However,this button is invalid and cannot be selected by an initial menubecause the program is not selected.

Display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of LadderPrinter Tool for PMC. I t is a shortcut to “5.3.5.3 (2)Version” and“5.3.6.3 (2)Version”.

Use the Context Help command to obtain help on some portion of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. When you choose the Toolbar's ContextHelp button, the mouse pointer will change to an arrow and question

mark. Then click somewhere in the Ladder Printer Tool for PMCwindow, such as another Toolbar button. The Help topic will be shownfor the item you clicked.





OPERATOR’S MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3.11 Status BarThe status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC window.To display or hide the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the “View” menu.

The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the arrow keysto navigate through menus. This area similarly shows messages that describe the actionsof toolbar buttons as you depress them, before releasing them. I f after viewing thedescription of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command,then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button.

The center area of the status bar displayed the program name and the PMC modelname. The right area of the status bar displayed the state of ON/OFF of a special

key.Pane1 Simple helpPane2 Program namePane3 PMC modelPane4 State of key : Latched down is displayed

[Scroll L ock] Key, [NUM Lock] Key, and [Caps Lock] Key from theright

Simple help Program name PMC model State of key

Fig. 5.3.11 Status Bar



FAPT LADDER-II

SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATOR’S

MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

TECHNICAL REPORT No. TMN99/30E

Date,4 March 1999General Manager of Application Software Laboratory

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to:O Your information

O GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E

FANUC RoboticsCINCINNATI MILACRON

O Machine tool builder

Sales agency

End user


3. NoticeFAPT LADDER-II


Drawing

No.

B-66184EN/02-6 (01/25 to 25/25)


Type of data

IDEOriginal section of issue

GeneralManager

SectionManager

Person inCharge



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

FAPT LADDER-II



Name FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL


Summary of Change

Group Name/Outline

New, Add,

Correct,

Delete

Applicable

Date

Basic

Function

Programming PMC-NB6

Saving and restoring the print options

Changing the print option set screens

AddFeb. 1999

or later

Optional

Function

Unit

Maintenance

Parts

Notice

Correction

Another



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

FAPT LADDER-II


Contents

1. Outline.......................................................................................................................................42. Applied Software .......................................................................................................................43. Programming PMC-NB6............................................................................................................5

3.1 Supported PMC models .....................................................................................................53.2 System parameters ............................................................................................................6

4. Saving and restoring the options on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC........................................84.1 Changing Menu configuration.............................................................................................84.2 Initial menu.......................................................................................................................104.3 Program opening menu....................................................................................................12

5. Print option setting screen on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC ...............................................135.1 Ladder Diagram print........................................................................................................135.2 Cross Reference print.......................................................................................................165.3 Bit Address Map print.......................................................................................................20

6. Operating environment............................................................................................................227. Available characters in symbol ................................................................................................248. Config file................................................................................................................................25



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

1. OutlineThe following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added.

- Programming PMC-NB6- Saving and restoring the print options- Changing the print option set screens

This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions.Other explanation (existign functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following

manual.Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items

FAPT LADDER-IIOPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-66184EN

Operation forFAPT LADDER-II


FAPT LADDER-II

Name Specification Version

FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 3.2 or later

PMC Control Software (for Series 15i )


PMC-NB6 control software 404A 01 or later



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3. Programming PMC-NB63.1 Supported PMC models(Correct a part of the “For PMC models” table of “1.1 Overview”)[present]

Abbreviations PMC Models

PMC-SA1PMC-SA3

FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3

....

....PMC-NBPMC-NB2

FANUC PMC-MODEL NBFANUC PMC-MODEL NB2

[correction]Abbreviations PMC Models

PMC-SA1PMC-SA3

FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3

....

....

PMC-NBPMC-NB2

PMC-NB6

FANUC PMC-MODEL NBFANUC PMC-MODEL NB2

FANUC PMC-MODEL NB6

(Correct a part of the “1.2.2 PMC models to be supported”)[present]

PMC-SA1PMC-SA3 (Note1)........

PMC-NB2PMC-PA3PMC-QC (Note1)

[correction]PMC-SA1PMC-SA3........

PMC-NB2PMC-NB6PMC-PA3PMC-QC (Note1)



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3.2 System parameters(Add after the “(ii) PMC-SC3/SC4/QC/NB/NB2” of

“4.5.2.6 (4)System parameter editing screen and input item for each PMC model“)(iv) PMC-NB6

Refer to the “PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL”(B-61863E) about setting value of Each System parameters.

Fig. 4.5.2.6(c)



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(Add after the “④PMC-QC/NB/NB2” of “4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (Single-Format) (a)Parameter“)

⑤ PMC-NB6

Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used),specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED imageaddress as follows:

%@02 BCD3 NO

4 PMC-NB67 100%[EOB]

2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not

used)4. PMC model (PMC-NB6)7. Ladder execution time (1% to 150%)

3. YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

4. Saving and restoring the options on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC4.1 Changing Menu configuration(Replace the “6.3.3 Menu configuration”)

6.3.3 Menu configurationThe configuration of menu, which this tool displays, is as follows.(1) Initial menu

Initial menu View

Help

File

Status Bar

Tool Bar

Topic

Version

Refer to Fig. 6.3.3.1(b)

Fig. 6.3.3.1(a) Menu configuration chart

File

Open Program

Save Option File

Restore Option File

Exit




FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(2) Program opening menu

Program openingmenu

View

Help

File

Status Bar

Tool Bar

Help

Version

Refer to Fig. 6.3.3.2(b)

Fig. 6.3.3.2(a) Menu configuration

File

Open Program

Exit


Close Program

Print

Preview

Printer

Save Option File

Restore Option File



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(Replace the “Fig. 6.3.4.2 [File] menu screen” of “6.3.4 Example of basic operation when printing”)

Fig. 6.3.4.2 [File] menu screen

4.2 Initial menu

(Correct a part of the “6.3.5 Initial menu”)[present]6.3.5 Initial menu

The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder

Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are threemenus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu.Select [File] to open the program.

……

[correction]6.3.5 Initial menu

The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder

Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are threemenus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu.Select [File] to open the program or to save a option file or restore a option file.

……



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(Replace the “Fig. 6.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen” of “6.3.5.1 File”)

Fig. 6.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen

(Insert after the “(1) Open Program” of “6.3.5.1 File”)(2) Save Option File

Save the print option setting to a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen wherethe file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which isdisplayed.After inputting the option file name which you want to save, click [Save] button.

Click[Cancel] button to discontinue saving the print option setting to the file.

(3) Restore Option FileRestore the print option setting from a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen

wherethe file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is

displayed.

After inputting the option file name which you wants to restore, click [Open] button.Click[Cancel] button to discontinue restoring the print option setting from the file.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

4.3 Program opening menu(Replace the “Fig. 6.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening) of “6.3.6.1 File ”)

Fig. 6.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening)

(Insert after the “(2) Close Program” of “6.3.6.1 File”)(3) Save Option File

Save the print option setting to a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen wherethe file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is

displayed.After inputting the option file name which you want to save, click [Save] button.

Click[Cancel] button to discontinue saving the print option setting to the file.

(4) Restore Option FileRestore the print option setting from a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen

where

the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which isdisplayed.After inputting the option file name which you wants to restore, click [Open] button.

Click[Cancel] button to discontinue restoring the print option setting from the file.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5. Print option setting screen on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC5.1 Ladder Diagram print(Replace the “(1)Ladder Diagram print option screen” of “6.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print”)

(1) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Fig. 6.3.8.5(a) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.

[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Ladder Diagram to

beprinted. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” isset.

[Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when theframeprint is specified. A title and a sub title can bespecifiedup to 60 characters.

[Title] Specify the title of the Ladder Diagram print. In

default,“Ladder Diagram” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title printed with the Ladder Diagram. Any character string is not set in default.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[Print Range] Group Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked.[All] All are printed.[Net No.] Specify the range of the net, which you want to print.[Page No.] Specify the range of the page, which you want to

print.

[Print Program] Group Set printing Ladder Program. In default, [All] ischecked.

[All] All are printed.[Unit] Print specified subprogram. Input the subprogram

namewhich you want to print, or select the subprogramnamefrom combo box.

[Page Feed] Group Specify form feed.[Page Feed(Sub Program)] Specify the presence of form feed for each subprogram.

Default is no form feed.

[Details…] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Ladder Diagram print.

The Ladder Diagram detailed setting dialog isdisplayedwhen selecting. Refer to “(2) Ladder Diagram printoptiondetailed screen” for details.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and do preview of theLadder Diagram. This button is effective when any printitem is selected.


[Cancel] Button Discontinue the print option setting and end the print

option setting dialog.[Help] Button Refer to help of the Ladder Diagram print option.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(Replace the “(2)Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen” of “6.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print”)

(2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Fig. 6.3.8.5(b) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Step No./Net No.] group Specify the presence of the step number / net number.

[Step No.] Specify the presence of the step number. Default ischecked.

[Net No.] Specify the presence of the net number. Default ischecked.

[Line] Group Specify the space between lines in the net. In default,

[Narrow] is checked.[Narrow] Print the lines of the net with narrow space.[Wide] Print the lines of the net with wide space.

[Relay/Coil] Group Specify the data printed for each contact. In default,[Symbol] is checked.

[Symbol] Print the symbol data of contact.[Relay Comment] Print the relay comment data of contact.

[Cross Reference] Specify the presence of cross reference. Default is nocross reference.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.2 Cross Reference print(Replace the “(1)Cross Reference print option screen” of “6.3.8.9 Cross Reference print”)

(1) Cross Reference print option screen

Fig. 6.3.8.9(a) Cross Reference print option screen


[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Cross Reference.An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set.


[Title] Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Indefault,“Cross Reference” is set.

[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Any




FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


print. Refer to “Table 6.3.8.9(b)” for the specificationof range.

[Address Kind] Specify the kind of the address, which you want to

print. The plural items can be specified.

[Print Guidance] Group Set a guidance/sub guidance of the output form. Theguidance/sub guidance can be specified up to 19characters.

[Guidance] Set a guidance of the output form. In default,“STEP NO./NET NO.” is set.

[Sub Guidance] Set a sub guidance of the output form. Any characterstring is not set in default.

[Page/Line Feed] Group Specify form feed.

[Line Feed Count] Specify the number of line feed inserted between theaddresses. A value of 0-9 can be specified.In default, “1” is set.

[Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between differentkindsof address. Default is checked.

[Details…] Button Specify a detailed setting for the Cross Reference. TheCross Reference print detailed setting dialog isdisplayedwhen selecting. Refer to “(2) Cross Reference printoption

detailed screen” for details.[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and preview the Cross

Reference. This button is effective when any printitem is selected.

[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print optionsetdialog.


[Help] Button Refer to help of the Cross Reference print option.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Table 6.3.8.9(b) Specification of address of Cross Reference print table


Example of key input

Output address



Address

range specification

F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within the

specified rangeF10.5-F10 To the specified byte address

from the specified bit address

(Replace the “(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen” of “6.3.8.9 Cross Reference print”)

(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

Fig. 6.3.8.9(c) Cross Reference print option detailed screen



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

Details of each item are as follows.[Print Information] Group Set the printed step/net number.

[Step No.] Print the step number. Specify it the step number isprinted and the first character. [Step No.] is checked

indefault and [Top Char] is “S”.

[Net No.] Print the net number. Specify it the net number is

printed and the first character. [Net No.] is checked indefault and [Top Char] is “N”.

[Print No. Type] Set the number print form. In default, “Step No./NetNo.”is set.

[Coil Guidance] Group Set the coil guidance. In default, [Ladder DiagramGraphics] is checked.

[Ladder Diagram Graphics] Print by the graphic same as the ladderdiagram.

[User Define String] Print by the character string, which the user defined. The following four can be defined, when [User Define

String] is selected. Four all can be specified up to 13characters.

[Read] Specify the character string to indicate the referenceby Read contact. In default, “Read” is set.

[Write] Specify the character string to indicate the referenceby Write contact. In default, “Write” is set.

[Set] Specify the character string to indicate the referenceby Set contact. In default, “Set” is set.

[Reset] Specify the character string to indicate the reference

by Reset contact. In default, “Reset” is set.

[Comment] Group Specify the printed comment. In default,[Relay Comment] is checked.

[Relay Comment] Print the relay comment.[Coil Comment] Print the coil comment.

[Double Check] Specify whether the checking of writing the coildoubly and the double use of the function instruction isexecuted.Default is not checked.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5.3 Bit Address Map print(Replace the “6.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print”)

6.3.8.10 Bit Address Map printSet the option of the Bit Address Map.

Fig. 6.3.8.10(a) Bit Address Map print option screen

Details of each item are as follows.[Start Page No.] Group Set page number.[Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Bit Address Map

print. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” isset.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


[Title] Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Indefault,

“Bit Address Map” is set.[Sub Title] Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Any



print. Refer to “Table 6.3.8.10(b)” for the specificationof range.

[Address Kind] Specify the kind of the address, which you want toprint.

The plural items can be specified.[Using Address] Print only the address used. Default is checked.

[Page Feed] Group Specify form feed.[Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different

kindsof the addresses. Default is checked.

[Use Address Mark] Group Specify the use address mark.[Use Address Mark] An arbitrary sign can be set in the used address

mark.Specify one character. In default, “@” is set.

[Details…] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Bit Address Mapprint. The Bit Address Map print detailed set dialog isdisplayed when selecting. Refer to “2 Bit Address Mapprint option detailed screen” for details.

[Preview] Button Save the print option setting and preview the BitAddressMap print. This button is effective when any printitem isselected.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[OK] Button Save the print option setting and end the print optionsetdialog.


[Help] Button Refer to help of the Bit Address Map printoption.

Table 6.3.8.10(b) Specification of address of Bit Address Map print tableAddress specificationKind

Example of key input

Output address

Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bitaddress


AddressRange specification

F10.0-F12.7 All addresses withinthe specified range

F10-F20 All addresses withinthe specified range

6. Operating environment(Correct a part of the “2 Operating environment”)[present]

....

Memory Conventional memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 2)EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended) (Note 3)

....

[correction]

.... Memory Conventional memory 540 Kbytes or more (Note 2)EMS and/or XMS memory 4 Mbytes or more of EMS and/or XMS in total (recommended) (Note3)

....

(Correct a part of the “Note 2” of “2 Operating environment”)(Note 2) Even if the computer has 640 Kbytes memory, the free memory may be less

than540 Kbytes when an installed driver, for example, uses a large memory space.

The size of free space in memory can be checked with the DOS commandCHKDSKor MEM.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(Correct a part of the “About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:” of “2 Operating environment”)

[present]About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as a

temporary area. Although, FAPT LADDER runs with no EMS & XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle will be

necessary for better performance.(1) Expansion memory ……

[correction]About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder, symbol & comment data and On-line

Function as a temporary area. A part of function in FAPT LADDER-II dose not run if there is no EMS and/or XMS memory. EMS and/or XMS memory are necessary.Enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle

will be necessary for better performance.(1) Expansion memory ........(4) On-line Function

When using On-line function, 1Mbytes or more EMS and/or XMS memory arenecessary



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

7. Available characters in symbol(Correct a part of the “(2) Symbol & comment specification list” of

“1.3.2 About Symbol & Comment Data”)(Correct a part of the “2.1 Operating environment”)[present]

(2) Symbol & comment specification list(a) For input signal and internal relay

Specification Symbol …

Availablecharacters

ASCII characters(lower-case alphabeticcharacters not allowed)

Maximum cha. 16byte

Maximumnumber

20,000 entries (Note)

Duplicateddefinition

Not allowed …

Display onCRT/MDI

Yes, if it is 6bytes orshorter.

[correction]

(2) Symbol & comment specification list(a) For input signal and internal relay

Specification Symbol …

Availablecharacters

ASCII characters(lower-case alphabeticcharacters and spacecharacter are not

allowed）

Maximum cha. 16byte

Maximumnumber

20,000 entries (Note)

Duplicated

definition

Not allowed …

Display onCRT/MDI

Yes, if it is 6bytes orshorter



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

8. Config file(Replace the “2.1 Config.sys”)

2.5 CONFIG.SYS

To use the system, make the following modifications to the CONFIG file.The CONFIG file of each OS is as follows.

a) For WindowsNT4.0 CONFIG.NT

b) For Windows95 CONFIG.SYSc) For DOS CONFIG.SYS

(1) When the system is used under WindowsNT4.0[ The following example shows the case when WindowsNT4.0 is installed

in C:\WINNT ]Specify the “ANSI.SYS” in “CONFIG.NT” file. The “CONFIG.NT” file and “ANSI.SYS”

file are usually in the following folder. Check if these file are in the folder.C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\

Add the following line to “CONFIG.NT” file by using a text editor.devicehigh=%SystemRoot%\system32\ansi.sys

(2) When the system is used under Windows 95[ The following example shows the case when Windows 95 is installed

in C:\WINDOWS ]DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\ANSI.SYSDEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE

When the system is used under Windows95, the Japanese input system is notspecified

in the “CONFIG.SYS” file.In DOS mode, only the DOS version Japanese input system can be used. The DOS version Japanese input system can be installed by using the ADDDRVcommand. For details of the installation method, see “DOSIME.BAT” under theCOMMAND director of Windows and “DOSIME.SYS” under the root directory of

thestart-up disk.

(3)When the system is used under DOS[ The following example shows the case when DOS is already installed in C:\DOS ]

DEVICE=C:\DOS\ANSI.SYSDEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXEDEVICE=C:\DOS\MSIME.SYSDEVICE=C:\DOS\MSIMEK.SYS



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

[ About device drivers ]a)ANSI.SYS (required)The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This setting cannotbe omitted.

b)EMM386.EXEThis device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS memory. Whenusing another EMS driver, refer to the relevant manual for details of settingrequired in “CONFIG.SYS”.

c)MSIME.SYS / MSIMEK.SYSThis device driver enables the use of MS-KANJI API for Japanese-language

input.When using another Japanese language input system, refer to the relevant

manualfor details of the setting required in “CONFIG.SYS”.

Notes1. All of the above device drivers are provided as standard withWindowsNT4.0 /

Windows95 / MS-DOS. The specification of switches and parameters may

berequired for the above settings. For details, refer to the on-line help or therelevant manual for the WindowsNT4.0 / Windows95 / MS-DOS.

2. When using a memory card, refer to the manual provided with thememory

card for details of the setting required in CONFIG file.3. Some device drivers may adversely affect the FAPT LADDER-II. If aproblem

is anticipated, specify only “ANSI.SYS” in CONFIG file. Omit the specified,FAPT LADDER-II will support only English, but allows any contention withother device drivers to be identified quickly. Recognized conflicts are listed

in

Appendix 7.



TECHNICAL REPORT No. TMN99/145E

Date 15 October, 1999General Manager of Application Software

Development Department



O Your information


FANUC Robotics

CINCINNATI MILACRON


Sales agency

End user


3. NoticeFAPT LADDER-II


Drawing

No.

B-66184EN/02-7 (01/16 to 16/16)


Type of data

No. AS0S2-99/A030October.15.1999

IDEOriginal section of issue

GeneralManager

SectionManager

Person inCharge



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL

01 99.10.15 K.Yamamoto New making B-66184EN/02-7


TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

FAPT LADDER-II





Summary of Change

Group Name/Outline

New, Add,

Correct,

Delete

Applicable

Date

Basic

Function

I/O Link expansion

(Only for PMC-SB6 for Series 16i /18i

/21i)

Improvement of partial protection

function of ladder program by

special password

(Only for PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ)for Series 16i /18i /21i)

AddOct. 1999

or later

Optional

Function

Unit

Maintenance

Parts

NoticeCorrection

Another



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

FAPT LADDER-II


Contents

1. Outline____________________________________________________________________ 4

2. Applied Software___________________________________________________________ 4

3. I/O Link expansion ________________________________________________________ 5

3.1 The number of I/O Link channel______________________________________________ 5

3.2 Mnemonic Editing____________________________________________________________ 6

4. The improvement of partial protection function of ladder program

by special password _________________________________________________ 8

5. DATA TRANSFER CABLES ________________________________________________15



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


- I/O Link expansion- Improvement of partial protect funciotn of ladder program by special password

This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions.Other explanation (existing functions and operation,etc.) are described in the followingmanual.

Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items

FAPT LADDER-IIOPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-66184EN

Operation forFAPT LADDER-II


FAPT LADDER-II(1) I/O Link expansion



(2) Improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by specialpassword



PMC Control Software (for Series 16i /18i /21i )

(1) I/O Link expansion


PMC-SB5/SB6 control software 406A 15 or later



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3. I/O Link expansion3.1 The number of I/O Link channel(Insert after the “(3) Specifying the direction for online communication”

in "4.4.1 Program selection")

(4) Specifying the number of I/O Link channel

When models in which more than two channels can be set is selected, the followingmenu is displayed.

In this menu., it selects the number of I/O Link channel.(When model is PMC-QC this menu is not displayed, because PMC-QC always has twochannels.)



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3.2 Mnemonic Editing(Correct a part of the “①PMC-PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6 “

"4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format) (a)Parameter")

[present]① PMC- PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6

[correction]① PMC- PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6

%@0↓2 BINARY↓3 NO↓4 PMC-RB4%↓

[EOB]

2.Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)3.Whether an operator's panel (YES:Used,NO:Not used)4.PMC model (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA1/PMC-RA3/ PMC-

RA5/PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB5/PMC-RB6/PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ)/

PMC-RB6(IO-2)/PMC-RB6(STEP,IO-2))

%@0↓2 BINARY↓

3 NO↓4 PMC-RB4%↓

[EOB]

2.Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)3.Whether an operator's panel (YES:Used,NO:Not used)4.PMC model (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA1/PMC-RA3/ PMC-

RA5/PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB5/

PMC-RB6/PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ))



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(Add to the "[Setting data table to "PMC model" parameter（each PMC model）] "of "4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files(single-format) (a)Parameter ")

[present]

PMC model Setting data (Normal-width character string)

PMC-SA1 PMC-RA1

PMC-SA3 PMC-RA3

PMC-SA5 PMC-RA5

PMC-SB3 PMC-RB3

PMC-SB4 PMC-RB4

PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)

PMC-SB5 PMC-RB5

PMC-SB6 PMC-RB6


PMC-SC3 PMC-RC3

PMC-SC4 PMC-RC4

PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ)

PMC-NB PMC-NBPMC-NB2 PMC-NB2

PMC-PA3 PMC-PA3

PMC-QC PMC-QC

[correcting]

PMC model Setting data (Normal-width character string)

PMC-SA1 PMC-RA1

PMC-SA3 PMC-RA3

PMC-SA5 PMC-RA5

PMC-SB3 PMC-RB3

PMC-SB4 PMC-RB4PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)

PMC-SB5 PMC-RB5

PMC-SB6 PMC-RB6


PMC-SB6(IO-2) PMC-RB6(IO-2)

PMC-SB6(STEP,IO-2) PMC-RB6(STEP,IO-2)

PMC-SC3 PMC-RC3

PMC-SC4 PMC-RC4

PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ)

PMC-NB PMC-NB

PMC-NB2 PMC-NB2

PMC-NB6 PMC-NB6

PMC-PA3 PMC-PA3

PMC-QC PMC-QC



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

4. The improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password

(Replace the “4.5.4.3 Password set function”)

4.5.4.3 Password set function

This function is supported only in the series 15-B/16/18/21-B, Series 16/18/21-C,

Power Mate-H, Series 15i, Series 16i /18i /21i –A, and Power Mate i –D/H.

It enables a password to be added during compilation. The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or editedon theCTR/MDI. This function requires to be set the program option. (Refer to 4.5.7 Settingprogram options.)

(1) Password(a)Password types

Type UsePassword(R) Password to allow display on the CNC

Password (R/W) Password to allow display and editing on the CNC

(b)Password setting(compile)1 When no password → Go to ⑩.

When password RW&R,RW,RAfter compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted tospecify whetherto use a password.。

To set a password, press Y → password RW&R or R go to②.It is unnecessary to set a password, press N → password RW go to ⑥.

2 The password® set screen appears.

3 Enter a password ・A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/ornumerals.・ Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other.(If a

lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)・ It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as

*,#,and @).

Do ou enter assword ? Y/N

Enter password (R)



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

・Some character strings are unusable.If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message isdisplayed. In such a case, use another character string.

・An entered password is not displayed on the screen.・ If the <Enter> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of

a password is not specified.→ If password=RW&R go to ⑥.If password=R go to ⑩.

・ When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued→ go to ①.

4 The password configuration screen appears.

5 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensurethat

your password was entered correctly.

・ When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, itisaccepted

・ When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed.You are allowed to retry entering twice.


If password=R is specified. → go to ⑩.⑥ The password(R/W) set screen appears.

⑦Enter a password(R/W). ・A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/ornumerals.・ Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other.(If a

lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)・ It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as

*,#,and @). ・Some character strings are unusable.

If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message isdisplayed. In such a case, use another character string.

・An entered password is not displayed on the screen.

・ If the <Enter> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a password is not specified.→ go to⑩.・ When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued

→ go to ①.⑧ The password confirmation screen appears.

Verification(R/W)

Enter password (R/W)

Verification(R)



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

⑨You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensurethat

your password was entered correctly.・ When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it

isaccepted

・ When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed.You are allowed to retry entering twice.


⑩Compilation begins.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(2)Special password(a)Partial protecting function

Partial protection of a ladder program can be done by dividing thesubprogram area into the protected area and the non-protected area by using a special password.

Protected area : Inputting password is necessary to display and edit a ladder program on CRT/MDI.

Non-protected area : To display and edit on CRT/MDI arepermitted without inputting password.

(b)Applied PMC models This function can be used by following PMCs with step sequence function.

PMC-RB4(STEP)/RC4(STEP) /RB6(STEP)/RB6(STEP,IO-2)/NB2(STEP)(c)Protected area / Non-protected area

The protected area and the non-protected area are decided according tothe subprogram number. Refer to the following for details.

Main-program LEVEL1LEVEL2LEVEL3

ProtectedProtectedProtected

Subprogram P1～P1499P1500～P2000

ProtectedNon-Protected

(d)Setting of password The password(R/W) which starts with "#" is to be set.

Example) #FANUCFor the operation to set the special password, refer to "(1) Password (b)Passwordsetting(compile)" because it is similar to a normal password.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(Replace the “4.5.5.3 Password”)

4.5.5.3 Password(1)Password

To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a password.

Set password type Password type to beentered

Both password(R) and password(R/W) Password (R/W)

Password(R/W) Password (R/W)

Password (R) Password (R)

①After the discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password entry screenappears.

Note) If an R/W password has been set up, “Password(R/W)” is displayed.

②When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is displayed, andprocessing discontinues.(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)When <Esc> is pressed, the request to start discompilation is rejected.

(2)Special password There are two ways of decompilations of an object file with a specialpassword as follows.

(a)Decompilation of all programs (Necessary a special password input) The procedure of a decompilation is similar to that of an object protectedby a 'non-special' password. Refer to "(1)password".

(b)Decompilation of non-protected subprograms area only (Not necessary a special password input)

In OFF-LINE FUNCTION, it is possible to edit only non-protected subprogramsarea,(A printout is also possible. But it is impossible to convert to a mnemonic filebecause a source program of a protected area is not created.)Re-compilation after modifying of non-protected area is possible. But thepassword set function is disabled. A special password in a decompiled object fileis automatically embedded and the protected area is re-protected.

Enter password(R)



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

The decompilation procedure is as follows.i) Select [EXEC] for a decompilation. a password input screen is displayed.

ii)To decompile only subprograms of non-protected area, press <Enter>

key without entering a password. To cancel a decompilation, press <Esc> key.

Enter password (R/W)



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(Correct a part of the “4.5.7.1 Compile“ (4) Password in "4.5.7 Setting program options")

[present](4) Password

This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compil

time.

[NO] : Does not display the dialog box.(Password setting is disabled.)[RW&R] : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the

password (R) setting dialog box.[RW] : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box.[R] : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

[correcting](4) Password

This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compil

time.

[NO] : Does not display the dialog box.(Password setting is disabled.)[RW&R] : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the

password (R) setting dialog box.[RW] : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box.[R] : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

Note) Password setting is disabled when only a non-protected subprograms area of an object file with a special password has been decompiled. To enable apassword setting, please decompile all programs with a special passwordinput .

(Please refer to “(2) Special password” in “4.5.5.3 Password”)



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

5. DATA TRANSFER CABLES

Replace “APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLES”

APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLE

Use the cables below to transfer data from PC to a CNC, P-G(P-G Mark II or P-G Mate),or ROM writer(FA writer or PMC writer).

1. For IBM PC/AT

(1)

CNC / P-G /

ROM writer

9-pinfemale

25-pin maleconnector

IBM PC/AT

CD(1)

RD(2)

SD(3)

ER(4)

SG(5)

DR(6)

RS(7)

CS(8)

(2)SD

(3)RD

(6)DR

(7)SG

(8)CD

(5)CS

(4)RS

(20)ER

A02B-0200-



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(2)

CD(1)

RD(2)

SD(3)

ER(4)

SG(5)

DR(6)

RS(7)

CS(8)CI(9)

(2)SD

(3)RD

(4)RS

(5)CS

(20)ER

(6)DR

(8)CD

(7)SG

(1)FG

IBM PC/AT

CNC / P-G /

ROM writer

9-pinfemale

connector

25-pinfemale

connecto

25-pinmale

connecto

25-pinmale

connector

(8)CD

(3)RD

(2)SD

(20)ER

(7)SG

(6)DR

(4)RS

(5)CS

(22)CI

SD(2)

RD(3)

RS(4)

CS(5)

ER(20)DR(6)

CD(8)

SG(7)

FG(1)

IBM PC/AT CABLE A08B-0031-



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL



TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

２．For IBM PS/2

SD(2)

RD(3)

RS(4)

CS(5)

ER(20)

DR(6)

CD(8)

SG(7)

FG(1)

(2)SD

(3)RD

(4)RS

(5)CS

(20)ER

(6)DR

(8)CD

(7)SG

(1)FG

IBM PS/2

CNC / P-G /

ROM writer

25-pinfemale

connecto

25-pinfemale

connecto

25-pinmale

connecto

25-pinmale

connecto

(2)SD

(3)RD

(4)RS

(5)CS

(20)ER

(6)DR

(8)CD(7)SG

(1)FG

SD(2)

RD(3)

RS(4)

CS(5)

ER(20)DR(6)

CD(8)

SG(7)

FG(1)

IBM PS/2 CABLE A08B-0031-



TECHNICAL REPORT NO. TMN 00/108E

Date 7 July, 2000

General Manager of

Software Laboratory



O Your information


FANUC Robotics

CINCINNATI MILACRON


Sales agency

End user


3. Notice

FAPT LADDER-II


Drawing

No.

B-66184EN/02-8 1/9 to 9/9


Type of data

No. FLB7-00/7023

Original section of issue

IDEFLB7

ManagerFLB74Chief

Person inCharge



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL

B-66184EN/02-8


TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

FAPT LADDER-II





Summary of Change

Group Name/Outline New, Add,

Correct,

Delete

Applicable

Date

Basic

FunctionImprovement of program option setting. Add

Jun. 2000

or later

Optional

Function

Unit

MaintenanceParts

Notice

Correction

Another

01 00.06.26 Newly Registration.



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL

B-66184EN/02-8


TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

FAPT LADDER-II


Contents

1. Outline____________________________________________________________________3

2. Applied Software___________________________________________________________3

3. Setting Program Options ___________________________________________________4

3.1 Menu Display __________________________________________________________ 4

3.2 Compile _______________________________________________________________4

3.3 Mnemonic Editing______________________________________________________ 6

3.4 Modifying Program Option Initial Values(OPTION.CNF) __________________6

4. Symbol & Comment Editing _______________________________________________8

5. Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program ________________________9



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL

B-66184EN/02-8


TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.


Improvement of program option setting.

This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions.

Other explanation (existing functions and operation,etc.) are described in the followingmanual.

Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items

FAPT LADDER-II

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-66184EN Operation for

FAPT LADDER-II

2. Applied SoftwareThe additional functions described here in apply to the following software.





FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL

B-66184EN/02-8


TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3. Setting Program Options3.1 Menu Display

(Changing of Figure 4.5.7 in [ 4.5.7 Setting Program Options ])

3.2 Compile

(Add to since item (4) paragraph of [4.5.7.1 Compile])

(5) sym. ( too long strings )

When you compile the source program which contains the symbol which exceeds six characters.How to treat the input signal and the internal relay address is specified.

[ ERROR ] The symbol comment that exceeds six characters in length is considered to be an error,and the compiler is not compiled. (Specification in the past)

[ IGNORE] The symbol comment that exceeds six characters in length is replaced with six characters'worth of a space code and compiled.

Program option set-up

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

C:\DATA\SAMPLE

CompileDecompileMnemonic edit



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL

B-66184EN/02-8


TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

(6) Coil comment languageWhen you compile the source program. The form by which the coil comment is output to theobject file is specified.

[ English ] The Japanese coil comment is replaced with space and the compiler is output to the objectfile.

[ Japanese] The Japanese coil comment is converted into the code data and the compiler is output tothe object file.

(Changing of Figure 4.5.7.1 in [ 4.5.7.1 Compile])

Note 1) A past "Symbol" item changed the name to "Symbol & coil comment".

Note 2) When the parameter of "Symbol/Comment" is assumed "ON", setting the parameter of "sym. (too long strings )" becomes possible.

Note3) Japanese is not displayed on the NC side as for setting the coil comments language, and set"English" mode, please.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[ Compile ]

condense :[

OFF/ON]symbol/comment :[NOT USE /

USE]sym.( too long strings ) :[

ERROR/IGNORE]net comment :[NO/

POINTERS]password :[

NO/RW&R/RW/R]multiple used check :[

NO/YES]Coil comment language :[English/

Japanese]



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL

B-66184EN/02-8


TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3.3 Mnemonic Editing

(Changing of Item 4.5.7.3 in [ 4.5.7.3 Mnemonic Editing])

The thing to choose “Mnemonic edit” from the menu screen displays the option of a mnemonic edit.

(1) Warning detail outThe method of outputting the warning when convert from a mnemonic file to the source file isspecified. (Warning number K:W-4131, K:W-4133, and K:W-4139)

[NO] Conversion from the mnemonic of symbol & comment to the source ends. The generated warning and the frequency are output.

[YES] The warning is output in the location where the warning is generated while converting from themnemonic of symbol & comment to the source. (Specification in the past)

Fig. 4.5.7.3


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[Mnemonic edit]

Warning detail out :[ NO/

YES ]



FAPT LADDER-II


MANUAL

B-66184EN/02-8


TITLE

DRAW.NO.

SHEET

CUST.

3.4 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF)

(The item number of "4.5.7.3 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF)"is changed to "4.5.7.4")

(The item number of "Table 4.5.7.3" is changed to "4.5.7.4", and the following option

items are added)

Subsection Option Setting and function

*COMPAILE Comment_lang 0: The em-size character of the coil comment is replaced with space so

far and output to the object file.

1: The em-size character of the coil comment is output to the object file

by the code.

Symbol_over 0: The address, which includes the symbol that exceeds six

characters, is not compiled.

1: Address is compiled after the symbol, which exceeds six

characters, is converted into the space code.

*MNEMONIC Warning_full 0: When conversion into the source ends, the warning is output.

1: Warning is outputs at each warning generation.



4.Symbol & Comment Editing

Clause (11) of "4.5.2.3 Symbol & Comment editing " is added.

(11) Editing screen (Additional content)

When the "sym.( too long strings )" option is set to "IGNORE". The display value of theregistrationnumber of symbols and the capacity of the coil comment of edit (symbol & comment) screenchanges.

Example: The symbol of NO.6 from NO.3 by seven characters or more. When assuming that the coilcomment is all 30 characters.

Registration number of symbols Capacity of the coil comment

(1) When setting the option "sym.( too long strings )"is made "ERROR".Display at : SYMBOL 000002 000006

COIL_COMMENT 00000060 00000180

(2) When setting the option "sym ( too long strings )"is made "IGNORE"

Edit (symbol & comment

) SB6

<O> C:\FLADDER\SYMBOL 000002 000006 COIL_COMMENT 00000060 00000180

NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT

000001 * X00000.0 A1234 AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA

000002 * X00000.1A12345 AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA

000003 X00000.2 A123456 AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA

000004 Y00000.3 A1234567 AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA

